Quantcast
Channel: Steve Chou – MyWifeQuitHerJob.com
Viewing all 505 articles
Browse latest View live

How Motif Investing And A Little Peer Pressure Rekindled My Interest In Investing

$
0
0

Before starting my online businesses, my primary money making strategy used to be investing and trading stocks.

Every morning, I would wake up at market open, analyze the movers and the shakers, do stock research and plan my next set of trades.

Investing

But at some point in the middle of having my 2 kids and starting my online businesses, I began to neglect my investment portfolio altogether. And for the past 7 years or so, I’ve barely invested any money at all outside of my 401K.

In fact, I’m embarrassed to say this but more than half of my money is simply sitting in cash in a very low interest savings account making practically nothing.

So the beginning of this year, I told myself that I would make a concerted effort to grow my existing stash of cash in addition to my online businesses in order to maximize wealth creation.

Peer Pressure Works

Jeff Rose

Enter my buddy Jeff Rose. As if he sensed that I was wasting my money making potential, Jeff contacted me about this little contest that he holds every year called the “Grow Your Dough Throwdown”.

The Grow Your Dough Throwdown is a mini competition between 20 personal finance bloggers to determine who can grow their money the most in a given calendar year. And the purpose of this contest is to demonstrate to others…

  • How simple it is to get started with investing
  • How easy it is to put your money to work for any sized budget.
  • How straightforward it is to implement many different investing strategies depending on your risk tolerance.

Now Jeff probably didn’t realize this but inviting me to his contest gave me a swift kick in butt to jump start my new years resolution and I will be documenting my investment progress on my blog as well as my standings in the competition.

Investing Is Much Cheaper And Easier Today

Trading Floor

When I first started investing 20 some odd years ago, I remember getting charged an exorbitant amount for every trade. Access to information was much harder to come by and I remember paying extra cash to get real time quotes.

Also back in the day, I pretty much stuck with trading individual stocks, ETFs and mutual funds.

But here’s the thing. I wasn’t ever completely happy with any of these investment methods. For example whenever I purchased stocks, I felt compelled to hold a large number of companies in my portfolio in order to remain diversified.

Some of these stocks were hundreds of dollars per share and with limited funds I’d sometimes only be able to purchase a few shares and have to pay a fee for every trade.

Because diversifying my investments with individual stocks often required a lot of capital that I didn’t have, I eventually started shifting my money over to mutual funds and ETFs.

But mutual funds and ETFs weren’t the answer for me either. Ideally, I wanted more visibility and choice in what stocks each fund carried.

Introducing Motif Investing

Motif Investing

Then I was introduced to Motif Investing, which in my opinion is the best of both worlds. What’s cool about Motif, is that they allow you to create your own basket of stocks called a “motif” and purchase fractional shares of every company in your “motif” in a single transaction.

For example, let’s say I only had 500 dollars and I wanted to buy stock in Google, Facebook and Twitter. Normally, I wouldn’t even be able to afford single share of Google stock.

But with Motif, I can create a basket of stocks containing these 3 companies and invest my $500 in all 3 while only paying a single transaction fee.

No longer do I have to purchase shares of stock in integer quantities. I can simply create collections of stock that I want to purchase and invest any arbitrary amount of money in them.

It’s like being able to create your own mutual fund!

Here’s what’s even cooler. Motif allows you to name these “baskets of stocks” or motifs and share them with your friends. For example, there are hundreds of motifs already created that make investing very simple.

If I want to invest in high dividend stocks, there’s already a motif for that. If I want to invest in oil, there’s a motif for that. Every one of these motifs can be tailored and adjusted for your own individual needs.

For me personally, I love the social aspect of sharing motifs. At any point in time, I can take a peek into what my friends are investing in and easily share our investment strategies. The social aspects of investing with Motif make it particularly attractive and motivates me to check up on my investments more often.

The Contest

Grow Your Dough

For the purposes of this year’s “Grow Your Down” showdown, me and 19 other bloggers are investing $500 into our own motifs and we’ll be tracking our progress throughout the year.

Click Here To Check Out The Complete Leaderboard

In fact, if any of you MyWifeQuitHerJob.com readers want to join in, you can create your own accounts and follow along with the contest.

Right now, Motif is offering a really attractive promotion where you will receive up to $150 in your investment account for signing up and making a trade. It’s free money!

Click here to sign up for a Motif Investing account and receive up to $150 free

Worse case scenario, if you don’t want to use Motif, you can cancel and simply pocket the money.

Here Are The Rules

If you’re interested in throwing down with us, you still have time. Here are the rules that we have:

  • Open a Motif Investing account and deposit $500.
  • In February (the earlier the better), you create a motif and invest anyway you want. No margin is allowed.
  • You can buy/sell as much as you want.
  • You cannot add any more than the original $500.
  • Track your return along with the rest of us.

Conclusion

When it comes to making money, it’s important to take advantage of all possible revenue streams. You should focus on making and saving money with your day job and/or online businesses while simultaneously growing what you already have through investing.

Don’t be a fool like me. I’ve waited far too long to get back into the investing game. With services like Motif Investing, you can easily create your own diversified portfolio with very little money.

So join me in my new years resolution and start taking advantage of what you have in addition to investing in becoming your own boss. And please follow the Grow Your Dough Showdown and apply some much needed peer pressure to get your butt in gear.

Click here to receive up to $150 free when you sign up for a Motif Investing account

photo credit: StockMonkeys.com


MWQHJ 053: How Chris Guthrie Makes 6 Figures Selling WordPress Plugins Online

$
0
0

Chris Guthrie

I met Chris Guthrie at the Fincon Expo and I’m really glad that we had a chance to hang out. Chris is well known for making 6 figures with the Amazon Associates program and he also runs a 6 figure business selling WordPress plugins called BoostWP.com.

A lot of people believe that you have to know how to code in order to succeed in selling software. But not only is Chris not a technical guy, but he has found a way to get tens of thousands of websites to use his plugins. If you are interested in creating and selling WordPress plugins online, then this interview is a must listen. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Chris came up with the idea for his cash cow WordPress plugin EasyAZon
  • How to find a software person as a partner
  • How Chris comes up with ideas for winning WordPress plugins
  • How to make sure your plugin will make money before you start coding
  • Chris’ biggest mistake when developing software online
  • Why Chris moved over to the freemium model
  • How important is it to get your plugin on WordPress.org
  • Do plugin reviews matter at all?
  • How to handle software support for a WordPress plugin
  • Why Chris moved away from developing WordPress themes to plugins
  • How to launch a WordPress plugin

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I have Chris Guthrie on the show. Now Chris is actually somebody who I’ve known about for quite some time now, but we finally got to meet face to face at FinCon several weeks ago. Now Chris runs a bunch of sites including an awesome entrepreneurship blog at entrepreneurboost.com where he openly talks about all his business exploits. But I actually brought him on the show today to talk about his WordPress plugin company boostwp.com.

Now Chris is now the first entrepreneur that I’ve had on the show who creates WordPress plugins for his business. Now he is probably best known for his awesome plugin called EasyAzon, which allows people to easily insert Amazon affiliate links on their blogs. Now in the past I’ve actually thought about selling my own WordPress plugins as well. So I’m really interested in hearing about his story and with that welcome to the show Chris, really glad to have you on today.

Chris: Thank you so much Steve, I would like to first say that that was a fantastic introduction, I felt quite pleased here.

Steve: And incidentally I first heard about Chris– this is just for the listeners– he was one of the guys that generated a lot of buzz when he made six figures being an Amazon affiliate, and considering that you only get from 3-6% revenue off of that, that’s a pretty impressive fete.

Chris: Yeah have I known what I knew about– that you could do a lot more of selling products on Amazon I probably done that before that’s probably another conversation…

Steve: Yeah-yeah we’re here to talk about boostwp today. So give us a quick background story. Tell us about the business and how you got started with it, and then why specifically WordPress plugins.

Chris: Yes so I think that the best way to probably get into it is to just talk about the first plugin that I did and basically you know you mentioned that I was doing Amazon affiliate things. That’s actually how I was able to leave my day job full time was when the Amazon came to pass that– well I got fired– that’s probably another conversation.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Anyway that was five years ago and then I was making good money from Amazon’s affiliate program, and just kind of frustrated with the process of creating links, and you have to go to amazon.com click the link to this page button, the little grey bar at the top of your screen and you’ve got like text link and you’ve got grab the code put it back in your site and then you have a link right?

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so this can just be done within WordPress. So while I’m writing I can just make the links there. And so I set out on a quest and a long journey– no it wasn’t long I guess I looked into trying to find out who I could hire to do that because I’m not a programmer.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so yeah, so I started that way.

Steve: And then is EasyAzon that’s your most popular plugin?

Chris: Yeah that’s probably the most popular one. It’s been around the longest and so we’ve invested the most time, money, and promotion and everyone kind of knows about it most than the others I guess.

Steve: Okay and so you mentioned that you’re not a programmer or anything, so how did you find someone to develop this plugin with you?

Chris: Yeah, so that’s actually a really common question that people have when it comes to software development if the person is not a software person. And so in my case I actually just went to a local WordPress meet up, and I basically just looked around and I was like who here develops WordPress plugins?

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And I just kind of introduced myself to people and I think I ended up the organizer, and this is almost several years ago now, but the organizer had known someone else, Nick Warnes is his name. And so I worked with him and basically went out to lunch and we talked about the project and it was great because I was based in Seattle at the time and so was he.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then I said, “Hey you seem like a sharp guy, let’s do this.”

Steve: So was this like an equal partnership or…?

Chris: So this one actually I just paid him as a contract type thing.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Chris: I mean it was the first time that I had sold a plugin before, and generally I don’t like to do partnership unless I know that I can provide a lot of value.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so at that time I didn’t know how well I would do and I also figured that he didn’t want to work with someone with an unproven yet who knows if I’m going sell this the new one type of thing so…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I just paid him and then you know we can talk more about how that relationship eventually developed into a partnership but…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: That was the initial stage.

Steve: And then you know how much did it cost to create this first plugin of yours?

Chris: I believe it was $4000 or so.

Steve: Okay, so that’s actually not too bad and you talked about the idea– you got the idea for this plugin because you were trying to do Amazon affiliate links and you wanted an easy way to do that. And I know now that in your shop you have a whole bunch of plugins. So what is actually your process for deciding which plugin idea to actually pursue?

Chris: Primarily it’s just based on a lot of personal need and also just based on what I see in the market place. So I mean I’ve been making money with websites for nearly a decade, I’ve been in full time for about five years now. And so I kind of just– I can look at websites and see okay this site could be making more money if I do this, or I could be getting more email subscribers if I look at my blog and say the same thing about some of the things in my site, but that’s not my primary business site. I guess I just don’t worry too much about it anyway, so I look at just things that I know will work so…

Steve: Let’s talk about your second best plugin for example, how did you get the idea for that?

Chris: Yeah the second best one I’d say– let me think here probably I did a few different plugins that are related to Amazon, they were separate types of things.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But those ones were going to be shifting into EasyAzon, so I’d probably say better links probably would be the second most popular.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And that was one that we launched earlier this year.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And…

Steve: How did you how did you get the idea for that one?

Chris: Yeah so mainly we’re just– because we’re in your company and bootstrapped and just kind of generating revenue from EasyAzon and some of the other plugins and software things. I thought okay let’s try and build something that we know that people will want to use on a daily basis in their blog and so it’s basically a link shortening tool, but…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: One that does a lot of things better than what the other ones do. So for example knowing how many clicks you get on your blog is nice for your blog post. But knowing actually where those clicks came from is kind of more important because then you can determine this one post on my blog is getting a lot of traffic and also driving a lot of clicks, but potentially affiliate clicks or clicks to some sales page and then you can see okay there is some– so you have that business intelligence to see what you might want to do.

Steve: You’re talking about in terms of like the source whether they came from search or referring source or that sort of thing?

Chris: More so that when people are on the actual page they can then see– so if you’re at yourwebsite.com/home then you could see the clicks that are coming for that specific link on that specific page. So most of the other plugins wouldn’t really do that, and I suppose you can get fancy with Google analytics and do it but that’s just too…

Steve: That’s more tedious for sure.

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: Yeah. Cool so you know when you went out to create this plugin, so did you kind of validate your idea with a small audience before you invested the cash, or did you just go for it?

Chris: With this one by then we were pretty much partners together and so we just– we went pretty much went after it and so…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Lately the strategy has been to do an initial light version that we offer through wordpress.org and then the premium version that we sell through the site. And we’ve seen some chunks of sales through that, but typically it’s just better to just focus on signs of the growth than focusing on the free version I found.

Steve: Okay. So is the free version kind of your way of validating the idea like how do you– pretend you just created this plugin, or you have an idea for a plugin, do you kind of run the idea by your audience or your list first, or do you kind of put out this free version, see if it gets traction, what’s the ordering of things?

Chris: Typically I’ll talk with people to see if it’s something that they’d like, but a lot of times it’s just– sometimes I really think that I would like because it’s like annoying to me.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I just know, I kind of just know that I think other people are going to do it and I guess it’s because I’ve done a lot of these before. It’s so far they’ve been doing exemplarily well, just kind of coming with that strategy, but I suppose that isn’t the best answer to your question in terms of…

Steve: Oh no-no-no I mean I mean just curious if you did that because you know it’s a big project right?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: If you’re going to put out some software. If you’re going to spend all this time creating and debugging and all that sort of thing you kind of want to know it’s going to sell, right?

Chris: Yeah and so I guess I should say to you the reason why my answer is like that and since it’s just kind of like based on my decision and then also talking to Nick to see if he thinks it’s something that’s you know easy to get to minimum viable product. Then you know we can kind of go that way, but yeah if you’re first starting out I would not advice just doing that “oh it’s something I might like.” You’d want to really determine if there’s an audience you can sell to and then you know what type of channel you can use or what type of platform you can leverage do that. So for EasyAzon that was a first one…

Steve: Right.

Chris: I already leveraged the blog because I was talking about Amazon affiliate marketing so often.

Steve: Yeah-yeah-yeah you were known for being the Amazon affiliate guy, so EasyAzon was probably a pretty easy sell, right?

Chris: Yeah-yeah and it was pretty-pretty quickly I think probably the initial launch paid the development cost and then just you know continue to earn money each month. You know over– earning four figures pretty much and then continuing on since then so…

Steve: So what is your– so not talking about EasyAzon you know EasyAzon aside, what is in general your strategy for getting people to actually just try your plugins. Now you mentioned you have a freemium model, is that right?

Chris: So a few different ways with boostwp we’re young enough to where we’re still kind of playing with the model. Right now we have a subscription type service we offer all of the plugins that we develop and then we do new plugins each month.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But most likely we’ll shift to yearly just because we found that people use those plugins– you kind of have to match similar to what the rest of the market place is doing in terms of how they’re pricing things. So I noticed that you know some– they’re just aren’t that many plugin companies doing it that way.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And you kind of think about the way the audience is used to paying for something. So for example books you know they’re used to paying at a certain price point and at a certain way, and so the same is kind of safe for WordPress plugins, but yeah so…

Steve: Yeah I know adobe has a similar pricing search where you get access to all their tools by paying this monthly fee and that’s what you’re kind of doing, right?

Chris: Yeah-yeah and then to go back to your question I don’t think I really answered it was how we get people to try. A lot of it is just kind of leveraging the established platform that from being out and doing this for so long. But then also to just contacting where there are other influential bloggers and just getting more people using our stuff. And the long term strategy for boostwp is still early is we’ll have a podcast and we already have a bunch of podcast episodes recorded just getting ready to launch that, and then also doing more content marketing and driving traffic to that way. Sort of be kind of more traditional marketing in the sense for that.

Steve: Okay and so when you mention leveraging your existing network, this is like an audience that you build from– is this from entrepreneur boost or is this from a different blog?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: How did you get those yeah?

Chris: Yeah primarily from that blog and also just meeting so many people that that run blogs because it’s kind of like there aren’t a ton of people that do it full time for a living.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I’ve been on online businesses and so you kind of get to know what a lot of people want and so yeah so that’s primarily.

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit, so where have you met a lot of these entrepreneurs?

Chris: A lot of times I just reach out to people. I do try and go to events, for a while I hadn’t gone to any event like a couple of years and then we had kids and I thought “Hey I should try and go to some events.” And that’s where we met, but yeah I mean that’s where I would meet a lot of people because you know if you reach out to say a blogger that you respect or you think they’re doing something interesting, really in any niche I guess they’re always really busy, but if you can meet them at a conference that’s the time when you know they’re right in front of you and you can have a conversation typically.

Steve: Okay, but if you’re like a nobody, let’s say how do you outreach to someone?

Chris: I mean even when I was a nobody I would say hey. I would just talk to people, I mean I think that yeah I mean I guess it comes onto where your strategies is right? If you’re trying to get people to use your software I think you even look to see what paying plan it is they might already have that you can solve…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then come to them with the solution to the problem you know they have. I think that yeah something that doesn’t immediately self serving I suppose.

Steve: I see, so I was just curious so like let’s say you have this plugin and you were trying to get me to use it for example, would you kind of start the conversation off like do you have a problem doing this and this? Or would you try to just start a conversation first?

Chris: I would just start a conversation first and…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I mean I’m guess I typically don’t do a lot of just that outreach in terms of trying to generate sales because I just– I think it’s difficult, right? To do that it’s more for me to just connect with other people that are doing well and then I can say “Hey we have software that can probably help you out and…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And here you go.

Steve: So is your strategy also to– do you give away the plugins to the like the big names so then you can just say like this guy so and so– this big name uses the plugin?

Chris: Yeah I can, I’ve done that in the past where I give it up, but then if I’m giving friends then I’ll say pay this pay me, I’ll say just pay because then I’ll say you are a paying customer.

Steve: Okay got it.

Chris: Yeah I mean I think it’s– the thing to it is if what you’re building doesn’t provide more value than what you’re charging for then you’re already going to kind of have an uphill battle as it is. And so I mean for EasyAzon for example it’s– I can pretty much tell people if you’re making money from amazons affiliate program you’re not using this then you’re making less money than you could be, and it’s a pretty easy argument to make especially since the cost isn’t too that at all.

Steve: Okay and do you ever use any sort of paid advertising to advertise your plugins?

Chris: I haven’t, but I hired a new team member earlier this year, well I only guess it was only months ago. I hired a part time and then put them on full time but that’s one of the things that he’ll be probably working on and then– but yeah I haven’t really done a lot with that.

Steve: Okay just curious so mainly it’s just relying on kind of your own network and your own lists thus far and just word of mouth?

Chris: Yeah and I mean the other thing too is because I’ve been doing different types of products and software type thing for so long, it’s– I don’t know maybe it’s almost laziness in a sense it sounds maybe lazy, but you know I’ve been able to just kind of say, here is this product and I know it’s a problem that you have because others I see complained about elsewhere, or I see it you know else in the market and here’s our solution that’s in my opinion better. And then because I can send an email to tens of thousands of people then it’s usually successful.

Steve: Okay and then that list was just leveraged before you even started basically?

Chris: Yeah-yeah.

Steve: Okay based on your Amazon affiliates success, right?

Chris: That but then also just like multiple things such as like billing and selling a website for six figures and buying and selling websites making money from…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: All sorts of random stuff talking about it and…

Steve: It’s mainly just people you’ve gathered over time?

Chris: Yeah and then also from selling your products. So every time you can sell a new product you’ve got new customers and that’s the one thing too I’ll say is that people that are on your email list that are buyers are like 100 times more valuable to you and your business than people that sign up for a freebie through your site. At least that’s what I found, I know that if you have someone sign up for something free then you can kind of send them down your list of emails and all that and obviously eventually sell to them, but yeah so anyways…

Steve: Let’s talk about that freemium model a little bit here, was it always like that where you gave away something for free, and then charge for an extra feature?

Chris: No I mean typically that’s actually more recently that we’ve been doing that more and just a sense of trying to get our plugins into more people WordPress installs.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Like going back to that earlier point, so we have for better links probably we have an importing tool that can allow people to import from another popular plugin I will not mention the name but…

Steve: I know which plugin you’re talking about.

Chris: Yeah so that’s kind of like one thing. The other– really it’s just it started with just the premium version, right? I mean for EasyAzon I was like I just paid this guy, I should say Nick– I just paid Nick you know four grand or so to do a first version. I’ve got to make some money back to pay for this thing and then it was just sewn to that so yeah.

Steve: I’m just curious how has going to the freemium model– has that affected sales positively negatively or just kind of flat?

Chris: I think it’s somewhat positive, I think it’s still in the point where we potentially just need more plugins and there are more people using them to really see a huge amount. I noticed most I have Google analytics tracking for a Google gold or whatever it is to track freemium driven sales for EasyAzon from wordpress.org and other types of spots the plugin is delivered and given for free. And I’ve seen a pretty good chunk of sale, I get a pretty steady stream of sales coming through, I actually wish I had the exact numbers in front of me so I can tell you I’m on this.

Steve: No that’s okay we don’t need exact numbers. I’m Just curious though do you do anything let’s say someone signs up for the free version, what do you do? Do you do anything to kind of push them over to the premium version like do you have this email sequence or something that tries to convince?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: Okay and how does that work?

Chris: Yeah so right now if you want to go to EasyAzon.com you would see that there is pro versions and also we’re using like a pop up plugins, so when people try to leave– not that it will stop them from leaving but it will just you know the pop up will appear and people can enter their email to download the free version.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then we have a pretty good opt in rate with that because people are like “oh free” we’ll track…

Steve: Right.

Chris: And then so the first email is just the delivery of the plugin and then I set up the sequence very long ago, so I can’t recall all what it is but yeah basically just send them down and talk about what people can do if they were to upgrade to pro etcetera.

Steve: Okay and then at some point once that sequence expires you don’t bother them again right it’s…?

Chris: Yeah typically not, I mean I haven’t really I’m using Infusionsoft for…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: We’re using Infusionsoft for boostwp and then I use Aweber for my– the initial business I started with.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so there’s a lot of nice things you can do with campaigns and everything in Infusionsoft, but there’s also like a matter of actually building them.

Steve: Okay yeah-yeah of course. I was just curious also what percentage of your freemium customers– so number one I was just curious for my own knowledge, what percentage actually install the plugin, and then what percentage actually upgrade to the premium model?

Chris: I don’t have those exact numbers here with me.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Yeah, I’m sorry.

Steve: That’s all right you know ball park or…?

Chris: I’d say so the people that actually– that download it’s I don’t even– I don’t think I even have– because the problem this was the challenge I guess and this is probably something good to point out, is that because WordPress plugins are it’s like a distributed software model where you’re getting customers some software and they can go and install it. At least the current version right now we’re not using like a license tracking system to you know to do that. We’re going to do that in the fourth version that we release in November, but some customers really you know it’s not easy to do that and then also to WordPress has a lot of strict guidelines to what you can and can’t do with your plugins. Like you can’t really call back to your server to see where your plugins install that.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s actually a big challenge when you’re doing things with WordPress versus like building your own sass app for example.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Then you kind of have to also play by the rules but then it’s also a matter of you know being able to leverage the fact that there is a market place of millions of bloggers that can potentially be downloading and trying out your free version and that’s also a value there too.

Steve: Okay. Is this a WordPress rule just on the platform or is it just a rule to get listened on wordpress.org?

Chris: WordPress.org they have specific rules about what you can and can’t do with plugins that are listed there. And there’s things like you can’t for example if you have a feature in a pro version you can’t list it and then grey out like a check box like they can’t click it type of thing.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Chris: Yeah there’s a lot of kind of nuances to that. I don’t recall the exact you know every single one…

Steve: Sure.

Chris: Other thing that I know that Nick knows and I know that we have to plan the playground–play by the rules in their playground I guess.

Steve: Okay and so how important is it to actually get listed on wordpress.org in terms of sales?

Chris: I don’t think it’s actually that important. I mean I think really honestly the only reason why we did that was to test to see you know if we could get start driving some sales through that and we have. And so it’s been valuable in that sense. But before that we hadn’t even done a free version. For version one and two it was only paid. And so I don’t think that you need– like if you listen to this and you think, I have an idea for WordPress plugin and I’m trying to decide you don’t have to go with the free version actually. You could just go with a premium version then just do a minimum version.

I mean that’s because we are doing so many and we have so many different projects that we have planned out, and we are going to be hiring another developer in January. You know we have to kind of go with just the initial, here is the value over the general value the software can provide. And let’s just get to that as quickly as possible with the least amount of fluff. And then if people adopt it well then we could try and really invest even more time into it type of thing.

Steve: Okay. So it’s kind of that MVP model so to speak?

Chris: Yeah I completely believe that. I think that a lot of like programmer type entrepreneurs they’ll end up– this is just from my personal experience speaking with them. So it might sound like I’m bashing it but they’ll end up you know kind of getting into this feature creep mentality where they are like this thing you know uses really like and then they’ll never really launch something whereas my attitude is to just launch it as quickly– as soon as possible after you’ve made sure they aren’t any bugs and everything, but that’s kind of yeah that’s what I’d say.

Steve: Okay. And then I was just curious do plugin reviews matter on WordPress.org? Like do you make an effort to gather reviews for your plugins?

Chris: No, I haven’t really made much of an effort. I mean I wish I could say I have a WordPress.org plugin that has you know a million downloads, and I have all these amazing data to share. But I mean it is still you know I don’t– getting elsewhere [inaudible] [00:23:59] has only been a more recent thing.

Steve: Okay. I mean you are doing well and that’s why I’m asking so I was just– it sounds like WordPress.org isn’t like a necessity per say. Like if you do you’re marking right on your own you should be fine.

Chris: Yeah I mean there is a lot of six and seven figure plugins that well maybe not certain figures, but I know there is a lot of six figure earning plugins a year that don’t even have a free version at wordpress.org.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But yeah.

Steve: Okay. And then I wanted to talk also and this is one of my fears of writing my own WordPress plugin. This is a technical product and most of the people you are dealing with are not technical. So how do you deal with support?

Chris: Yeah so that’s actually a good question because you get a lot of it even if you make everything really clear. And then it’s actually shocking how many support requests you can get if something isn’t unclear and then you realize you have to go back and do something. So let me actually kind of go back and unpack that.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So the way that I do the plugins is I create the help videos and I go through everything that’s covers the main kind of components of the plugin, and then try to make sure if there are any specific errors that people can get tripped up on for example. So EasyAzon has you have to get Amazon access key and an access secret key type thing from their system to access their API.

Steve: Right.

Chris: So basically there is some problem that could happen there. So I think it kind of go like step by step through every single thing and actually show them on their screen where you doing to set everything up. So I’ll do video guides and then I have– because we sell multiple different plugins, I always put the videos in the same section. So it’s always just the end of the domain name and then just how hyphen to.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s like the first line of the defense it would be all the WordPress, all the videos, and then step by step videos you know I use Camtasia studio to record those, and I zoom into the screen and use the mouse cursor effect where you can highlight it. I have seen some people and I’m not sure why they would do this, but they don’t actually zoom into their screen when they are doing support. But then you don’t realize that people might be on like smaller browser or small resolution monitors or just they might not be able to see.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s like the first line, and the next would be support desk. And so we have four people in the support desk so that we can answer email tickets to them. So we use fresh desk right now.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then I like that one quite a bit actually I need to be moving over the other company to that system too.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But yeah and so we just have some support reps that help there.

Steve: You guys have a phone line?

Chris: We don’t have a phone line at this time. No I think it would be difficult to do that because there are so many things that are so visual about you know doing it, it will become challenging. It might be cost prohibitive too. I guess thinking about the pricing.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: If someone is going to call and then take an hour to…

Steve: Yeah, yeah.

Chris: Do something…

Steve: Do you do live chat then or it is just email?

Chris: Just email.

Steve: Just email.

Chris: But then we have– another thing too is with the videos, that is one thing I should mention too is because I’ve sold plugins and I’ve also sold themes. So plugins are much different than themes in terms of support that you need to do, and that it’s a lot less.

Steve: Okay plugins are a lot less support, okay.

Chris: Yeah there is a lot of less support typically because it’s just you know this is what the plugin can do. And then you check these boxes and it will do or not do that feature, able or not able. And with themes people will say things like, “I want my theme– I want my website to look like this.” And they’ll point out some other website that’s using an entirely different theme and it’s like you have no idea how they are going to arrive to that point. And then it’s like you have to try and deal with that, so yeah that’s…

Steve: So it sounds like more of the story, do not develop themes.

Chris: If you going to do themes and you are going to do like some type of life time license scenario, then I don’t know what to tell you other than good luck I guess you know.

Steve: Let’s talk about that because you recently went over to this subscription based model. Before you were offering free support, right?

Chris: Yeah I mean before it was pretty much a huge mistake to say, “Hey when you buy this plugin you can get life time updates.” But then sure enough I’m going to be living for hopefully quite some time and I hope that this business stays around for quite some time, and new features and new versions cost money. And I guess this goes back to I didn’t really know that much about this. And I didn’t really– I should have sought out people that were doing this to ask their advice before I did that because I think that that– and that’s actually a mistake that a few other friends have wanted to do plugins have made.

I have tried to tell them to avoid making is to do like lifetime support updates. And I kind of compare to Bill Gates releasing their original windows version and saying lifetime updates. Can you imagine how ridiculous that would be? And had I thought of that really or had anyone said that to me then I would have avoided that costly mistake, because people– you are going to have people that really enjoy your software and they want to keep using it. And if you can have an annual type renewal where they can upgrade to get the new features then that’s really a way to kind of grow your business beyond just trying to find new customers. And I think that’s actually the biggest mistake I’ve made with this business model.

Steve: Okay and then this institution based model is nice too, right? Because you get recurrent payments and that sort of thing and support isn’t as much of a problem at that point?

Chris: Yeah I mean it’s pretty much yeah.

Steve: Okay so I was curious also, do you have like a specific role out strategy to avoid like a sudden influx of bugs and complaints that you can’t handle?

Chris: Yeah we do a lot a lot of internal testing and then we don’t have like a beta squad per say, like a group of customers that can test ahead of time. But that’s something that we are considering doing because– but again it comes back to partnering with someone that’s really good.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Nick’s one of the best developers I’ve ever worked with. And that’s why I said, “Hey we should work together on this business and this is kind of the vision I have and I know that you can do it because you’ve done these other plugins.” And I think that definitely comes back to making sure you hire or work with someone rather that’s really good because otherwise you will end up with a lot of bugs. So typically we don’t get too many because his code is really solid.

Steve: Okay and well tested probably.

Chris: Yeah exactly.

Steve: Okay and then you know and again this is a question mainly for my benefit sorry listeners. But you know WordPress gets updated like every several months, right?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: How the heck do you maintain the code for all the different versions? Is it just a constant updating battle?

Chris: Well that’s a good question; I want to just go back to another example actually. So I used to do [inaudible] [00:30:54] forums.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Years before this and that’s how I first started making money. And now you know you’d have these updates and then just stuff would break. And it was just like huge nightmare but that’s not really the case with WordPress. I have yet to actually have an update that WordPress goes to really cause some huge massive failure with the plugin.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s nice I guess you know because that’s a huge time circus to have to continuously change things just because WordPress is being updated.

Steve: Okay so that implies that WordPress is a very robust sort of upgrade policy so to speak.

Chris: Yeah it just doesn’t seem to [inaudible] [00:31:33]. They have been some things that have happened with you know like WordPress, but a lot of those things kind of come back to the themes actually. So…

Steve: Okay, right crushing with themes and that sort of thing.

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: And I had a couple of questions on just pricing. So how do you kind of determine pricing for your plugin and then how does support cost kind of factor into that pricing?

Chris: Yeah so I typically just– so when I first started I priced EasyAzon at $47.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I think I might have done like an initial discount pricing for a time limited period, which I would suggest doing because scarcity in the marketing is really powerful and especially if it’s real scarcity. So obviously you want to increase the price if you say you are going to. But yeah so that was the initial price that I went at. And I just kind of looked at what competitors were doing to see what they were charging. And so yeah typically it’s just I’ve looked to see what other are charging and then where I started out before worked well.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And I’ve done some price increases and tests to see you know if there is any discounts not discounts to any drops off in sales, but– and then through gorgeous support. So typically right now you know we get a lot of support requests, but the revenue regenerates much-much higher than the support amount that we pay.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then also I do some support, but it’s only stuff I guess past initial few people.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So it’s not using too much of my time either. So it’s really not a huge amount of it. And I think it goes about to the earlier point I was saying about with WordPress themes you’ve got a lot of different things that can– and I don’t know maybe there is someone out there listening and saying, hey you had a really bad theme developer or something that I don’t know.

Steve: I’ll try to get someone who develops themes on the show Nick.

Chris: Yeah that would be good. And I’ve only done a few themes and so I only know from that. If he explains then I don’t want to do them. At least for now until we have more team ever seem– make it viable but yeah.

Steve: Okay. And you know, what are some of the biggest challenges that you’ve kind of come across in developing plugins?

Chris: I think that the biggest is that anytime you have an idea for what it is you want to accomplish through a plugin or whatever product it might be, it’s just always going to take longer than you expect it will. I think that’s something that I hear people always say and then you think as a listener you might be thinking that you know that’s not the case. But that’s always case. There is always like features that’s slowly creep in that you just have to have, and that’s the challenge to kind of bail again.

So I think it’s just a matter of making sure you plan appropriately and then additionally because we try to be prolific with the amount of software that we release. I think the key thing too is to make sure you set deadlines up. So it’s kind of I guess a battle all right between those two.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But when we set a specific deadline we also use we also have affiliates to help sell our plugins. And if we set a deadline there are a date that we are going to launch on, then we have to make sure we hit that date so that’s the right way they can kind of help make sure we get on track.

Steve: Okay and then about what were we just talking about Chris sorry.

Chris: Yeah we were just talking about some of the challenges with [inaudible] [00:35:00]

Steve: No there was a specific challenge that I was just going to ask you about but I can’t remember. Okay so if I wanted to create a WordPress plugin today, what would be like your key piece of advice?

Chris: Key piece of advice would be to just look at what the minimum version you can do.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: That you can then charge for. And if you have enough capital that actually support then maybe you could do it for free initially, but I mean if you are using like donations or something like that that try and make money then I’m laughing while I’m talking because this is not going to work.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Because I’ve talked to some other developers that have those and they say, “I think I’ve got a donation once a few years ago.” You have to charge to prove your value. People really value things based on what they pay for them.

Steve: I remember my question now, when you are in the design portion, the design face of your plug in, do you use any sort of software or tools to help you kind of plan out how you want the plugging to look and function?

Chris: So initially I would you know I did like some mark ups just– I can’t remember if I used pen and paper enough, but I did use pen and paper for another project that I’m doing with a different– for assess thing that we are building. But yeah I just use for that one actually sheets of paper and [inaudible] [00:36:27] just sitted on a flight while I was going actually to FinCon.

Steve: Really?

Chris: Yeah so I just as I marked it up and then I handed it up to developers. Yeah so I typically would just use that. I don’t use anything like balsamic or any of those wire framing tools. But I think that comes back to you as well that I have worked with Nick for several years now versus when I hired him as a contractor and then now that we are business partners. And it’s kind of like he is really good at UI and kind of understanding how like what the best flow would be. And then after he gets initial version to me I can kind of okay I think we should change this around because of this reason, right?

And also too with WordPress at least the way that we design plugins we try not to actually make the UIB you know look a lot different than what you experience already in WordPress. So we will re-use a lot of the assets in there. So like if you’d go and you click the EasyAzon button in your WordPress post editor, it pops up the window that looks like the media window where you want to upload images.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So it’s similar in that way.

Steve: Okay. All right and then just in terms of understanding the mechanics of how to create a WordPress plugin, did you guys learn from any books? Like can you recommend any books on it?

Chris: I don’t know any books because I have never– I don’t know I’ve never written the line of code in a WordPress plugin before.

Steve: Okay, but even just the process is there– like how did you guys learn? Or is it Nick or?

Chris: Yeah Nick who knows maybe he could be a good guest for you but yeah he started freelancing and all other stuff yeah but he– I think that he just kind of learns because you know it was something that he could do, and then he had clients asking for it and so started doing that. But I don’t know I’d have to follow up with Nick to see exactly what he did.

Steve: Okay and what about just marketing in general? Where did you get your jobs, is it all experience or did you read any books as well that influenced you?

Chris: Primarily experience.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And just lots of trying to make sure that you just take action. I think that a lot of people would talk about the things that they want to do, like for example I have friends that say, “Oh it’s cool you make money online and you have these online businesses and you work from home and all that.” And then it seems like they are interested in actually learning more and I start to get such ruin in my mouse. My mouse starts to run on my own minute and then they ask all these questions and then they never do or say anything.

So I think it’s just a matter of you know say or listen to this podcasts right now. I said this on another one– another podcasts and I was like don’t become an expert at listening to podcasts. You’ve got to be able to take what you learn from whatever it is and then actually do something.

Steve: Are you trying to get my listeners to stop listening to my podcast Chris, is that what is going on here?

Chris: I’m just saying they can listen to your podcast within as long as they get home say they listen to it on their drive to work, and then you know they can get on and actually do something. That’s all I’m saying.

Steve: And just curious how long you know after you released your first plugin did it actually gain traction to make sales? Was it pretty immediate or?

Chris: It was pretty immediate and I guess– and it comes down to maybe you’d have a better guess if you had someone that had to start with no existing platform. It sounds like…

Steve: Let me ask you this, if you had no platform what would you have done?

Chris: I don’t know if I would have done one. I don’t even know if I would have done a plugin, maybe I don’t know. I think I probably would have just tried to look up other people that were doing plugins to see what they did and then try to talk to them and say, hey you know I tried to find someone that did a plugin that wasn’t at all similar in any market to what I was doing and said, “Hey this is the plugin I’m looking to build you know how did you get your first users or things like that.” And it’s obviously the same for a lot of businesses. You could see you know or how did this Sass Company get started. Do some research and try to find out about that or whatever. So…

Steve: Yeah I mean I ask you that for a reason because I think establishing some sort of platform before you do anything is very important. That way you always have an initial set of customers to sell to right when you launch, right?

Chris: Yeah I wish I knew the name of the company. It’s either like Unbounce or someone else. But I hope it’s not them because that might be their competitor but it was– one of their co-founders who have been writing blog posts for months and months about conversion rates type stuff. And when they release their tool they had always people that have been reading and they had you know they’ve been building their email list and all that to help. So I really think that you know pre-launch you know getting a pre-launch list and that actually launching something is really important. And making in an advance and trying to really push it.

Steve: Yes so Chris we’ve already been chatting for about 40 minutes. If anyone has any questions for you just about your plugins or just writing a plugin in general, where can they find you?

Chris: Yeah so the best place to find me would probably just through my blog entrepreneurboost.com and I’ll say slash Steve, so I can know where you came from, and I’ll set up a page that says you know includes my contact and so just some of the other random projects that I’ve been doing over the last few years. Not only saying random because it’s just I’ve done a lot of different things. Some of them have taken off and then others have you know not been as good enough, but I still learnt from them.

Steve: Okay yeah and Chris has got a great blog you guys should all go check it out on entrepreneurboost.com. It talks about some really cools stuff and he often mentions numbers to back it up as well. So it’s pretty cool.

Chris: Yeah, yeah that’s what I like to do.

Steve: All right Chris hey thanks a lot for coming on the show man. I really appreciate your time.

Chris: Thanks Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that interview. Chris is awesome, and what I find interesting about his story is that he discovered a problem while running his own WordPress site and decided to develop a solution to his own problem. Plus he is not a programmer which just goes to show that you don’t really need to have a technical background to do software development.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode53, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps to keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily and get awesome business advice from my guest. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral either to someone else or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequiteherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

How I Tripled The Sales Of My Info Product By Tweaking My Email Autoresponder

$
0
0

I’ve been running my Create A Profitable Online Store Course for several years now and up until the middle of last year, it’s been selling reasonably well.

For example during 2012 and 2013, I averaged about 150K per year in revenue through affiliate marketing and selling my class using the principles I outlined in my 2013 FINCON talk.

Fincon 2104 Steve Chou

But here’s the thing.

It’s really difficult to sell an informational product successfully online. And especially in my case, I find myself at a consistent disadvantage because of the following factors.

  • My course is expensive at $799 – As a result, my class is definitely not an impulse buy and it often takes quite a while for someone to decide to make a purchase.
  • I don’t have the time or energy to host large launches to sell my product online – As a result, I leave enrollment open all year long and there’s very little scarcity or sense of urgency to push people to sign up.
  • I sell into an industry that traditionally has lots of scammers and poseurs – There are hundreds of “make money online” types of classes out there and most of them are terrible. So I often have to go the extra mile to convince people that my course is legit.

It also doesn’t help that I constantly raise the price of my course throughout the year which further deters new customers from making a purchase.

Back in 2011, my class was only $299 and today it’s $799.

What Changed Last Year

Dan Faggella

Now making $150K per year isn’t bad and I would have been perfectly happy with those numbers had I not interviewed my friend Dan Faggella on my podcast last year.

Click here to listen to the interview in case you missed it

Now if you’ve followed my blog for a while, you’ve probably all taken my free 6 day mini course on how to start an online store by now.

If not, then click here to check it out

Anyway, this free mini course (delivered via email) is a little teaser for my full blown class. It is also the primary way that I make sales for all of my affiliate offers and online courses.

In fact, I’d go as far as to say that this email autoresponder is responsible for 90% of my revenues and up until the middle of 2014, I thought that I’d been doing everything perfectly.

But after talking to Dan, I realized that I’d been leaving a lot of money on the table by not implementing a few key strategies with my sales funnel.

Long story short, in the latter half of 2014 I made some dramatic changes to my email autoresponder sequence which effectively tripled the number of sales of my online store course.

As a result, I ended the year making double what I did the previous year.

Click here to check out my 2014 blog income report for more details!

How I Tripled The Sales Of My Class

Create A Profitable Online Store

The video below is a presentation that I gave at the FINCON Expo in 2014. It’s roughly 30 minutes in length and it teaches you what I did to increase my sales so dramatically in 2014.

Specifically, I go over the following topics.

  • How to double the rate of email signups for your website
  • How to take advantage of human psychology to increase the conversion rate of your emails
  • The exact changes I made to triple the sales of my Create A Profitable Online Store Course

Note: This video is the sequel to the first talk I gave in 2013 entitled How I Made Over $300K These Past 2 Years With An Email Autoresponder.

Click here to watch the first video in the series in case you missed it.

I also want to give my buddy Phil Taylor some props for letting me give this presentation at the FINCON Expo last year. If you enjoy the video below, come to FINCON as I will likely be talking again this year.

MWQHJ 054: How Spencer Haws Created Long Tail Pro – My Favorite Tool For Keyword Research

$
0
0

Spencer Haws

I’ve been following Spencer’s blog, NichePursuits.com, for quite some time now and I’ve always been a huge fan.

Not only does Spencer have a ton of experience with building out niche sites and keyword research but he has also created the best keyword research tool on the market with Long Tail Pro

In this interview, you’ll learn about what’s working with SEO and how Spencer created a leading software product with no technical experience at all!

What You’ll Learn

  • How and why Spencer diversified his business
  • Why Spencer moved away from using private blog networks
  • What’s working with SEO today
  • How Spencer came up with the idea for Long Tail Pro
  • How search engine optimization has evolved
  • How to design software without being technical
  • How to market software in a competitive environment
  • How Spencer got the word out about Long Tail Pro in the very beginning
  • Why Spencer moved Long Tail Pro towards a SAAS model
  • How to do keyword research properly
  • How long it takes to rank keywords on search

Other Resources And Books

Transcript (Coming Soon!)

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

How To Incorporate A Business In The United States From A Foreign Country

$
0
0

I was checking my Google Analytics the other day and discovered that 32% of my blog traffic is from a country outside of the United States.

That’s almost a third! And if you look at the students in my Create A Profitable Online Store Course, 25% of my members are from different countries as well.

Anyway recently, I’ve been receiving a lot of questions from entrepreneurs who want to set up shop in the United States from a foreign country.

After all, the United States is one of the largest markets in the world but the problem is that selling into the US is very difficult unless you have a physical presence in the country.

Using myself as an example, I almost never buy anything(as a consumer) from online shops outside of the US because the shipping is prohibitive and I prefer to work with local vendors.

So today, I asked my friend Nellie Akalp to write a post that will teach you how to incorporate a business in the United States as a non-resident.

Nellie Akalp is a serial entrepreneur, small business expert, speaker and author. She is the founder & CEO of CorpNet.com, an online legal document filing service, where she helps entrepreneurs start, grow and maintain a business.

corpnet

We live in a global world these days. It’s no surprise when a company has a presence in several countries. For those located outside of the US, there’s plenty of appeal for setting up shop here in America. The process isn’t simple, but it’s doable, if you’re looking to incorporate from a foreign country.

Step 1: Choose Your Business Structure

As a foreign company, you have two primary choices for the type of business structure you can form here in the US: the C Corporation and the Limited Liability Company (LLC).

Note: A foreigner can not form an S Corp in the United States because shareholders must be US citizens or residents

A C Corp allows you to raise capital, and may make you appealing to investors who only work with incorporated businesses. You can have an unlimited number of owners or shareholders, and you can transfer ownership of your corporation. Your C Corp will last beyond the life of you as the owner, unless you dissolve it.

The LLC is beneficial in that it’s treated as a “pass through” entity for taxes, meaning that profits pass through to owners and are reported on individual tax returns.

If you’re unsure which is the best structure for your foreign business, feel free to contact us for advice.

Editor’s Note: I’ve written a small business startup guide that goes over the pros/cons of each business entity that you can check out here

Step 2: Choose A State To Incorporate Or File Your LLC In

If you already know the state you will operate out of, it’s best for you to file your business structure in that state to simplify paperwork. If you don’t plan to have a physical presence in the US, then you are free to file your business structure in any state.

Many businesses prefer Nevada, Delaware, or Wyoming for this, as they are the most business-friendly (and sometimes have the lowest taxes for businesses).

Editors Note: There are many nuances to take into account when choosing the right state to incorporate in. Before making this decision, I would urge you to do some research and make an educated decision.

For those that reside in the US, if you are a small corporation with less than 5 shareholders, it is often beneficial to incorporate in the state where your business has a physical presence.

Step 3: Get A Registered Agent

It can be helpful to have assistance in the form of a registered agent to deal with legal paperwork on your behalf. This person or company is officially recognized by the state where your business resides, and is authorized by your corporation to accept services of process on your behalf.

Your registered agent can ensure that you renew business licenses and keep compliant with your business structure, even if you never step foot in the US.

Your registered agent must be located in the state where you formed your corporation or LLC. There are companies who offer this service, and many also will help you with your business entity filing as well.

Step 4: Get a Federal Employer Identification Number

In the United States, the Internal Revenue Service keeps track of all businesses through what’s called an Employer Identification Number (EIN). In order to get an EIN, you need a social security number.

If, as a foreign business owner, you don’t have a social security number and aren’t eligible to get one, you can instead use an Individual Taxpayer Identification Number (ITIN).

Either your EIN or ITIN will be required for the next step: opening a US business bank account.

Step 5: Open a US Business Bank Account

This may be the most complex part of the process of starting a business in the US for foreign business owners. Requirements for opening a business bank account will vary, depending on the bank, but in general, you will need to supply:

● Paperwork showing your business is incorporated or an LLC
● Your EIN or ITIN
● Your passport

Ideally, you should handle opening an account in person, but if that’s not possible, you can work with a service that can open an account on your behalf.

Step 6: Get Professional Help

Because the rules around finances and laws likely vary slightly from your home country, it can be helpful to hire an expert like an accountant, an attorney, or a business filing company like CorpNet.com who is an expert in working with companies who have holdings in more than one country.

It may take a year or two for you to be comfortable with handling your finances or legal concerns on your own, so having professionals by your side can be a boon.

Step 7: Stay Compliant

In the US, compliance doesn’t end once you start your business. Whether you file as a corporation or an LLC, you are required to file an annual report. This document keeps the information on file for your business up to date as regards your physical location, registered agent, and shareholders. Even if there are no changes from the previous year, you still need to submit this form.

While certainly, expanding your business into the US from another country requires a bit of work, ultimately it will pay off with the expansion of your company and increased sales.

Quick Note From Steve

I own 2 LLCs and I formed both of them on my own. Once you know what you are doing, the process is actually fairly straightforward but if you are from a foreign country, it can be extremely daunting to figure out what you have to do.

Even as a US citizen, it’s pretty painful to go through pages and pages of documentation and often times it’s a major time suck.

What I like about Nellie’s company, CorpNet.com is that it has a very “Mom & Pop” feel to it. They are a company that specializes in small businesses and what sets them apart is that they will give your business more personal attention.

So if you have any questions about any of the steps above, then please click here and contact CorpNet.com.

They are essentially a one stop shop for everything listed above and you’ll get a real live human to talk to:)

MWQHJ 055: How Steve Scott Makes 6 Figures Selling Non Fiction Kindle Ebooks

$
0
0

Steve Scott

Steve Scott is a very prolific writer on the Amazon Kindle platform and he makes anywhere from 20-60K per month selling ebooks.

In this interview, he reveals the exact methods he uses to sell hundreds of books a day and the right way to sell on the Amazon Kindle platform.

Also, be sure to check out his blog at SteveScottSite.com

What You’ll Learn

  • How Steve makes 20-60K per month selling books
  • How Steve sells hundreds of books a day on the Kindle platform
  • How to gather email addresses from people who buy your ebook
  • How to find a lucrative topic to write about
  • How Steve gets his books up in the ranks of Amazon
  • How long each book should be in length
  • How to launch an ebook effectively
  • How Steve brainstorms and puts together his books

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. In this episode I’m going to be talking to Steve Scott. Now the reason why I decided to bring Steve on the show is because I wanted to interview someone who makes a living selling Kindle E-Books. Now I was just looking at one of his income reports just now and he averages several hundred book sales per day, and that’s pretty crazy.

Now Steve’s book sales allows him to live a very flexible lifestyle and travel the world. And unlike Johnny Andrews who I had on my show last time, Steve actually focuses on nonfiction Kindle books and generates a very good and reliable income from it. Anyways today I’m hoping that Steve will reveal some of his book promotion strategies with us. So without further ado welcome Steve, what’s up man?

Scott: Thanks for having me on Steve. Actually it’s funny you mentioned Johnny Andrews; I’m talking to him later today for the first time. So I’m kind of excited to hook up with him to see what he is up to.

Steve: Yeah it will be interesting to compare kind of your strategies with what he talked about a couple of weeks ago. He focuses on fiction books; I think he does off the wall fiction books.

Scott: Yeah something like that but yeah I kind of– I definitely agree because I thought I heard him say once about how he really just narrows down on one thing and just keeps on creating content for the same audience which I completely agree with him on that one.

Steve: Yeah and he was saying something about how fiction books seem to outsell the nonfiction ones. I’ll get you a commentary on that a little bit later.

Scott: Sure.

Steve: But give us the quick background story, tell us about how you kind of got started with this whole thing and all the sort of businesses that you run.

Scott: Sure. I guess I’ll give the very-very brief overview of kind of my history but I started with online marketing about 10 years ago. So 2004 I kind of run a couple of business, it’s just kind of what a lot of people do when they first get it started. I just kind of fell for all the get rich quick scams and tried my hand at a bunch of different things. So I fumbled along for about two years till around late 2005 early 2006 when I got into what I call authority affiliate marketing. The idea there is just you pick a niche, you create an email list, and you try marketing to that particular email list.

So I did that for pretty successfully from 2006 to 2012, but around 2012– actually even before that I was really kind of souring on the niche I pick. It’s mostly like the dating niche and just– it was just really not part of who I was at that point of my life. So I would say around 2010 is when I started Steve Scott site, and again that’s kind of another way I kind of fumbled along. But I spent a year or two trying to figure out the whole blogging thing. And eventually I started talking about internet business and stuff because that’s honestly what I knew best about.

I guess that was my biggest authority knowing about how to run an affiliate business and internet business in general. And in 2012 in September I just started to really focus in on kindle books. I already published a couple of them previously but I saw that they sold fairly well, like they were selling five to ten copies a day which in my opinion wasn’t too bad of an income for something that wasn’t too hard to write. So in September 2012 I decided to just focus completely on the kindle stuff and kind of the rest as they say is history. So since then guess it’s been two years now, I’ve been almost 90% of my time just focusing on writing kindle books.

Steve: Cool man, so I actually just had a quick question before…

Scott: Sure.

Steve: We delve in to the whole kindle thing. Can you kind of– you mentioned you have Steve Scott site and you were doing affiliate marketing. Can you comment on kind of– by going all in on kindle you kind of relying on Amazon as your platform and your selling platform, right?

Scott: Yes…

Steve: Versus your blog which you have your own platform and that sort of thing. So can you just kind of talk about you know putting all your eggs in the Amazon basket versus your own stuff?

Scott: Yes let me do the big caveat at the beginning, this is a very dangerous strategy and I’m fully aware of the danger of it, and for anyone out there who is messing around with Google and have built niche sites around the Google algorithm you know how painful it can be when you build your site around one platform. So that said with both my kind of what I call the Steve Scott kindle books which are about internet business and internet marketing, and the habit books which are kind of the website behind this developgoodhabits.com. I would say both of them are– my primarily strategy is to build an email list behind them.

So if anything ever happens to Amazon at least I have the email list and I can do a quick pivot and perhaps publish on other platforms. But yeah I would say definitely it’s relying on one platform for your income is definitely scary. And like I said it’s something I do but you should really think carefully about before going ahead and doing it. I guess if you have any more questions about that?

Steve: Yeah actually since we are talking about it, so how do you get the email addresses from the people that you sell books to on Amazon?

Scott: Sure the first thing I do is I actually have an email offer inside the first 10% of every book. And when people either whether they are browsing for the book or when they go download it or buy it, the first thing they will generally see is a free email offer. So it’s which I’m sure you’ve talked about on plenty of other podcast but it’s your typical free piece of content that if you sign in for your email list they get it and then they are now a subscriber.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: What I like about the Amazon platform is that these are all potentially– I’ll say the large percentage are actual buyers instead of just tire kickers or freebie seekers. And I’ll say beyond that I also try to expand on my email list by– right now let’s say I have a better blog, blog posts are two per week. And I do slide share and I do a couple of other things that kind of bolster my email list through other traffic strategies. But I’d say right now the main driver of my email subscribers is the kindle platform. So it kind of built on one another like a snowball effect.

Steve: Okay so you basically have a URL in your book?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: And they have to type it in and then they enter in something and you give them something free that kind of adds to the content of the book, is that..?

Scott: Yeah absolutely. I would say as an example for the develop good habits there is the 77 good habits to live a better life. And actually with the way Kindle is you can just tap on the link and it just– the actual email capture page is through lead pages and they just auto populate just an email subscription box right inside the kindle platform, so…

Steve: Oh okay cool.

Scott: You literally don’t even have to leave your kindle app to even sign up for my email list.

Steve: I see okay. That’s pretty cool and then after do you try to sell them on other books on the kindle platform or do you sell them on your own site as well?

Scott: I try to sell them a little bit. I have a real small kind of a warming Auto responder sequence, so it’s about three, or four emails, I forget the email. And it’s just it introduces me there as one that actually really describe a really deeply personal story, it’s called How Habits Saved My Life and that’s actually about kind of what I went through when I first got into online business, and how I kind of became a better person because I developed good habits. And then it was just– it’s a couple of other smaller kind of emails. So the idea here is just kind of introduce them to me as a person, as an author.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And I definitely recommend my kindle books inside the email list by like the first, I would say the first 10 days or so. I try to keep as pitch free as possible.

Steve: Okay-okay all right. So let’s talk a little bit more about just publishing books. So first of all I’m going to kind of ask you some questions about what it takes to become successful author. But can you first give the audience an idea of how you are doing today in terms of books sold, and how many books do you actually have out?

Scott: I have 46 books right now.

Steve: Wow okay.

Scott: And that’s further across three I would almost say 3.5 platforms, maybe I’ll explain this. There’s the internet books, I tried for a while because I’m lazy like everyone else. I tried outsourcing a whole line of children’s animal books. And they still make a couple of hundred dollars a month that really I just I learn a lot of hard lessons about what it takes to outsource content and really it was pretty brutal for me.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: The habit books which are throwing the best and I’m actually just starting to take my books and have them translated into different languages, like I just published my first German book about Habits about a week ago. So I’m trying to build up that market as well. That’s…

Steve: So let’s see, you have children’s books, you have internet money, and making money I guess online type of books?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: And then Habits books which are more personal development type of books?

Scott: Absolutely yes.

Steve: Okay and then so what’s like the breakdown? How many of each do you kind of sell on a given month as an example?

Scott: I would say maybe 0.5% would be the children’s books and I would say another 15 to 20% would be the Steve Scott books, and then the bulk of it are the habit books. And those are the ones that have really taken off pretty much what I’ve been focusing on for the last year or so.

Steve: Okay and so just curious, do these books ever have to get re-written as things go out of date?

Scott: I would say definitely the internet business books I almost feel like some of them either I want to take down because the content is outdated or just completely revamp them. The habit books not so much, but there is one book that really took off, did really well but I made a lot of very critical flaws in them just the way I wrote them, the way I presented the content and stuff I did include. So I would definitely want to rewrite that book and actually that’s what I’m planning on doing for December just do a complete revamp of the habit staging book.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the breakdown of what you make on your own site versus kindle, what is kind of the breakdown? Are you almost all in kindle right now?

Scott: I would say yeah I’m 100% in for the Amazon platform with a bit of a sub breakdown where I generate some income from Create Space which is like 1000 or $2000 a month. And some income from ECX which is the audible platform for Amazon and that works out to be about 3 or $5000 a month.

Steve: Okay and so you are pretty much easily doing six figures doing all of your books stuff on Amazon, right?

Scott: Yeah definitely, like my highest month has been $60,000.

Steve: Wow.

Scott: But I hesitate saying that because now it’s like people are saying, oh Steve is currently making $60,000 a month. No it’s just the one month. I would say recently it’s been anywhere from the 40 to $20,000 like most recent month it was down to $20,000. So it definitely fluctuates.

Steve: Wow okay that’s a lot of books and these books are all like in the range of like 2.99 each, right?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So it’s very high value in business.

Steve: Okay, okay. Cool so let’s say I have a book I want to write. Can you just kind of walk me through the process and the overall high level strategy for making a living doing this?

Scott: I would say take a step back and not think of a book you want to write. I will almost say you start with a niche. And I really think I did listen to the interview with Johnny Andrews that you did, but I’ve heard him on other podcasts and I would definitely agree with what he says for the fact that you really want to like narrow down into one particular topic other if you are a fiction writer narrow down into a specific genre. Or if you are a nonfiction writer narrow down into a specific topic.

And I would start by really researching that topic and just making sure it’s something that sells well on Amazon. And when I first started the habits market I went through a whole like bunch of stuff for– I checked to see if there is just people blogging about it. And off the top of my head obviously habits you think of zenhabits.net.

Steve: Sure yes.

Scott: And there is [inaudible 00:12:50] I know he writes about habits. You also want to go to Amazon to see if people talk about habits, see what type of books are selling on Amazon. And at the time there really wasn’t too much written about habits. Sadly I think I’ve had to kind of create my own competition because all sorts of habits books now. But at the time there was– actually which is still really doing well. There is The Power of Habit by Charles Duhigg which has been selling– it’s just a monster seller for the last couple of years and I absolutely love that book. And I could see the potential that people really kind of want to learn about like habit development.

I poked around Amazon, I looked at it and the litmus test I like to use is when you are looking at particular type of books you just click on the book description, go down to the product description and you’ll see a number says Amazon best seller ranking. And if you see consistently on a number of books if you see books that are selling under the number 30,000, that generally means they sell at least five or so copies a day. If I see a couple of books like that that have a pretty high sales ranking like that, then that means that there is definitely people interested in that particular topic.

But I did that your basic keyword research, I went to Google the AdWords.google.com, kind of looked at the different key words to see if there is demand for it. And I’m sure you’ve talked about this with blogging, but I tried to see if I could come up with 50 topics just off the top of my head what can I write about. At that point when you know you have a lot of stuff to write about, you know there is demand and then I would say it’s time to actually narrow down on your actual book topics.

Steve: Okay so that kind of implies that you are writing a lot of little books as opposed to a gigantic monolithic book on a subject?

Scott: Yeah definitely. I would say a good example when I kind of– I guess I discovered this strategy with the third book. I want to talk like kindle publishing but obviously I didn’t really know too much about it so instead of just writing one massive book about kindle publishing I wrote How to Discover Best Selling Book Ideas. And it covered what I just talked about, how to actually vet a certain idea, make sure if it will actually do well on Amazon platform. So instead of just writing about everything kindle, I just wrote about one particular topic.

And instead of pricing a book at 4.99, 5.99, 6.99, I just took one topic, wrote about 15 to 20,000 words, and really drove down at that one particular topic. And honestly that’s been my business model ever since then. Just finding one topic and really focusing on a good solution.

Steve: Okay, but that kind of implies that you need to write a lot of books.

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Right? Okay.

Scott: Definitely and I will be very honest and say it’s not the most passive strategy in the world. You definitely have to have a lot of button shared time and really sit down and dedicate yourself to writing at least five to ten hours a week I would say at the bare minimum.

Steve: Okay so this ranking is Amazon sort of ranking of 30,000. So you are kind of shooting for around five book sales per day for a given book is that…?

Scott: That was at the very least for me like I want to know at least if the idea takes off or at least sell five copies a day. And I’ve with a lot almost all my books I’ve sold way more than that, but there have been a few that just kind of bombed and never really went anywhere and I feel the times that those ones bombed is when I didn’t pay attention to that role.

Steve: Okay and so the ones that bombed, you didn’t look at any sort of seller rank?

Scott: Yeah I just kind of– I kind of went with what I thought people would want and that’s like instead of actually what I’m starting to do now is I’m actually starting to have dialogs in my email list asking them questions about what type of content they want, almost like you would with the products. You start asking questions like what type– for instance what type of habit would you like to learn. And recently with the book I’m currently developing I’ve found that people really having trouble with exercise.

And I guess more about the motivation behind what type of exercise or getting motivation to exercise, and then answer a bunch of follow ups questions for that and really try to drill down on particular problems that they are facing.

Steve: Do you actually do pre sales with your email list as well?

Scott: Not really.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Because I guess it’s just a matter of the publishing schedule I try to maintain is pretty fast, it’s about– now it’s about every six to eight weeks. So trying to promote new books, old books, recommend blog posts, I just I find there is a lot going on. So once a while I casually mention what I’m working on. But I almost use like the questions as you know way as pre-sale deal before I actually release the book.

Steve: Okay and then if you were to just kind of look back and compare the books that bomb versus the ones that were successful, what are some other things that you did that made a book bomb or be successful?

Scott: I would say the problem is I actually do follow the same process each time. So sometimes certain books just don’t take off and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: There is no other reason maybe because I did that properly. But I will say definitely what I just talk about is not talking to people first and finding out if it’s actually something that they want. And I guess the one or two books that really stunk up the place, they were more just me lecturing about something instead of actually just offering a solution to what people actually have told me that they are going through. I would say I’m drawing a blank on what else…

Steve: So it had nothing to do with the promotion process, the book development process. You think it was like the content? The nature of the con…

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I would say that the scope of what I was talking about obviously the nature of the actual content itself. Like sometimes when I just didn’t write as well as I could have, that comes out later on after the book is sold a lot and then people just come back with their actual honest feedback. Like I mention habit stacking before that sold extremely well, but it wasn’t until a month or two later that I realized that there were some major critical flaws to it so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: You will get those feedbacks and that feedback will be later on. But as far as like having a process– usually the process I’m actually constantly trying to improve on my launch process and trying to get a little bit better each time.

Steve: Okay and so the first step in your process is to find a niche or a pretty broad reaching topic that you feel like you can expand upon with multiple books. Is that kind of accurate?

Scott: Yeah absolutely, and just for me I just I always kind of be in the habits anyway, so it felt like kind of a natural segway for what I want to write about. And it does give me some flexibility for what I can talk about.

Steve: Okay and then let’s say you’ve started writing and you’ve gotten some feedback from people and then you are done, what are some of the next steps?

Scott: I would say its button share time and that’s really just a simple matter of taking an idea and I’m going to run this process real quick because…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: It’s actually kind of a lengthy one but I like to do a brain damp just take out a couple of pieces of paper, write down everything you know about a particular topic. If you are not really sure about a certain aspect, that’s something you might need to research, at least write down I need to research this particular section of the book. And literally it’s like a complete brain storm, and I would say spend a couple of hours doing this. And what I would like to do next is take a stack of index cards and just flash out the actual book itself.

So I’ll take the eight or ten points of the book that I find are really the strongest points that can be broken down into subsections. So I take those and those will act as my chapters. And I literally go from crossing off ideas from the brain damp on that sheet of paper and putting it on to index cards. And the reason I pick index cards and I guess as an aside people of kindle also do the same thing with the scrivener software, I just– I’ve never really been a huge personal fan of scrivener but other people absolutely love it.

But you can do the same thing or sort an idea just you doing on your computer instead of the in person or like with actual physical index cards. So with index cards then I just separate them. I kind of reorganize them, I rip up sections I just don’t think it will really work, and I cross off sections. I try as much as possible to make a really tied book with the index cards. From there I’ll just do kind of a string of a consciousness writing rough drafts. I’ll just literally write down everything I know, almost using index cards just when you see one line I’ll just write as much as I know about that topic.

And the first draft is really, it’s ugly as sin, it’s terrible looking, but it’s important to kind of get that out of the way. So your idea here is you are kind of overcoming writers block and just not staring at the cursor of death wondering what to write next. So you just– you blast through that rough draft and then the second third and forth draft you really try to clean up and polish it. And I’m at the point now where actually by the time I hit the forth draft I pass off the one editor. She comes back, I get the corrections, and I pass off to a second editor. I’m sort of relying more on teams to actually kind of refine the book and make sure it’s tight and as good as possible.

Steve: So you actually have two editors for your books?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I would say the one almost acts as the developmental editor where she really will come back and make some suggestions, talk about stuff that should be deleted or stuff that should be added, that sort of thing, fact check, or link check, that sort of thing.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And then there is a second editor he kind does more like a proof reading kind of final run through with that just to make sure everything is good to go.

Steve: So you absolute recommend having someone else tale a look at it before you publish?

Scott: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: When I first got started actually a friend of mine he looked it over. But I would say you almost want to pay someone to do it professionally, someone that actually has experience for instance. You can hire someone from anywhere form point five cents, so half a cent to two cents a word. That’s generally the going rate at least for that hire people for.

Steve: Okay and then interesting. For your first books did you try to do it all yourself in the beginning?

Scott: Yes and that’s…

Steve: Okay

Scott: That’s why I’m so bullish about editors now. I made the rookie mistake of assuming since I knew the content that people would just see the content and not see the typos and the grammar mistakes. And it wasn’t until like the seventh or eighth book that I realized like wow this is– I’m getting frequent comments about typos. And maybe even though I proof read it, I looked over a bunch of times it’s just– there is something about when you look over your own stuff, your mind thinks it sees what’s supposed to be there and not what’s actually there. And I for instance I miss words sometimes. I sometimes say words double. It’s just stupid mistakes, but when you are too into it you just don’t see the critical errors that you are making.

Steve: Okay and then they also take care of all the formatting and everything also, right?

Scott: The formatting is something I’m still trying to find the right formatter for but that’s actually someone else you need to hire for. I tend to do everything through Microsoft word and I save as a web filtered file, and that if you are getting started that’s okay, but you might want to consider hiring someone to do formatting for you. And that’s actually…

Steve: Wow okay.

Scott: Truth be told I’m still trying to find the right way to format my books. So just I’d say that’s one of my major flaws of my business right now is not having the best formatting.

Steve: Okay but it sounds like from a priority perspective you are doing pretty well without one. So it’s definitely not necessary.

Scott: Yeah but I don’t know I like the idea of continuous improvement. So I’m always trying to get a little better at self with every feature book.

Steve: So one thing that Johnny mentioned in the last interview was the book cover was one of the most important factors. So how do you deal with the book cover in your case?

Steve: Yeah I completely 100% agree with him.

Scott: Okay.

Steve: I was very fortunate that early on I found a really good book cover designer, and again I look at book cover design as an investment not an expenditure. And I really feel that’s an important distinction because people– I feel a little off that really they don’t really want to spend money on their book cover and I feel it literally has a direct correlation between sales and what people are looking at. And the mistake I see is they’ll go to Fiverr and they’ll just hire someone for five bucks who’ll create a really simple looking cover. And I just I think they’re shooting themselves in the foot, but I have a professional cover designer. He sends back a couple of photos that he found from I stock photo.

We talk about the concept of the book and he kind of tells me what base image to buy, I go buy and he handles the rest. But it’s– I guess it’s just a matter of really trusting the guy or girl that you work with and having an ongoing conversation about what you actually need for your book cover design, but that’s something that unless you’re a really good graphic designer you shouldn’t be doing it yourself, and you should be willing to spend a little bit of money on it.

Steve: Okay how did you find your guy?

Scott: I just went through Elance and…

Steve: Elance, okay.

Scott: I just– I do what I call a human split test, well I do this a lot of new projects is I’ll hire two people to do kind of the same project and I’ll just find the one who responds the quickest, who seems more interested in the project and not just trying to cross off the list but actually is engaged, and kind of the overall quality of their work and just by putting two people together you really have a good idea of who is the best candidate.

Steve: Okay and then what about in terms of naming your book, that’s probably really important as well right?

Scott: Absolutely and I feel that is the success of the habit stacking books since I came up with a pretty clever name. One of those names just kind of came to me but what I’ve done in the past and actually what I still kind of do is I’ve gone to sites like Copy Blogger or other places that have really good titles and I’ve literally copied and pasted all their titles into a swipe file. And I have just a binder full of swipe files of all these different websites, if I find a good title of something, I’ll throw that in there as well. And every time I come with a title I’ll pull it out, I’ll look at different words and I’ll literally run through 20, 30 titles tweaking and cutting and asking people’s opinions here and there, but it takes me a couple of hours to come up with a good title.

Steve: So in terms of the strategy for your title, is it kind of along the same lines of coming up with a headline for a blog post that you want it to be very clickable?

Scott: Definitely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Yeah I guess there’s an argument that people are kind of hating on Clickbait right now, but…

Steve: Yeah.

Scott: But yeah you definitely want to– you want to class something fairly clever. I tend to gravitate towards two or three word main title, like a book I just released a daily entrepreneur or something like that or habit stacking, something that creates a little bit of curiosity, and the sub headline actually gives a little more of an explanation about what the book is about.

Steve: Okay so that’s the strategy that you use, kind of like a shorter title and then the sub headline kind of describes what the book’s more about and that’s kind of entice– the subheading is where you actually entice the person to…

Scott: Yeah [Inaudible] [00:27:18].

Steve: Hold on one sec Steve you’re breaking up.

Scott: [Inaudible] [00:27:28] 33 success habits for small…

Steve: You still there Steve?

Scott: Yup still here.

Steve: Okay I think you’re going to have to start that section over, I lost it all.

Scott: Where did you lastly lose me?

Steve: You were– let’s see what we were just talking about, what were we just talking about?

Scott: The headlines and sub headlines I was kind of giving a for instance.

Steve: Yeah so I think I lost you when I asked you that question about so the sub headline is more about getting the person into entice a person to buy and then you started talking about, so that’s when you started breaking up.

Scott: Okay so just let me know when you want to start again.

Steve: Yeah go ahead.

Scott: Okay.

Steve: Yeah.

Scott: So basically with the sub headline again you’re right, it kind of gets people to really understand what the book is about, so for instance I just mentioned my book The Daily Entrepreneur. The sub headline is 33 success habits for small business owners, freelancers, and aspiring 9-5 escape artist. It’s definitely a mouthful and I had a couple a little bit of brush back for that but I felt it was important to kind of touch on different people who might be interested in learning about entrepreneurial habits so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: The idea there is with the sub headline you really want to kind of drill down and almost zero in on your target audience and who’d be most interested in your book.

Steve: Okay and then all those words fit on the cover?

Scott: It’s my cover artist is pretty good, it’s definitely small fonts, but I would say you don’t have to get as wordy as I was on that particular title, like I tend to– my subtitle is a little bit short, I just for me that was personal teaching because a lot of people like say for instance if you’re a tax consultant and that you work for yourself you’re technically a freelancer or you’re an entrepreneur but you might not consider yourself an entrepreneur. And so I was trying to like hit all those touch points at different people who might be interested in the book.

Steve: Okay. No it makes sense; it’s actually a pretty enticing title. So let’s talk about the most important part, how did people find you? Like what’s your promotion strategy?

Scott: Honestly my biggest promotion strategy is the email list that we talk about, that we just talked about before.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So I really try to get as many people on my email list as possible and actually I would consider that more important than the blog and the kindle books and all that. I really just– I try to build that email list as big as possible and have them as engaged as possible.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So when I launch a book I actually do a kind of a slow roll out lately. So I’ll email my Steve Scott list people interested in internet business stuff and they– even though a lot times my books don’t really directly relate to internet business people still pick it up because they might find it interesting or it just talks about productivity, that sort of thing. So I’ll email them on a Monday, then I’ll email my “Develop Good Habits” list on a Tuesday. Wednesday I’ll do social media, so I’ll do like the Facebook, Twitter, couple of Facebook groups that I’m in, and actually that’s what I was currently doing today.

And Thursday I’ll do kind of last chance the book is going up to its normal price at 2.99, I’ll do that on Thursday and same thing on Friday. So I try to consistently promote it throughout the week and I do a lot of other little things like I’ll change the advertisement and creatives on my blog, a couple other places that people tend to click on my website that sort of thing. So I try to do it really slow and consistent that Amazon algorithm will start to see that this new book is getting consistent level of sales and they’re more inclined to give it a little more visibility on their platform.

I find that when I do that, when I price a book for 99 cents through a solid week of promoting it, about the week mark maybe after 10 days or so Amazon starts to really pick up the slack, starts to promote on their end through email campaigns and posing on the hot the top 100 list, the hot new releases list, and a couple other sections on Amazon. Eventually they’ll see that this is a book that people want and they’ll start promoting it through their end, and it’s almost like a reverse 80-20 rule. So at first I do 80% of the effort, Amazon does 20%, and after about 20, about 10 days or so it reverses where Amazon does 80% of the marketing for me.

Steve: Okay so let me just summarize what you just said. So your basic strategy is to give it that initial push until it reaches a point where Amazon recognizes that it’s a best seller or it’s going to sell well, then they take over from there.

Scott: Yeah exactly and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And then sometime honestly it’s some like mentioned before some books just don’t take off, like even during the week I’ll see that book X doesn’t compare to the sales that I see in my end compared to book Y. So sometimes you almost know within the first couple of days that a book might not sell as well as you think. And in my opinion that’s okay because it’s like even if a book makes a couple of sales a day it’s still part of a catalogue, it still helps your overall brand but yeah…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I really try to emphasize pushing everything on Amazon, that’s actually really why I’ve put all my eggs in one basket because I feel that yes there are other book platforms but all the stuff that Amazon gives you is worth the exclusivity that you have to give and be part of the KDP select program.

Steve: So what is the– how many books do you have to sell to get Amazon to recognize you and start taking over?

Scott: I would say at least a couple of hundred and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: That’s why honestly for most people– most people don’t necessarily should necessarily do what I do because I do a pretty large email list so it works for me. But if you can get at least 50-100 sales on your own, they might want to consider it. The alternative strategy is to put your book in KDP select and give it away for free for five days and that’s part of the– that’s one of the tools that Amazon gives you is you can weigh a book for a free first for a certain amount of days and when it goes back to paid it might shoot up the page charts, and actually if you look on my blog at stevescottsite.com/book–launch…

Steve: I’ll link that up don’t worry.

Scott: Yeah I’ll give the link, my friend Nick Lopper actually had a really good successful free book launch and he actually wrote a whole blog post that details the whole strategy that he followed. So there are ways and actually, I guess this is great for people that really don’t have a large e-mail list that you almost want to launch a book for free instead of launching it for– at 99 cents.

Steve: Okay can we just talk about KDP versus KDP select for a little bit.

Scott: Sure, when you join Amazon anyone can join Amazon, put the book up there and if you just put in the normal KDP, you can also sell the book on Barnes & Noble, Kobo, Apple, all the other book platforms or you could even sell on your own blog, you could sell pretty much anywhere. If you join KDP select you have to sign a 90 day exclusivity contract where no more than 10% of your content can be sold or distributed anywhere else. So for all intents and purposes the book has to be unique to just Amazon and nowhere else.

A lot people complain about that but I think Jim Crow from Author Marketing Club, he says the best that it’s really only 90 days when compared to traditionally published book that can take away four, five years of the contract and it’s really not that big of a deal. And if you put a book in there for 90 days and it doesn’t work for you then you can roll it out to other platforms. And I just like it because you get either the five free days like I talked about or you can also do what’s called a countdown deal where you drop your book down to 99 cents, and there’s for a week and there’s like a little ticking clock that kind of gives a little bit of scarcity to the book and people are more inclined to buy when they think it’s only temporarily at a low price.

And actually the part of the program that’s really– people really starting to enjoy are starting to really joy is what’s called kindle unlimited. And if you join kindle unlimited as a reader you pay 10 bucks a month and you can just read unlimited amount of books. On the author end you get a dollar fifty, most recently last March you get it about a dollar fifty Per kindle unlimited download, and I would say right now about a third of my sales are coming from Kindle Unlimited download, so…

Steve: Really?

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: Interesting.

Scott: It’s pretty substantial. You don’t make as much on a per unit sale, but you get a decent amount of income and also it helps with your ranking. So say if 50% of your sales are kindle unlimited they still count that as sales, they don’t count that as something separate, and so it helps with your ranking algorithm.

Steve: You know I’ve heard of some people giving away their books for free and not being on KDP select. So have you seen that happen, and if so what’s kind of the advantage of KDP select at that point?

Scott: Can you explain like they give it away…

Steve: They made it zero dollars by telling Amazon…

Scott: Oh yeah, that’s the perma-free technique, and that’s kind of a backdoor technique you can do with Amazon where you post a book on Amazon, you drop it to 99 cents and then you publish it elsewhere on other platforms through smashwords.com, and you price it down to zero like basically give it away for free there. And then when you see that the– once you see the smash words distributes to other platforms you find those websites, you find the link and you go back to Amazon and tell them you have it for free at these websites and a lot of times you need your buddies to do it.

That’s why you need a couple of people telling Amazon that they found this book for free on other websites, and then ultimately or eventually Amazon will price match it and drop it down the zero cents or just completely free. And the idea there is when you have a free book it kind of acts as an entry point to your funnel. So I know a lot of fiction writers, they’ll take the first part of their series and given away for free, and hopefully hook people on their content and then get readers to go on to buy their second third fourth and fifth book.

Steve: Okay and then if you get that successfully working, then what are some of the other advantages of KDP select at that point?

Scott: I would say if you have a perma-free book– I guess some people don’t really want to give away the book permanently for free. They actually generally want to sell it.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So it acts almost like the free almost acts as the sales tool, as a way to attract attention to not only that book, but potentially other books on a catalog. So the idea is they give their book away for free for a couple days to get some extra visibility, and then when the book goes back up to its pay price people will be picking it up. There’s a higher success chance of all people buying as one price.

Steve: Okay but just because it’s zero dollars you can still raise it at anytime right?

Scott: Yeah you could and with the KDP select with those five free days you can raise it at any point during the promotion, you could just immediately stop it in the middle of promotion if you don’t like the numbers or you just you aren’t getting any value from it.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: With the countdown deals where you’re pricing a book temporarily for 99 cents, you’re locked into that discount for whatever time that you select.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of getting visibility in search and getting reviews, do you have a strategy on that?

Scott: Yeah that’s, it’s– I’ll be honest it’s hard to do when you’re releasing books on a regular basis. If you have one or two books out there, it’s easy to build a bunch of people who are willing to go and leave reviews, but when you have continuous books it’s definitely a challenge. What I like to do is every time someone e-mails me or that asks or talks about something I wrote in the book or compliments me on a book or generally seems like their interested in the book, I’ll reply back. I’ll talk to them and hopefully solve whatever problem that they’re facing and then I’ll ask for a review.

I’ll give him a direct link to my book and say can you go– if you have a chance can you just leave a couple sentences review, it really helps. And if they actually go back and do that, then I just say I’m building a street team, I’m building a group of people who will receive a free book in the future, do you want to be part of it? And if they decide to join then every time I have a new book I just e-mail the select group of people and same thing I just– my new book is out, would you mind leaving a review if you find it useful. And I really– it’s a really light touch point where you don’t say go leave me a five star review, just say leave a review.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I find that I can get anywhere from five to fifteen reviews during the first week and then I have built some cache with my e-mail list that a lot of time they’ll after reading a book for a week or so they’ll go leave reviews. It definitely– I definitely build initial view on my end through just the connections and from my street team. Little overtime just the organic nature of Amazon people the reviews will roll in and I do have a review request in the back of every single book and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: There are a couple of other things I’m currently testing as well.

Steve: So in terms of reviews are they huge in terms of getting visibility for the book?

Scott: I would say absolutely with the caveat of don’t stress out too much about it, because I’ve actually seen a couple of books of mine have two reviews on them and then they’ve actually still sold really well, so they’re not…

Steve: Interesting.

Scott: They’re not the end of the world like some people make it out to be like if you don’t get 50 reviews your books are going to tank, like I’ve successfully sold books with less than a dozen reviews on them. And I would say another thing like you’re going to get negative reviews and it’s important to pay attention to the content review of just– if it’s something that really adds no value don’t worry about it, but if you keep on seeing stuff pop-up in reviews itself or multiple reviews, then pay close attention to it and try to fix whatever error they’re pointing out. Because no matter how hard you try, you’re going to make mistakes in the book and it’s just a matter of trying to improve on it, and just engaging even negative review people and just finding out how you can better help them.

Steve: So you respond to negative reviews?

Scott: Actually a lot of times I don’t. I actually I almost caution not doing it, but if it’s something that even if it’s negative review its actually valuable I’ll actually come back and thank them and let them know that’s something I’m working on, it’s something I’m going to fix, but if it’s just…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I’ve had a couple– I’ve only done this two or three times where I got into a debate with somebody and that’s just someone who was really negative and hostile. And the one time in particular that I’m thinking of is just someone who literally attacked my character and accused me of all sorts of awful things, but I felt at that point I– anyway it was like three pages long, it was like the longest review I’ve ever read.

Steve: Wow.

Scott: So I felt I had to defend my stuff because it was– no matter what I try to prove the guy still just doesn’t believe me, so I just you know you can– you’re going to get some hate if you do well on– if anything people are just going to hate you for no reason.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So I try not to let it affect my day, but when I feel I have to I will reply back, but most of the times I just try to ignore them.

Steve: Okay I can’t imagine that’s a good use of your time to respond to a three page rant.

Scott: No, not at all, it’s like the reminisce of a crazy person.

Steve: So a couple other questions. It is kind of more kind of more random, so you mentioned that each of your books you try to keep it 20,000 words, is that accurate?

Scott: I would say at first I definitely dipped under the 15,000 words and in the last year or so I tried hit 20,000, actually my most recent book I hit 35,000. So again it kind of goes back to continuous improvement. I feel that Amazon is getting more competitive, so I’m trying to increase the content, just really try to add a lot more value in every book, but keep it at the same 2.99 price point.

Steve: Right so you mentioned 2.99 price point, is there something magical about that price point?

Scott: I would say for me absolutely it’s– that is the lowest price point where you get the 70% commission rate from Amazon. So if you dip under 2.99 you go to 2.98 or down to 99 cents Amazon only gives you 35% of the sales commission. So you basically have to sell seven times the amount of books to make up for that difference. So say you sell seven books, at 99 cents equals the same money you make from one sale at 2.99, so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I like the 2.99 price point because I consider each book an entry point into my overall brand, so if someone is interested in cleaning up their inbox or something like that, they can check out that book and they go on and like that, they know that there’s a bunch of other books that they can check out as well. So I like to get them in as the lowest price point as possible and hopefully hook them into reading more books.

Steve: Would you say the majority of customers buy more than one book?

Scott: I would say the people who don’t like me; they definitely don’t buy more than one book.

Steve: Oh yeah obviously yeah.

Scott: But I would say yeah my customers absolutely I get a ton of emails saying oh this is like the 9th book I’ve read by you, so it’s something you definitely you love hearing, at least I love hearing that.

Steve: So it sounds like you’re not banking on any single book. You’re just trying to get someone in your list where you can introduce them to your entire library of products essentially.

Scott: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And I also kind of with the countdown deals I definitely run a lot of deals for 99 cents on a lot of my books because even if it’s discounted and I don’t make a lot of money on that particular book, I know that they might be more inclined to check out my other books. For me it’s a long term strategy, I’m just trying to get as many customers and eyeballs as possible.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of the actual book creation process typically how long does it take you to pump out a book?

Scott: I would say when I first started; I literally was doing them every three weeks. Now it’s almost…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Scott: Double to six, sometimes six to eight weeks now. Again I’m trying to get a little bit better with each book, so it’s taking a little bit longer.

Steve: Okay, well three weeks sounds just like a really short amount of time for me actually.

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: I mean you’re writing like every day for many hours, right?

Scott: Yeah, I was definitely a lot unhappier when I did that, because that was I would say that was 20, 30 hours of writing a week, and it was just– the pace was insane and I guess I could do it if I had to now, but it wasn’t very enjoyable.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of do you ever use ghost writers?

Scott: I’ve tried, I definitely tried with the animal picture books, and I think I talked about that, that was kind of a failed experiment. Now once– usually in every book there’s one or two sections that are just more research based that just require a list of websites or a list of tools, that sort of thing. So I’ll definitely outsource a small portion of like 1000, 2000 words just go find information on this. I usually just send my VA to do that and but everything else I try to keep it either me writing, or on the most recent book I worked with a collaborator I have, like she wrote a lot of it as well.

Steve: Okay and mainly that, so it doesn’t affect your overall brand, right? Your whole library that you’re trying to create.

Scott: Yeah definitely and I feel that some people are actually– have managed to successfully build a kindle business off of ghostwriting. I just– I haven’t seen a great example of it and my own life or from my own experience, but I’m sure there’s someone out there who is doing really well, he or she is probably not talking about it.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of recommendations on how to get started. Are there any books that helped you get started, or where did you find the resources for yourself?

Scott: I’m trying to think of books that are not self-serving; like I dove a book called Writing Habit Mastery that…

Steve: It doesn’t matter, you can be self-serving; I’m going to link up a lot of your…

Scott: Okay.

Steve: I’m going to ask you for your best sellers and link them up in the show notes so…

Scott: Oddly enough, the only resources– I didn’t really read a lot of books on it. I just more check out podcasts and just kind of got into the mindset of a writer and some of my favorites are The Creative Pen and The Self Publishing Podcast. Those are– and The Sell More Books Show, those are three podcasts I regularly enjoy and the idea that it’s not really necessarily with the writing process, but kind of the mindset of an author, and what it’s like to legitimately to build a business. It is not the sexiest business in the world, but there is a mindset that if you’re willing to put forth daily effort, you can actually make a good business out of it, but you have to– it’s like a year, it’s a multi-year process, it is not an overnight success.

Steve: Sure absolutely as with any business. Are there any online services that you kind of use to help you promote your books that you care to mention?

Scott: Honestly, it’s really– my online business is really run through e-mail marketing, so it’s AWeber…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Which I’m sure you talk about and really for me it’s been Facebook, just connecting with people, talking with other customers, or just joining groups with other authors and connecting with them. And it’s again I guess it’s more of a day-to-day strategy instead of an actual– I guess you have to put a lot of time in actually connecting with people and the payoff is when you have a book people are more inclined to go and buy it, but it’s not like I can go on Facebook and just blast 100 different pages which is go buy my book, you have to build those connections.

Steve: Do you ever buy ads or anything like that?

Scott: I have tried one, I can’t really talk about because I signed an NDA for that, but I tried it that didn’t really work out. I’ve tried Facebook ads that didn’t really pan, it’s just it’s hard because price points are so low that…

Steve: Yeah, exactly

Scott: You’re not making much money on– especially if you’re launching a book. I literally make 35 cents on every book purchased during a launch. So there’s almost no way to make the math work.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I know there is Bookpub.com, people absolutely love it, but Book Pub does not like me. I submitted to them like six times already and they just– they keep on rejecting me. I’m going to keep trying, but I would say for everyone listening if you can get a book into Book Pub, it’s definitely worth your investment. I think it’s a couple of hundred dollars, but it it’ll definitely pay for itself, and I have a couple of friends who have done really well with book pub promo.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And there’s a couple other sites I just I haven’t really successfully done anything with them, so I really can’t say if it’s good or not.

Steve: Okay sounds good man. Hey Steve we’ve been talking for 48 minutes and I really appreciate your time. If anyone wants to find you, where can they reach you?

Scott: I guess two places, there’s stevescottsite.com and I talk about all things like kindle publishing there. But I’m actually starting a podcast in about a month or so and that’s going to be selfpublishingquestions.com. It will probably still be built as we’re talking that’s when the podcast goes live, but I know it’s definitely going to be hopefully launched by the end of November.

Steve: Okay, you know I can wait to have this podcast out until then, then I’ll link up your podcast in the show notes.

Scott: Sure, that will be great.

Steve: Sound good? All right, hey Steve thanks for coming on the show man, really learned a lot today.

Scott: Thanks for having me on, it’s great.

Steve: All right take care.

Scott: Bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. Way back in episode 35 I had another successful kindle author Johnny Andrews on the show, and it’s been really interesting to hear the differences in strategy between the two authors. And the important lesson here is that it doesn’t matter what type of books you write, whether they be nonfiction or fiction, there’s definitely money to be made on the Kindle platform. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode55.

And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

MWQHJ 056: How JD Roth Started GetRichSlowly And Inspired A Personal Finance Blogging Revolution

$
0
0

JD Roth

Today’s interview is a very special to me because this person is someone who inspired me to start my own blog back in 2009. JD Roth is the founder of GetRichSlowly.org and he was one of my blogging idols early on.

Today, he writes at JDRoth.com and his blog is still one of the very few that I read on a regular basis. He’s an amazing writer and I love how he can make even mundane topics interesting through the power of storytelling. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How JD Roth got the idea for GetRichSlowly.org
  • The key to creating a successful blog
  • Why JD ultimately decided to sell his website
  • Why you should get more personal with your content
  • The power of storytelling
  • Why SEO shouldn’t be your number one priority
  • How GetRichSlowly.org made its money

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have a very special guest on the show J.D. Roth, now for as long as I’ve been blogging, I’ve always only followed a handful of personal finance blogs and especially getrichslowly.org created by none other than J.D. Now I actually met J.D. inside of a Super Shuttle on the way to FinCon and I have to admit when I first saw him in the back seat behind me I was kind of star struck.

Here was the father, actually not the father the grandfather of personal finance blogging in the same van as me and I was pleasantly surprised to find that J.D. was super cool and down to earth. Now J.D. later sold Get Rich Slowly for a nice seven-figure sum, stopped blogging for a while altogether, went back and then recently left to start his to start a different blog altogether. And what I really like about J.D. is that he writes from the soul and all these articles are super personal, engaging, and we can all learn a lot from him on how to create a loyal audience. And with that intro welcome to the show J.D., how are you doing today?

JD: Thanks Steve, I’m doing great.

Steve: I thought you’d enjoy that grandfather of personal finance.

JD: Well you know people kept calling me the Godfather, but I’m not the Godfather, Flexo or Luke from Consumerism Commentary. He’s the godfather of personal finance blogging,

Steve: Yeah he certainly is and what does that make Jim then?

JD: Oh that’s a great question. We’ve got to come up with the name for him.

Steve: I don’t think he has a nickname yet, I’ll have to give him one.

JD: He’s like a mastermind.

Steve: The mastermind.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So J.D. give us a quick background story about GRS and just take us way back to when GRS got started.

JD: Sure, so I would say there is a lot of different threads that combined to lead to Get Rich Slowly and in retrospect this seems pretty clear that I was destined to start something like that, but I could never have predicted it. So I went through college, I got a psychology degree and while I was getting a psychology degree, I was also getting myself deep in debt, and not like student loans like a lot of people who go to college, but I was racking up debt in the form of credit cards. I graduated from college with a credit card habit. That credit habit just got worse as I as time went on.

Also this time I like writing I’ve always been a writer ever since I was in grade school, and so all these things are coming together, I got on the web the early days of the web. I had a web journal before it was called the blog; we used to call them web journals. And all of these things just kind of gradually let up so that in 2004, my then wife and I bought a new house, and on paper we could afford the house but in reality when we purchased it I felt like I was just drowning in debt because I had over $35000 in consumer debt. All of a sudden we’re taking on this new mortgage and is all sorts of work that needs to be done to this house, because it’s 100 year old house, and I just felt like I was really-really struggling.

Around this time some friends recognized that I was in need of help and so they recommended a couple of books, including Dave Ramsey’s Total Money makeover, and Your Money or Your Life by Joe Dominguez and Vicki Robin. And I read these books, I thought oh it kind of makes sense of and then I read some more books that I borrowed from a library and eventually I realized that there seems to be some common themes in these books. In one of the book one of the themes was that although there was no reliable way to get rich quickly, there were ways that people could get rich slowly.

And that so I wrote about this idea that you can get rich slowly, I wrote about this on my personal site Folded Space. And after I wrote about this for whatever reason, a lot of people liked what I had written, and it gave me this idea, maybe I can start a blog about personal finance. I thought it would be the first blog about personal finance. It turns out there were already some out there, including Consumerism Commentary from the Godfather Flexo.

And so I started Get Rich Slowly, I started to share my progress with money. I thought I can improve my own situation and maybe help other people improve theirs. And as just kind of an afterthought I put some ads on it because I thought maybe I can make some money along the way. And little did I know that this whole project would change my life in all sorts of ways, including financially.

Steve: So just curious when you first started writing, was the intention to make money or was it just more like a journal?

JD: Well, it wasn’t strictly a journal; I mean my personal site was more like a journal. Get Rich Slowly was definitely it was a way for me to hash out what I was learning about money. And so I gave my three goals where number one, improve my own situation and number two, to improve and to help other people improve their situations. And I definitely did start out with the intent to make money, but I thought maybe I would make $100 a month or $200 a month, just a little bit of money to help me get out of debt more quickly. I had no idea that it would become a business.

Steve: Okay and then you know when you were– you’re not a technical person are you J.D.?

JD: Moderately, I mean…

Steve: Moderately, okay.

JD: At one time I thought I was going to become a computer programmer, so I actually got a couple of gigs doing programming but…

Steve: Okay, and so in terms of putting up the website that wasn’t really a big deal for you, and did you invest a lot of money into this blog early on?

JD: No-no-no-no.

Steve: Okay.

JD: No way at all.

Steve: Okay.

JD: At first everything was hand coded back in the early days back when I said I had a web journal. I was hand coding my website. I say that my…

Steve: Oh okay.

JD: My current skills with web design are very 1998 because that’s just kind of where the flow is. I was on the cutting-edge in 1998 but never developed beyond that. So when it came to Get Rich Slowly, I used a standard WordPress out of the box theme. I adjusted a little bit, I flipped the header image I remember I thought it was pretty hilarious for doing that. And it was kind of an abstract thing so nobody could tell, and then I made some modifications with– I never made like heavy modifications.

Steve: Okay, now I was just curious for my own knowledge and…

JD: Yeah.

Steve: You know one thing that kind of drew me to GRS was just the quality of the content, like if you looked at some of the other personal finance blogs it was just more generic material, but everything with yours; it had a lot of depth to it. So I just wanted to ask a little bit about your content strategy early on, is it something that was deliberate in the way you were writing or…

JD: Well, I would say it was intentional. I don’t know whether deliberate is the right word, but I think calling it a strategy really overstates it.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I was just writing the way I write, I was just writing the way I talk. I was being natural. To me as you know, I’m a strong believer in story and the power of story, and so I don’t like, I know that when I go to websites or read books or magazine articles I don’t like the old dry stuff, so why do I want to produce that? I want to produce the kind of material that I would want to read and so that means putting some personality into it, talking about my cats, talking about my ex-wife and I we had a garden.

So I had an ongoing series where every summer, I would chronicle how we were doing with our garden and whether we were making money with the garden and so on. For a long time I talked about how I wanted to buy a mini cooper, I had this thing I really wanted my mini cooper, and so little touches like that made the site more personal I think.

Steve: I just have a question about that eventually you sold GRS.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So does writing in such a personal fashion affect the sellability of a site?

JD: Well it did to a degree, and when I sold the site, the people who were talking to me about buying it– this is one of the concerns they did have. And so as part of the purchase agreement what they wanted was for me to stick around for three years, they wanted to write a contract where I would stick around for three years…

Steve: Okay.

JD: So that it would be a gradual transition, and at the time that I sold it though I wanted out, I was done I thought, and so I turned that down. So they went back to the drawing board making back and they offered me 30% less and I could walk away. Now the ironic thing about all this is, I stuck around for the three years after all, I turned out I couldn’t tear myself away, I was so devoted to the site that I stuck around and I edited it, and I wrote for it and managed it. And so I shouldn’t have turned down that first offer.

Steve: Right, yeah who would have known?

JD: Yeah you make the best decisions you can with the information you have at the time.

Steve: So I’m just curious though if you were to give advice to someone starting their own blog today, would you still advice them to be a lot more personal about it?

JD: Yeah oh…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I feel like today– when I look at not just personal finance blogs but a lot of other blogs that are started today, so many of the sites are generic and they could be written by anyone. And so where’s the incentive for anybody to come back to that site? But on the other hand, if you look at the sites that seem to be successful, the new sites I think of somebody like Mr. Money Mustache and his site is relatively new.

And when he started it, it was at a time where people were saying well, nobody can have the same kind of success that Jim and J.D. and Flexo had because they started at the beginning. And yet you look at what Mr. Money Mustache has been able to do, he absolutely has had that total success, if not more so. And it’s because he’s been personal, he has a distinct style, and I think there are other people who are able to do this kind of thing too.

Steve: Okay and the only reason why I asked is you know I look at a whole bunch of different blogs and some of them are just like these blogs with a whole bunch of different authors and different personalities, but a lot of this stuff is on the more generic side, yet it still does pretty well.

JD: Of course.

Steve: And so I was just wondering what your opinion on you know going that route is as opposed to just going completely personal, like the way you and Mr. Money Mustache has proceeded.

JD: I don’t think there is anything wrong with that. I think it’s a set of different set of challenges. In some ways you make your content more accessible to everybody, and yet at the same time I think it’s like less interesting if that makes sense.

Steve: Yeah.

JD: It is like going to read just generic Wikipedia entry on a Roth IRA instead of a story from somebody…

Steve: Right.

JD: Writing about how they’ve done a Roth IRA.

Steve: Yeah no, I completely agree with you. I was just kind of curious why some of those sites are actually successful, like I’d much rather read a story based site like what you were saying that’s very personal. And you know it is just interesting to note that, so if you were to do it all over again you would not have changed anything in the way that you proceeded with GRS.

JD: No, absolutely not.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And you know I tried to have a balance, I think it’s important to note that not every article was a story based article. My story and my life formed the backbone of the site, and I shared any time something new or interesting happened I would share that. But at the same time, I would say most articles were actually spurred by something else that I’d read online.

So maybe I’ve gone to the money magazine website and they have an article on something, maybe I agreed with it or maybe I disagreed with it. And so I would quote a little bit from that article, the one that spurred my– whatever train of thought I had and then I will offer my own feedback to the article, either expanding on what was said or contradicting what they said, and so that’s how most of the articles at Get Rich Slowly worked.

Steve: Okay.

JD: They retained a personal voice, but they were often responses to other things that were out there on the web. And then there’s like a third type of article where it was just like purely informational, like How to start a Roth IRA, or which savings account is best and so on.

Steve: Okay and you know assuming that the content is good and was good, you know what was kind of your early strategy to obtain traffic?

JD: Again strategy implies much more than what I had. So I was very fortunate to have been around on the web from the early days of the web, and in fact I had also some online connections from even before the web came to existence from news groups and so on. And as time developed I participated in communities. There were different communities online, comic book communities, or movie serial communities, just different communities that I was a member of.

And so when I started Get Rich Slowly I’d shared this not like in a spammy sort of way, but I just like oh yeah you guys shared the comic book place forum, I just started this site and I wrote about how much I’m spending on comic books ha-ha-ha-ha, and I never thought oh I’m intentionally sharing this to try to get traffic. But the result is because I had these existing connections, and because I shared the site with the people in my personal life and there is another difference, a lot of people nowadays are anonymous bloggers, where as I was not anonymous in anyway and I share with a lot of people.

Steve: Right, yes.

JD: And by sharing with as many people as possible, I picked up some readers and some influential readers who started sharing the site in other places. For example Life Hacker, one of the editors at Life Hacker was an early reader of Get Rich Slowly, and so she would share articles around.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of– let’s say you had to start all over again, how would you proceed, you know in the present day?

JD: That’s a great question, Jim and Flexo and I have talked about this quite a bit actually because obviously we know a whole lot more than we did when we started. And obviously the whole ecosystem has changed, but at the same time I don’t think I could change much because it would be untrue to who I am.

Often at conferences I downplay the role of SEO and I really think that search engine optimization– I think too many people look at that as a primary or secondary method of obtaining traffic and success, and I would argue that it ought not be a primary or secondary concern, it should be a side effect. You should do all of the other things, provide great content, tell good stories, and do things and services to the readers first and the SEO is a byproduct or something that you go to when you don’t have anything else to do, then you look at the SEO and it’s like one of the last things you think of and not the first.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of GRS, Get Rich Slowly’s traffic, was it mostly search or was it mostly direct and recurring traffic?

JD: That’s a great question. I looked at it recently and told somebody the answer and I forget what it was to be honest, it was a large percentage was recurring traffic, like direct referral type stuff.

Steve: Okay.

JD: There is still plenty that was search based, but it was less so than most sites.

Steve: The reason why I’m asking you this is because and we’re going to probably get into this little bit later, but in terms of making money. A lot of times the search customers are the best customers in terms of a monetary standpoint.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And so it’s funny when you said that SEO should not be even the primary or secondary form of traffic that you should be focusing on, but so how do you kind of balance the monetary aspects with you know your own personal style?

JD: What I would argue is that the best SEO is a well written article because what happens when you have an article that people want to read and want to share, is that they do share it on other websites and it gets linked around. And so you could spend hours optimizing your keywords in a specific article on Roth IRAs to try and get traffic for Roth IRAs, but if somebody else goes along and writes a long story about how they set up their Roth IRA– I don’t know how you would actually make that interesting– this is just but– and it gets shared around at Reddit or on Facebook or at Life Hacker two.

All of these links back totally overpower your keyword optimization because this other person has managed to get high quality links and many of them, and so– now I’ve lost the track of what your original question was, but I feel like doing– following my method you do get SEO benefits, but it’s a different type of SEO if that makes sense. And another thing I would argue is if you build a large following and a huge number of readers, you end up getting a lot more search traffic too than you might think.

Steve: Okay, so let me just kind of rephrase that question a little bit.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So instead of focusing directly on SEO, so what do you focus on? So outside the content, let’s say the content is great in terms of social media, e-mail like what would you advise people to focus on?

JD: Well, that’s a great question Steve. For me I recognize that some of the things that I don’t do there’s actually value in it. I’m not very good with social media, you and I talked before you started recording about how I’m a very poor marketer. I don’t like marketing, I hate it in fact, I hate self promotion. And as a result, I don’t do a lot with social media that I could do and I know that…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Some of my colleagues and friends are very successful with social media, and you also mentioned e-mail lists. I know from talking with some of my friends and colleagues like Ramit Sethi from “I Will Teach You to Be Rich” and Chris Guillebeau from The Arts of Non-Conformity, these people prize their e-mail lists very highly, and they nurture them, they grow them and they protect them. And it’s because– you talked about search traffic being a source of income, well these people believe that the e-mail lists are actually the greatest source of income.

Steve: I would tend to agree with them.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So…

JD: I’ve never done anything to try market to an email list, and yet I recognize that people that I respect highly praise their value.

Steve: It’s interesting because you know the way Get Rich Slowly kind of evolved was pretty much– it sounds like through just straight word of mouth and through the power of the content, is that…?

JD: Yeah that’s the impression I get, I mean I didn’t do any kind of marketing, I didn’t do any kind of search engine optimization, it was just by being shared around.

Steve: Okay and what was the business model exactly and how did how did it make money?

JD: Okay that’s a question I can answer and then we’ll have– I want to point out that there’s– before I answer it directly, I want to point out that there’s no one right way to build a blog. There’s no one right way to make money online. There all sorts of different strategies that work and you’ve got– your listeners have to find the strategies that best fit their particular– I don’t know method or personality or whatever it is. And so the same is true with advertising or making money from the website directly. In my case, I very much followed the traditional magazine type of monetization and by that I mean I have the content and around the content were ads– were display ads and…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Those were Google ads, they were banner ads that people paid me directly for, and it was only after a couple of years that I came to understand the power of affiliate ads. I didn’t– it was Jim Wang actually, he told me at the very first blogging get together that I ever went to in San Francisco. He’s like JD, how come you have not monetized your savings account page? I was like I don’t know what you mean, and so he said well you can do these affiliate programs and you’ll get paid every time somebody signs up for a savings account. I was like oh all right, I’ll try it.

It totally revolutionized my model and but nowadays I’ve also seen that there are people who like Remit initially, with I Will Teach You To Be Rich, he used the site more as an advertisement for himself. He didn’t monetize the site directly, but he was trying to promote himself to get speaking gigs, and then to sell his print books. And nowadays, he uses it to promote his courses.

And Chris Guillebeau has used his site to market e-books and other products, and I’ve had a little bit of taste of that because my latest project, which we don’t have to go into much depth but I’m happy to talk about, is a course that I did for Chris Guillebeau about personal finance. And so that was the first time I’d done any really non-traditional type income strategy I guess.

Steve: This is all really interesting because you know I had Jim Wang on the show earlier.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And his strategy for monetizing his blog was to rank for specific search terms and then go through affiliate offers, and it’s just interesting hearing both your perspectives, different perspectives on how to monetize a blog I guess, so…

JD: Well, and that’s why Jim and Flexo and I we’ve talked the three of us at some point opt to form a partnership because we each have very different skill sets. And yet we work well together, we know each other, we trust each other, and I suck at the whole search engine optimization stuff. I don’t like it, Jim is good at it, he likes it, so if we worked in a partnership that could be his focus, I could focus on creating some content. It’s an interesting thing, but we don’t have any kind of firm plant, but we’ve definitely talked about it.

Steve: Yeah I mean Jim is really good at optimizing something to death.

JD: Yes.

Steve: And extracting every last dollar out of something I think and yeah your content is awesome.

JD: Thanks.

Steve: I mean you’re just a natural writer.

JD: Thank you.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about some of the challenges early on in the early phases of Get Rich Slowly.

JD: Okay.

Steve: How does one get those advertising placements? How does one get those affiliate offers and get them to actually convert?

JD: Well, I don’t know if I’m going to have any useful information for you on this particular topic. For me again I started with the Google ads and anyone can get AdSense or at least I think…

Steve: Sure.

JD: Anyone can get AdSense, it’s not necessarily going to convert, but if you have enough traffic, especially on particular pages, you will make some income. Eventually, I had people approach me directly and offer display ads.

Steve: Okay.

JD: So figuring out how much to charge was a very difficult thing for me. I didn’t know I mean this is still back in earlyish days and you kind of had to feel things out. I would suspect that even today people had to fill things out. You don’t want to charge so much that you scare off advertisers, but on the other hand if you don’t charge enough you’ll leave money on the table. And so figuring out what people are willing to pay is a very important thing. With the affiliate offers I know that nowadays the market has changed somewhat. I hear about people all the time who are being dropped from programs.

Steve: Yes.

JD: Because they don’t convert enough. And so that’s actually an interesting challenge and I don’t know– I feel like if that’s happening to you and your monetization strategy is to use affiliate programs but you don’t have enough traffic, well then you’ve got to find ways to build traffic. You’ve got to change your focus for a while and maybe not focus on the affiliate program. Get rid of them altogether and instead focus on something else until your site has enough traffic that you can say, hey let me try it again.

Steve: Well let me ask you this you mentioned that Jim came to you and said, hey how come you are not monetizing your savings account article.

JD: Right.

Steve: What did you change to– did you just throw an affiliate link at the end?

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And that was it– okay.

JD: So what I had– the way the savings account article was structured in 2007, 2008 it was just– it was no more than me asking which online savings account is best. Our online [Inaudible] [00:27:32] savings account is best. And it was an honest question, I didn’t– I wasn’t thinking about SEO or anything. I was asking my readers because I didn’t have an online savings account. And I said okay I’m thinking about getting one, here are some of the ones I found and the rates they have. And back in 2007, 2008 rates were higher, and what you think of these accounts and which ones do you guys prefer?

And I had no links to start with. All I had was the information about their interest rates and links– well I had links to the sites but they weren’t affiliate links. And I got hundreds of comments; I got all sorts of traffic from that. And so about a year later was when Jim recommended that I add the affiliate links and I did, and they were just simple affiliate links for whatever programs I could find. And I didn’t do anything else other than that.

Steve: No that makes– I mean just the topic of that article just kind of lends very naturally to affiliate marketing actually.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And it sounds like it wasn’t intentional.

JD: No it wasn’t.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And even when I added the links I didn’t put up banner ads or anything like that. I just put the links on the– well for each individual account itself. Now one thing I will say Steve is even though I was never good at the advertising, I was pretty savvy about when I saw that I was getting an influx of traffic from some place I would quickly go add a line or two to my article at the bottom saying, hey if you like this you should sign up for my RSS feed or my email.

And I don’t remember exactly how I did it; I don’t know if there are still there the company that bought me recently might have taken the– these few line tags of these articles. But they were very effective in creating or capturing a lot of new readers. So whenever I saw somebody that was getting a lot of traffic for a particular article, I would add that so that I could try to recruit new regular readers.

Steve: That’s actually a really good tip; I mean I think everyone should just go through their analytics to find out which pages are gaining the most traffic. See if you can add a sign up form, or see if you can add an affiliate link that’s kind of related to that high traffic article.

JD: Yeah absolutely. I don’t do– I’ve said that I don’t do SEO and I don’t do the marketing very well, but one thing I did once I realized that oh certain pages get more traffic, is I went through and I tried to figure out how I could monetize these individual pages in order to obtain more traffic. Now you recently had Toni from the Happy Housewife on, and she stole one of my top pages. It doesn’t bother me now that I don’t have an active role in Get Rich Slowly, and I never really had a chance to monetize it and I’m not sure how I would have monetized it, but it was about do it yourself Christmas guess.

And that was one of the last articles I wrote before I sold the site. And it didn’t have a lot of traffic the first year, but the second year the year after I sold the site it was a– I got a huge traffic push from that particular article. And I suggested to the company that bought the site that they should do something to monetize that page and they never did. But Toni I think I mentioned it to Toni and she said, well fine I’ll take care of it. So sure enough she built the page, took over the ranking for that word, gets lots of traffic, and I don’t actually know what she’s done to monetize it, but I think she was very savvy in doing that.

Steve: You know it’s funny J.D. you know just based on talking to you, it sound like your overall strategy is to just put out the best more shareable content possible. Eventually you know it will get shared around and it’ll start getting traffic, it will start ranking just naturally and then go back, find out what’s performing well, and then just monetize based on your highest traffic pages, right?

JD: Yeah, I have never like actually articulated it in that way but yes, that’s exactly how I go about it, or how I would go about it if I were actively trying to run a blog as a business right now.

Steve: Yeah and I think the key from talking to you is you know focus on creating really good shareable content. And then the rest will just kind of take or care for itself over time.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And you know what you said about SEO is totally true with my blog. I had articles that I had written in the past. It took like a year maybe a year and half to start ranking, but once it starts ranking the traffic just starts pouring in.

JD: Yeah. And another thing I would say is I feel like everything you do with your website, with your blog should be in service of the reader. Anything that is not in service of the reader is going to actively discourage people from returning to your site. And so you have to walk a fine line because ads are obviously not in service of the reader. On the other hand certain ads can be. So like when I’m adding affiliate links– okay the affiliate links don’t help anybody besides me and the bank I guess. But if the reader is going to go and follow those links– anyhow I don’t have an issue with it.

The same thing with like referring people to Amazon even at my personal site today I’m always linking to Amazon. I just did it this morning, sharing about the different equipment I’m buying so that I can learn how to do video podcasts. And so I feel like– yes create shareable content and also try to structure your site so that it’s very reader friendly. So that it’s– the things you are doing don’t frustrate people and make them want to go away.

Steve: So what’s your view on AdSense then, just then curious then?

JD: I don’t hate ads and I don’t love it. To me it’s like a necessary evil in a way. I just removed it from my own site recently but my personal site right now does not generate a lot of income, so it’s not a big deal.

Steve: Right okay. Hey I was hoping we could talk about the sale a little bit.

JD: Sure.

Steve: You mentioned that when you were ready to sell Get Rich Slowly you were just done with it. So what were your motivations?

JD: Well I had a few motivations going on. First of all the site had been creating more and more income. It had gone from being– when I first started the site it generated a few bucks a day and then bumped up to being a few hundred dollars a month. And then eventually it was a few thousand dollars a month, so that about two years into it I was able to quit my day job to focus on the blog full time.

Then I– both my lawyer and my accountant and my wife, they asked me to stop sharing my incomes stuff, so I did. But the income continued to grow and grow, until toward the end I’m not allowed to say exactly how much I was earning, but I could say that I was earning more and more in one month from the site than I used to earn in a year from my job.

Steve: Wow.

JD: And this was towards the end of 2008, beginning of 2009. And if you’ll remember that’s right around when the economy crushed. And although my revenue continued to climb and climb and climb, I felt like I could see the writing on the wall. I felt like interest rates were beginning to drop, and I figured if interest rates were going to drop then people would sign up for fewer savings accounts, they would have– I only recently began to put credit card out on the site, and I figured well if people are having problems paying their debts, there are going to be fewer people interested in credit cards.

The bottom line is financially I thought now is a good time to sell. I’m making a lot more than I ever have and I feel like the economy is crushing.

Steve: Okay.

JD: Plus at the same time there was stuff going on my personal life. I was beginning to have doubts about my marriage, and I felt like this was taking too much time away from that. My best friend committed suicide which is something that I shared on the site. And there was just a whole lot of stuff going on that was making me want to get out of there.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I was unhappy. And so I had been ignoring people who would approach me and say oh I want to buy your site, I thought they were joking. I made a resolution at the beginning of 2009 that instead of ignoring these people I would listen to what they had to say. And eventually I realized, oh they were serious and in fact they were very-very serious and are willing to offer a lot of money.

Steve: So did you actually go out to find your ultimate buyer or did they find you?

JD: How did this work? So before the sale, I had one company– let’s call them company A approach me and said, hey we want to look at your site or we want to buy it. And I was like, okay how much do you offer? And they said, well we don’t know, we need to see your financial statements. And so I asked my attorney and my accountant should I show them, and they said of course they don’t have any other way to make an offer unless they see your stuff. So company A took a look at the financial statement and while they were doing this I decided I would get some advice.

And I went out and I did some searches to find people who had sold sites before. And I contacted a couple and I asked them how things had gone. And they said, well you know you should really hire an investment banker if you are serious. And I thought, well okay. So company A came back with an offer and it was a big number. It was a little bit bigger than what I thought would be my walk away number. And I was like, all right I’ll check with an investment banker.

And the investment banker said, you know you’ve already done a great job. You’ve got more out of it than we thought you could get, but we still think you should let us take it to other companies. And I said, all right well maybe one more. So they took it to company B and company B came back and made a better offer, and I ultimately sold to company B.

Steve: Okay and how did you determine what a fair offer was? Like what were the multiples– what’s the reasonable multiple for a blog at that time?

JD: Oh let’s see, there was a banking blog that sold for like 10 times…

Steve: Yes I remember. I can’t remember what it’s called right now but yeah.

JD: No I can’t either, but I thought that was unreasonable. And from talking to other people when I was waiting for company A’s offer to come in, I talked to other people and I decided that maybe three to five times earnings will be reasonable. And that’s right in line with like a standard valuation for a brick and mortar business.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And it might be a little bit higher, I think brick and mortar business is probably three times earnings. And so I decided based on trailing 12 month revenues what I looked at. So just kind of a rolling number that wasn’t your last 12 months of revenue. I decided– I think it was about five times– no three times is what I wanted Steve.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And so when company A came back with four times, and so I thought, oh well that’s perfectly reasonable.

Steve: Wow, okay and so it sounds like it’s just kind of naturally happened, people were coming to you, you just do a little bit of due diligence, figured out what your number was essentially and…

JD: Yeah. I mean there was a lot of work behind the scenes because I was calling everybody I could to ask information. I have somebody I consider a mentor who is– he teaches business classes here in Portland. And so I called him and talked to him, and he went through all sorts of stuff with me. And things like get as much of the money upfront as you can, and all these other things. And it was very interesting.

Steve: You know I know most people don’t have lawyers and accountants on retainer, did you have one on retainer or did you just get one for this?

JD: No, I’m very fortunate in that my best friend from grade school is my attorney and one of my best friends now is my accountant. They still charge me a lot of money, don’t get me wrong. I’m able to just contact them and say, hey this is what is going on and take them out to lunch and they allow me to pick their brains.

Steve: Okay. And I didn’t want to get too much into this, but in terms of just the terms of the sale, can you just briefly highlight what some of the different options were? You said get as much money upfront?

JD: Yeah.

Steve: What would be some of the other aspects of the deal where you wouldn’t get money upfront?

JD: Okay, so when you sell a company or a large asset, you don’t get paid all at once, it’s kind of a buyout. And so different– when somebody buys asset and in this case they bought an asset rather than a company, they bought the website. So it could have been structured so that they pay me very little upfront and then there was an earn out over a period of time…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Or what I pushed for was to get as much– actually the investment bankers were the ones who did the negotiating. We tried to get as much money upfront and a smaller payout in the long term. And I think we probably got less money because of that because obviously money loses its value a little bit in time. So and plus if you are asking for a lot upfront they are going to be less willing to part with it, but that’s how we structured it.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the investment banker, do you recommend going with one and what percentage do they take?

JD: I can’t remember exactly– our deal was a little different because I had already done so much of leg work by the time they got involved.

Steve: Okay.

JD: But my guess is right around 10%. I don’t have the numbers of the top of my head Steve.

Steve: No that’s okay, just a ball park is fine, okay.

JD: Yeah and ball park is I think 5 to 10% is what– it’s basically like selling a house.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And you want– excuse me, you want somebody there who knows the ins and outs, unless you’ve done it a number of times before. And so it was very handy to have them. I felt protected, I felt like they were looking out for my best interest.

Steve: Okay. And I’m going to make you feel a little bit uncomfortable now.

JD: Go ahead.

Steve: And I’m going to ask you about your course.

JD: Yeah, all right.

Steve: Because I know you are not a marketer.

JD: Right.

Steve: You don’t like pushing anything. So you know I thought I’d just get it out of you somehow. But you know these days you know you are not affiliated with Get Rich Slowly anymore. You have your own blog at, was it– you told me…

JD: It’s Jdroth.com is the URL.

Steve: Okay.

JD: But I call it folded space which is what I called my blog 10, 15 years ago.

Steve: Okay. And you recently started dabbling in info products, right?

JD: Yes.

Steve: So let’s talk about your latest info products.

JD: Okay so I met mentioned before I’m friends with Chris Guillebeau who runs The Art of Non-Conformity. He’s written a number of books like The Happiness of Pursuit and $100 Startup. He is the prime force behind the World Domination Summit here in Portland which I’ve worked and done him– I worked on with him. So he suggested over a year ago now that he is like J.D. you know I have this series of courses– he calls them Unconventional Guides. So it’s like the Unconventional Guide to travel, or the Unconventional Guide to publishing. He is like I want to do an Unconventional Guide to Money, and I want you to write it.

And so we collaborated and he provided the marketing arm and the design and all that, and I spent several months putting together this Get Rich Slowly course which is a year-long course. It’s basically a series of weekly emails, but to me the part I’m proudest of is the guide. It’s this 120 page book really that contains my– it basically boils down my entire personal finance philosophy into a 120 pages. And I framed it in terms of managing your personal finances like a business would manage their finances. I say I want people to be the chief financial officer of their own lives. And to be honest Steve I’m really-really proud of this guide because I feel like it’s the best work I’ve ever done.

Steve: Wow, you know what’s funny is you don’t call yourself a marketer and you know I would definitely not call you a marketer, but it’s just you naturally market your stuff through your passion if you know what I mean.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So it’s not intentional and you don’t have any ulterior motives. It’s just the way you present things is just– it’s just kind of naturally lands to being sold.

JD: Right and you know that’s actually another thing that’s kind of hard when it comes to marketing the course, because I am proud of it and I do want to share it with people, but I don’t need the money. Through the sale of Get Rich Slowly and careful management of the money that I got from that, I don’t need any more money. And so I’m not going to argue with earning more money, but it makes– I’m not motivated to market I guess than I would be if I weren’t in this position.

Steve: Sure I’ll be sure to link up this course in the show notes, but you know outside of your course are there any books that you’ve kind of read that have really influenced your way of thinking over the years?

JD: Yeah you know the funny thing is I often say that the best personal finance books aren’t about personal finance, and I mean that. So I guess– here is what I mean, so there is a book written by a guy named George Leonard and the book is called Mastery, and to me this is the best book that anybody who is trying to get out of debt can read. It talks about– he frames it in terms of trying to master martial art. And he talks about how you have to go from beginner and you have to just put in the work. And you have to struggle with getting better and then kind of losing some progress, and then getting better and then losing some progress.

And so this book Mastery is a great book for people who are trying to get out of debt or accomplish anything difficult. There is another book that I really like; it’s called The Magic of Thinking Big by David Schwartz. And it’s a book– it’s a very– it’s from the early 1960s, and it’s kind of got a very mad men type style in a way. It’s got some old fashioned language, but it’s a great book about positive thinking, setting goals, overcoming fear, and just doing the things you want to do. And it seems hawky [ph] at first but it’s a fantastic book.

Steve: Interesting.

JD: But perhaps I think the most influential book I’ve ever read is a book called How I Found Freedom in an UnFree World, and it’s by a guy named Harry Browne. Now Harry Browne is best known for being the Libertarian candidate for president in 1996 and 2000, but I don’t think people should hold that against him. This book was written in the early 1970s and how I Found Freedom in an UnFree World, it’s all about letting go of what other people think of you, what you think other people think of you, and instead of trying to live up to other people’s expectations, just live life on your own terms. And it seems so tride and so hawky, and yet presented the way he presents it, it’s just fantastic, I love the book.

Steve: Okay, I’ll definitely have to check that one out. I haven’t actually heard of any of the three books that you mentioned. So it’s actually– yeah it’s good for me. Yeah you know usually people talk about The Lean Start Up, or The 4 Hour work Week, and it’s kind of refreshing to hear three fresh new books.

JD: Yeah, I think Mastery is probably the most obscure of those and the Magic of Thinking Big is the least obscure that was a huge best seller.

Steve: Cool.

JD: You’ll find copies in any like thrift store.

Steve: So J.D. you know we’ve been talking for quite a while. You know if anyone wants to get a hold of you, where can they find you?

JD: Well my personal site right now is Jdroth.com. The blog is called Folded Space. And I have been writing a lot about overcoming fear, finding happiness, pursuing freedom. And more and more I’m prepping for my big project in 2015, which is going to be travelling around the United States and interviewing people about their lives and talking about their personal finance stories too. And so I’m kind of in transition phase there, and The Get Rich Slowly course, the year-long Get Rich Slowly Course lives at Moneytoolbox.com.

Steve: Okay. You know travelling around the US sounds like something Chris Guillebeau would do.

JD: Yes-yes-yes, but Chris is– you and I talked before the show about how I used to be a very strong introvert, and Chris is very much that. And he does travel around and he does meet people, but I think it’s tough, I think it takes a toll on him. And for me I’m going to be intentionally an extrovert and my goal is to get out there and meet as many people as possible. And to listen to what they have to say about their life experience, what have they found about purpose and passion and happiness, and probably about personal finance too.

Steve: That sounds like a really cool project. I will have to link that up too once you get the website up for that.

JD: Yeah. It’s a few months away, but it’s definitely in the works.

Steve: Okay, anyway J.D. thanks for coming on the show, a real pleasure talking to you today.

JD: It was great Steve, thanks so much.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have been a huge fan of J.D. Roth for as long as I can remember. And to be honest I’m still kind of giddy that I got to interview the grandfather of personal finance blogging.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode56. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support this show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

Pai Gow Poker And My Own Personal Formula For Financial Success

$
0
0

If you ever go with me to the casino, you’ll often find me playing cards at the Pai Gow poker table. Now Pai Gow is definitely NOT the sexiest game at the casino, nor is it one that draws a huge crowd.

But those who appreciate Pai Gow love the game for its simplicity, its longevity and its potential for a large payout.

In fact, I love the game so much that I’ve pretty much modeled my entire entrepreneurial career based on a simple card game. Here’s what I mean.

How Does Pai Gow Work

Pai Gow

Below is a quick 1 paragraph description of how the game works. You and the dealer are dealt 7 cards. And with these 7 cards, you create 2 poker hands, a 2 card hand and a 5 card hand. Both of your hands then go up directly against the dealer’s 2 hands.

If you win both poker hands, you win the bet. If you lose both, you lose. And if you win one and lose one, you tie and no money changes hands.

Here’s the thing. More than half the time, you end up tying with the dealer and you get to keep your money.

Sounds pretty boring right? How can Pai Gow possibly be fun if you’re pushing with the dealer more than half the time? How the heck can you make real money playing such a slow game?

The Secret To Pai Gow

The secret to Pai Gow lies with the fortune side bet. Whenever you play a hand of Pai Gow, you are offered the chance to put some additional money in a side pot that pays out like a slot machine depending on what hands you’re dealt in the regular game.

For example if you happen to get a straight flush, you win a large sum of money. Even hands as low as 3 of a kind still pay out a decent multiple of your bet. And as if that weren’t enough, you can still win even if a “different player” at the table gets a good hand as well.

Therefore, even though you might be tying the dealer more than half the time and not making any money on the regular game, you always have the chance for a huge payout.

How Pai Gow Applies To Real Life

Pai Gow Quit

Remember when I said that the regular game of Pai Gow is boring as hell? Well it turns out that Pai Gow is an excellent analogy for your day job.

A regular day job is great for paying the bills and making ends meet but you will NEVER ever make life changing money by working for someone else. Even if you were to go above and beyond and make your company a lot of money, your potential upside is capped by your steady salary.

On the other hand, the fortune side bet is where it’s at. By placing a small side bet on the table, you have the potential to make a thousand times the money you would make otherwise. But the catch is that you have to pay to play.

In real life, your fortune side bet is starting your own business. You might not win on your first try but the longer you play, the more likely you will succeed.

One of the reasons I love the regular game of Pai Gow is because I can go to the casino and play all night without losing all my money. And my ability to last a long time gives me some runway and a chance to hit the jackpot!

A More Conservative Approach To Entrepreneurship

One of the questions I most often get asked is whether you should quit your job cold turkey to pursue your business full time.

And I almost always reply hell no!

Ideally, you should keep your day job until you’ve had a chance to fully validate your business idea BEFORE taking the plunge.

After all, running a business is hard and you definitely don’t want financial stress to cloud your judgement.

Even though you might hate your day job and you can’t stand your boss, think of your day job as a means to an end.

Use your salary to buy you some extra time until you can find that special idea. Stick with something steady until your side project gets off of its feet.

Overall, there are no guarantees with any business. But one thing is for sure. The more time you have to validate your business idea, the more likely that you will eventually succeed.

The best and safest entrepreneurial strategies involve creating a safety net and having the freedom to take small calculated risks.

The Truth About Entrepreneurship

Here’s what’s ironic about entrepreneurship. At this point, I’ve interviewed well over 50 successful entrepreneurs on my podcast and not a single one of them has ever struck me as a big time risk taker.

And I don’t know if the media is to blame but there seems to be this crazy myth that successful entrepreneurs like to take wild gambles. But nothing could be further from the truth.

Almost everyone that I’ve interviewed so far has taken a methodical and conservative approach to starting their businesses. And to put it succinctly, here’s what they do…

They take small calculated risks. They don’t bet the farm and they iterate on their mistakes.

When my wife and I first started, we both worked our full time jobs while crafting our ecommerce store on the side and here were the scenarios that played out in our heads.

Worse case scenario? Our business flops and we both continue to work at our day jobs.

Medium case scenario? My wife works full time on the business while my day job supports the family.

Best case scenario? Our online store takes off big time and we sip margaritas on the beach for the rest of our lives.

Obviously the best case scenario has yet to happen but we’re doing pretty well and make much more money than we can spend.

The key point here is that starting a business doesn’t have to be scary. If you are going to take a gamble, then make sure you have a backup plan. If you decide to play Pai Gow poker, make sure that you always place some money on the fortune side bet and someday you will see a payout.


MWQHJ 057: How Emmanuel Used Influencer Marketing To Make 65K in 4 Months Selling Satin Lined Caps

$
0
0

Emmanuel Eleyae

Today’s interview is with my friend Emmanuel Eleyae, who runs SatinLinedCaps.com along with several members of his family.

What I find interesting about Emmanuel’s story is that he tried a bunch of different marketing tactics early on with his online store and they all failed. And then he tried influencer marketing using You Tube and hit the jackpot.

In this interview, you’ll learn how Emmanuel found famous You Tubers to promote his products and the services he uses to continually market his satin lined caps.

You also learn what it takes to create your own textile based product from complete scratch. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Emmanuel runs his company with members of his family who live all across the globe
  • How and where to source textile products within the US
  • Why Emmanuel decided to go with influencer marketing to promote his online store
  • How to find contract manufacturers to produce your products
  • How much Emmanuel invested to start this business
  • Where Emmanuel found the materials to produce his products
  • How to manage quality control
  • How and where to find influencers to promote your products
  • Why Emmanuel chose YouTube for marketing
  • The different types of YouTube ad formats that influencers can use to promote your products

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Emmanuel Elea with me on the podcast today. Now Emmanuel is someone who I ran into virtually on the ecommerce fuel forums and after hearing his back story I knew I wanted to have him on the show. Now Emmanuel and his sister sell satin lined caps, which are caps worn to protect hair from harsh conditions and extreme weather, and I was just chatting with Emmanuel before the interview before I hit record and it turns out to be a family business which I find very cool.

Now here’s the thing while their product is completely unique, it’s actually hard for them to market effectively because to the uneducated buyer these caps are just another article of clothing and as a result Emmanuel had a very hard time marketing his caps early on until he struck gold with a marketing medium that I’ve actually yet to try with my store and I’m eager to try after talking to him. And with that intro welcome to the show Emmanuel, how are you doing today man?

Emmanuel: I’m doing great. Good to be here.

Steve: Yeah so give us the background story and tell us about how satinlinecaps.com came to being, how you hooked up with and decide to make this into a family business with your sister.

Emmanuel: Sure absolutely, so about a year ago a year and a half ago, we took a read of “The Lean Start Up,” and I was working at Amazon performing at the time line performance when I was there. My sister actually we read it and we actually talked– she had an idea, she was in school for fashion at the time making clothes. So she had a problem that she had and she created a product, a satin line cap to help her you know because all the stuff in the market you know satin bonnet or other silk wraps and things like that and she kind of make it look like Angel Mimer walking around the house.

She wanted to be fashionable so she came up with the idea said hey she came to me a little while ago, about a year ago and said I have this idea, what do you think? I said well Lean Start Up stuff we’ve been reading ask 30 people what they think and everyone she talked to gave great reviews and they really loved it. And so I all right looks like we’re on to something, we put on Etsy, initially got some traction, got to about selling one or two a day and I said all right I think we’re on to something here. So I actually quit my job and my fiancé quit her job, and we decided to do it full time.

Steve: So you quit your job before it started making significant money?

Emmanuel: Yes it was kind of a…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Emmanuel: Leap of faith but at the same time I was a little bit ready, I was in the [Inaudible] [00:04:01] world and I had done that three years. I was in the military before Amazon and I have always wanted to do something entrepreneurial and here we were with a product where 30 different people spoke highly of it. So we were like why don’t we test it out, we ran 1000 units repeat to kind of test it out and it started going, so it was like I think this is time.

Steve: So let’s discuss the validation process here a little bit. So you mentioned you sold on Etsy and you asked 30 friends. Is there anything else that you did to just kind of give yourself the courage to take that leap of faith?

Emmanuel: Really it was– she asked her friends and then also I went around asking. So there were folks that I knew and some other ladies that I’ve been talking to kind of make it people that don’t know her potentially. And so every time I started talking to them they were like yeah I’ll take it, and I also asked would you pay for it? You know which was the big question and they all said yes, a resounding yes.

And they would describe to me the problem because I really don’t have hair, I’m bald and I know you can’t see me, but I don’t fully understand all that goes into hair care. They started to explain to me the concept and once I knew the people I was talking to were able to speak to me about what my product does, it was like okay I think we’re on to something here and that was enough for me.

Steve: Okay and then what’s kind of cool about your business is it’s a family business and it kind of spans all across the globe. So how did you kind of get all your family members on board and how does the interaction work since everyone lives in a different place?

Emmanuel: Sure it does get challenging, there’ll get challenge in time out of miscommunication at times but we do focus heavily on you know weekly meetings just to get everybody circle back in. We do Skype calls and a lot of phone calls. I’ve got my dad in Nigeria who helps to sell, and we have some relatives there. My sister is in Chicago right now going to school for journalism. I’ve got another sister and my mom down in Southern California who do the finance and some of the marketing, and me and my fiancé here we run the warehouse and do the operations. So we’re all over the place and we just focus on regular communication.

Steve: That’s cool, so I actually run a class as you know and a lot of my students are kind of interested in creating articles of clothing. So I’m a little curious how did you get your caps designed and manufactured, and can we just kind of go through that process?

Emmanuel: Sure we can and this is where my sister did the lion share. She did it all with help from my other sister and my mom, but she kind of was going through school and taking classes on making clothes, probably through January through the spring of last year. So she studied patterns and you know came up with the idea for the cap and it became challenging at that point– how do I scale? So she started looking around and researched contract manufacturers. At one point we were thinking of going with American Apparel which I didn’t even know they offered you know time on their machines to run stuff for you.

But we were actually able to find three or four manufacturers and through just the sampling process she would send them cut sheets and different specs for them to design out. They would send her back a sample, and the one that looked the best was the factory that we worked with down in Los Angeles [inaudible 00:07:12] factory. And it looked the best and they did a good job, so that’s where we chose to do our limited running and we’ve been using them ever since.

Steve: So how did you actually find these contract manufacturers?

Emmanuel: I think she pretty much stayed online. She went through online I remember she pinned a couple of times and there were a couple of websites– I have to get it for you– that kind of…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Have a breakdown of here’s you know people who do manufacturing for this and some people who do manufacturing for that and I think Thomas Ned does some stuff like that try to aggregate a lot of different manufacturer’s state site.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the design it was completely done by your sister?

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: So you didn’t have to hire anyone to do that?

Emmanuel: Yeah, so it’s actually one of those like things in the story that always intrigue me that she went back to school to learn how to make clothes, and she took about three or four classes and she learned just enough to solve the problem that she had and she was done with school. So she was in the right class that taught her how to work with fabric, cut fabric, build sheets and specs, and different things and once she felt comfortable we went forward.

Steve: Okay and at any point did you actually consider doing any of the manufacturing overseas or were you planning on doing it in the US the whole time?

Emmanuel: And we have and that’s where I have been kind of reading your blog to figure out how really it’s all kind of happened so quickly because…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: As I said we launched the business since September 1st so we’re only about five months old or six months old or so. And it’s just a matter of time now just researching and figuring out who to go with. I’ve heard enough horror stories that it should be approached with caution.

Steve: Just for the sake of the listeners, one of the reasons why I had Emmanuel on is because he had– he actually had really explosive growth early on in the first couple of months of his business. I actually don’t remember the numbers Emmanuel, would you mind sharing what your first like two months numbers were in terms of your caps.

Emmanuel: Sure, it’s actually a funny story because I remember in September– September through October we were selling on Etsy and we were getting one to three a day, and it really wasn’t moving. So I set a goal you know let’s get to five slaps a day you know and then we hit this YouTube thing like I mentioned earlier. We took off, we were selling over 100 a day, so in about two and a half months we sold about $60,000 worth of product, completely emptied out our inventory for our MVP, and had 350 back orders before we could even get more inventory ready.

Steve: That’s awesome. Yeah so more on the manufacturing side, so you’re getting stuff I guess you mentioned in LA. How does the pricing differ between manufacturing in the US versus overseas, and is there a huge price discrepancy?

Emmanuel: Absolute– I’m still not entirely sure of that, I can tell you things I’ve heard like we were able to speak to a contact we made like a target in some other place and they gave us kind of upscale where they would make catch for about two to four dollars. That’s making 500,000 in a year– we’re making right now probably about eight to ten dollars a piece so…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: A little bit more– quite a bit more but to be able to say the word made in America and have turnaround time in four weeks is pretty beneficial to us.

Steve: Yeah and then how has quality control been?

Emmanuel: It’s challenging in terms of us not being able to go in while it’s being made and that’s mainly because we’re not actually physically in LA, none of us are there. I think they’d allow it if we wanted to. But in terms of the quality we haven’t had any issues with quality. Mainly the issues would come from our limited experience in design like Grace did go to school and she’s learned, but we’re still trying to figure out how a label should be applied you know and making sure that we communicate that well to them, you know the little minutia details. How the stitches should be applied and little things like that.

We had one design challenge that we had in our last run where they’d given us feedback that the way we made the label actually adds two weeks to the time to make a slap or for setting that cap which we didn’t know. So we tried to change it by adding a fold but that didn’t really work because then they weren’t able to sell it a certain way, so there was actually a little bit of a lip on the label, it wasn’t sewn down with the fold. So it actually as you pull off the slap it might catch on your hair a little bit sometimes. So some of those– that was more our fault and I talked to them, I was like hey what’s going on, and they said hey that’s what you guys made.

We’ve gone back replaced those units and now we’re going with a different label maker who can actually give us the folds that we need. But you know those little learnings I think, working with a manufacturer who works with small business and that was what we stated. So they work with small business, doing limited batches, giving the flexibility to make those kind of changes and correct them.

Steve: What was the minimum run that one of these manufacturers demanded?

Emmanuel: So for us it was 1000 units.

Steve: 1000 units okay. All right it’s not too much.

Emmanuel: No, not bad at all.

Steve: And in terms of just working with them in terms of fixing things, so would they just make a sample and then you would comment on it, and then they would redo another one?

Emmanuel: Absolutely.

Steve: Or, okay.

Emmanuel: We did have to…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Provide the materials though, so that’s one thing they didn’t provide.

Steve: Okay and where did you shop for materials?

Emmanuel: So we went– at first we started– this is not an interesting story. We just went to the garment district and we picked them up almost retail you know it’s– they call them [inaudible 00:12:40] and I’ve learned all this myself the hard way but these [inaudible 00:12:44] you go down there and you pick some material off the show and you just take it right down to the manufacturer and they’ll produce a sample for you. Where that became interesting is that’s how we did it the first time.

We sold all our units and didn’t really have exactly what the skew was, what the color was color was, color matching the exact materials and when we went back to produce a round of 5000 units, it was almost completely different colors for the same color we’d chosen if that makes sense. Because the way they work is you take the overruns from larger manufacturers and just whatever is there happens to be there. So there are some colors we couldn’t even find anymore in that district. So we had to go through an actually get a textile wholesaler who is also in LA, Synergy Textiles and now we’re far more standardized with our colors, our patterns, our materials.

Steve: And, how many different styles did you launch with? I was just curious.

Emmanuel: We launched with five colors.

Steve: Five? Okay.

Emmanuel: Yeah just to keep it simple. Now I think we’re up to 11and we’re getting ready to produce four or five more colors and probably three or four more sizes as well, because there was a lot of feedback we got was you know I love the cap, but it’s just too tight or it’s just too big.

Steve: Actually that’s another question I had, how do you determine how many of each size to produce?

Emmanuel: I’m learning that now. In fact I’m in schedule to go through that this weekend talk through and my sister is actually going to design now in different sizes and we’re going to try again like we did before and just talk to some folks who have different head sizes and see how comfortable it fits. So that that way we try going through and finding sizing guides– I know they’re out there somewhere. I just haven’t been able to find them like with the general public wears what sizes, the average size for head size and things like that which she did a little bit to get the initial one, because it was one size fits all. So now as we get more and more gradual it’s harder and harder to find that information, so if you’re aware of any or if anybody knows I’d love to get some help on that.

Steve: Yeah I mean it’s a good question because your product is a little more complex and it actually needs to fit very well, right? It’s not like a t-shirt or something else along those lines so…

Emmanuel: For many reasons because I mean you’re sleeping with the cap, so you’re going to be wearing it for an extended period of time, so it needs to be comfortable.

Steve: Yeah is there any way– have you looked into making it adjustable, I don’t know if that’s possible but…

Emmanuel: Yeah that’s, you’re getting fancy there sir, but absolutely that would be the ideal for us. So after we get this run done and we’re getting stocked up again, meet these challenges that’s one that’s on our road map to try and work through that would be the ideal, if we could just make it something that’s tied off or stable, we can go back to having less skews because from the operation side the last thing I want is just an explosion of skews to hold here at the warehouse and to track forecasting for it to make and different things like that.

Steve: Absolutely, so any lessons learnt that you care to share with the listeners about just about the whole manufacturing process?

Emmanuel: Yeah, so give yourself enough time, that’s the biggest thing because we kind of ran into a situation. We had plenty of time in our initial run and everything was great and was sitting in a warehouse, but once it sold out we were sitting there with no inventory and orders coming in, and it was tough to get the manufacturer to work at the pace that we needed. So in those cases I don’t know if it’s give yourself enough time or is it a matter of optimism– gauging optimism and forecasting. If we had more inventory– but again we would’ve had to have known.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: So it’s kind of a fringy thing, but for sure give yourself time. It makes it much easier if you show up– like this inventory run we’re doing now, we already have inventory, so we’re going to have to invest a little bit more, and we’re going to make another run early enough, so that we can do the sampling. Now so for our labels we’re going to actually– if we’re changing anything to any piece, we’re going to send it to the manufacturer so he can make it at his scale, at his– in his way and then send it back to us.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: We’re starting this early we wouldn’t have the ability to do that unlike our hurry up run, it was early, here is the materials and go.

Steve: Sure. Yeah no I mean I think that happens to everybody, like we actually run out of inventory this winter because– and we’ve been running for multiple years because we started selling at Amazon and we just couldn’t keep up with the demand there, so I mean it’s really hard to predict.

Emmanuel: Yeah. But at least giving yourself enough time allows you like we talked about that label issue we had.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: If we had the ability to at least maybe if we don’t have time, just make enough time for that part. So that way you can see if you made a change, make sure they make it the way you want because just looking at it we would’ve caught that issue with the label.

Steve: Right.

Emmanuel: So even if we rushed– I think that would be the advice I give is always give yourself enough time for sampling.

Steve: And in terms of just like a minimum investment to create an article of clothing, how much would you recommend?

Emmanuel: So we started– I had some money saved up. Our entire business started with $10,000.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So with that we were able to get the initial run of inventory, get a developer– not a developer, a designer to make our website which is a whole another topic, lesson learned there. And also get the Etsy store set up, get the little mix and match like a printer little warehouse signed up for several such services like stamps.com and things like that.

Steve: Sure. Okay so let’s talk about some of the other issues with your business regarding marketing your products. So what were some of the other challenges that you faced when you first launched?

Emmanuel: I will tell you they can all probably be wrapped up in one big one, it’s probably just inexperience.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: We just didn’t know what we didn’t know, but to be more specific things like ads– that’s a whole world into itself and there’s ads everywhere. There’s Google ads, there Etsy ads, Facebook, Twitter, all the different kinds of ads that can be done and we just really didn’t know. So we tried and we experimented, we run Etsy ads, and we didn’t see much alloy from that, so we ended up cutting that off about two three months in. We run Google ads and I’m not sure if we had the right strategy with that because it might have worked it might not, but the other thing was the piece of analytics and we run Google analytics. So even when we had the big run up where we were selling over 100 units a day, we weren’t even sure where our customers were coming from and so…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Analytics, the ads, the different things that we can do, social media, we were trying it all.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And we weren’t really tracking it well which we kind of rectified it a little bit now using– being very disappointed with the track of our links and Google analytics set up and some other things.

Steve: So I’m just curious since you sell caps like what keywords did you bid on with some of the clasper click tools, and was it hard to kind of differentiate your product when you were bidding on search terms?

Emmanuel: So for us it wasn’t that difficult because in terms of the satin lined cap, there aren’t many out there and in fact most of them are called satin bonnets or sleep caps, so they’re…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Pretty niched kind of words, but the other problem with that is that there wasn’t much search traffic for it. So it was kind of a chicken or egg thing you know do we go with what we want and then not get the traffic, or do we go with one of these high level terms that get traffic but really doesn’t fit for us.

So those were a lot of the words that we used satin lining sleep cap, we’ve moved on now to trying other things that are broader as we’ve defined, because we actually did do surveys to get feedback from our customers on what they like about it. So now we’ve moved into more hair care type terms. So things that they say they liked about it is that it minimized dried hair, I don’t have to deal with it in the morning, my tangled hair, frizzy hair. It prevents a lot of these problems, so now we’re using more of those key words for our ads.

Steve: I see that’s actually a very interesting point that you just brought up. So people aren’t searching for satin lined caps per se in volume, but they are searching for ways to improve their hair which kinds of just opens up a huge market right there.

Emmanuel: Exactly.

Steve: Right. Okay.

Emmanuel: That’s probably been our biggest learning over this, it’s just the messaging and the positioning of the cap because we started out trying to set up a satin cap that is fashionable which there’s a very small segment of population that actually knows what a satin cap does for your hair and protects your hair. So we were broadening it out, so the education aspect of it. And then the words that we use and the education that we were doing kind of had to fit in with what they used it for, not necessarily the fact that they had one.

So that market– we could go out to that market, but we’re going to have a bigger market, so we needed to go after the problem that this generic satin or silk solves, which is the dry hair or the hair frizzy hair, keeping moisture in your hair, protecting you from the cotton pillow case. And so once we started going after the problem it solved versus you know the product itself, yeah it made things a lot easier to pick keywords that are much higher and terms to search from.

Steve: And you can probably end up charging more too because I know– I’m sure there’s a lot of people out there who would be willing to pay a lot of money to have healthy hair.

Emmanuel: Exactly.

Steve: As opposed to just another fashion item.

Emmanuel: And that was one of the biggest things we learnt and the feedback we got from our customers themselves. You know when we are selling to people who already bought a satin cap are competing with very low cost solutions out there, you know a durag which is not a very expensive product and our price point is much higher than a durag. However, the solution we are offering is not a durag, it’s not a satin bonnet, it’s also fashionable cap to that market.

And then to folks that don’t even know about the satin it’s kind of fashion as a given, it needs to look good, I don’t want it to look like a satin bonnet otherwise I’ve corrupted satin bonnet. And so now I get the benefits of healthy hair, wear a fashionable cap and really a lot of the messaging we’re starting to build in now is kind of things we are learning is you know when we go pay $120 to get a nice haircut or blowout or something at the salon, it may last you two or three days. But if you sleep with the satin lined cap you’ll double or triple that investment. It will last a week or more of that hair style that you put in.

So that messaging you know now all of a sudden if I spend $120 now lasts twice as long that’s 2o, 40 bucks. If you can actually do that math it’s like an investment of $30 in a slap isn’t that much. And I can do this over and over again for months, and that’s a drop in the bucket compared to the benefit of the bucks.

Steve: So let’s talk about that message. So how did you actually end up finding the medium to get the message out about your products?

Emmanuel: The medium– so for us it was YouTube.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: YouTube has been the biggest benefit for us and not even like ads on YouTube; it was pretty much getting sponsored videos. So like I said I don’t have much hair, I’m not really big into the hair care space. So it was really– the next thing was well can I find people who look like that. And then add in can I find people who have hair, who have this problem and also have their own audience who they engage with visually. YouTube was the perfect platform for that. and I wish I could say that I planned it that way, but it was one of you know 20 different things we are trying and it took off.

And we had several YouTubers reach out to– not reach out but we reached out to them and they agreed to wear it. They talked about how the slack has become a staple in their routine. You know it went beyond just a satin bonnet or durag or a cap and it became this is what I used to keep my hair from freezing and tangling, and I use it in my routine every four days. You know when I wash my hair this is what I wear afterwards. You know they made it very clear how that someone who has never even heard of this or even seen one, could engage with and use it to solve a problem that they have.

Steve: So can you kind of go into depth about the process, like how did you find the people to reach out to and then what did your initial contact look like and how did you get them to actually endorse your product?

Emmanuel: Sure and that’s– there is two different ways we did it. Now the first one I’ll go into is just the manual time consuming kind of we went door to door basically. So went on YouTube, we found personalities we thought would fit great with our brand, fit great with the product that we were looking for and would get into the healthy lifestyle. And then we just went to the about section and then just click send them a message. But before we did that we actually crafted an email. So the email itself we had had in there who we were, what we are doing, how excited we were about this opportunity for their viewers– we tried to close it on their viewers. Viewers would like this product. We think it will be a good fit.

And then we actually created our own YouTube video where was my sister basically saying you know I love your brand, thank you for even being interested or taking the time within this video. I would love to partner with you in solving this problem for you and your viewers. So we hit the send message, sent it to all of them. We did it for 32 when we initially launched on September. We didn’t hear anything back for almost two months, like it took a while. And then we only heard back from about three of them. And one of them actually was the only one who said yes he admired us and we want now to give it a shot.

And she was the one that really built our business because she had a subscriber base of about 250,000 subscribers. Put in the video and was very passionate about. She in fact I’ve just got an email from her the other day. She still uses the product. She really liked it. And that came through in the video.

Steve: So you sent out 30, 10% responded and maybe just– you had a 3% hit ratio on someone who actually create the video to endorse the product. What was in it for the YouTube person?

Emmanuel: So in that respect, in that instance there was nothing upfront.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: You know we initially later on we did provide a donation just hear please continue doing what you are doing, like you are doing a great job and the message you have resonates. So we brought her a donation later. But really there was nothing in it for her except the love of the product which…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: That is why it was so successful. There were other You Tubers. There was one other– I’m sorry I missed that that actually did reply about three months later. They got us ready for December, she would you know agreed to include us in her December favorites video. Now that one was up front, she is very upfront about it. You know I have a slot open if you want it just 500 bucks. So sure…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And at that point we had seen the result of the first one, so $500 wasn’t much of an issue at all, so yes please do it. And sure enough we had– I think we are getting a 10X ROI on each of those videos.

Steve: Yeah actually can we comment on what happened after that first video once it went live?

Emmanuel: Sure after that first video I think we generated about– we sold about 40 or 50 a day after the very first video. She had– and when I say the first video she did two first. So the first YouTube…

Steve: Oh wow, okay.

Emmanuel: She did the second video. We actually were over 100 a day. And within in less than a week we had sold out all of our inventory. And then the December video and it gets kind of muddy, I can’t really tribute exactly how. But I know with all the YouTube page stuff that we did, we were also tried to work with FameBid and you know they’re like 1,200 bucks. One made $24,000 that month.

Steve: So how does it work? Do you give them some sort of special tracking link or a coupon code, like how do you track these sales?

Emmanuel: And that goes back to the lessons learnt about the tracking. At the time I didn’t track anything at all.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So now we are starting to do that. For every video that gets made, they get their own specific tracking link so we can see exactly which traffic came from YouTube, from that You Tuber and from that video.

Steve: And there is really no way for someone to actually click on something, right? They actually have to type in the URL on their browser. Is that right?

Emmanuel: For the YouTube video?

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: No they– in the comments box, they can actually have the link and so they can put now here is what this video is about, here is a transcript and then here is a link to all the products in this video.

Steve: I see.

Emmanuel: What we did see was there was a lot of direct in Google analytics. A lot came from direct during that month. So I’m thinking what happened is they watched it and then a few days later remembered the satin lined cap thing and we have a lot of our search– the highest keyword search where they would get us from the terms satin lined cap.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So my guess is they saw it, they thought about it then came back and bought.

Steve: And how do you actually reach out– I haven’t done this before so how do you actually reach out to a random YouTube person? There is a contact button you say on the…

Emmanuel: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: If you watch the video or if you go to their channel– not the actual video, the channel there is an about section. And so they’ll have– I think it has a little like send me a message button or sometimes what a lot of them will have if you get into the YouTubers who have 20, 50,000 subscribers. They’ll let you have their business inquiries email here. They will work with a multi channel network.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: I’ve run into a lot of those which were agencies, which those can be pretty hostile because you’d rather pay the YouTube fee and also the agency fee as well which can be pretty high.

Steve: So you mentioned that it took several months for one of these people to respond. So and I understand this is actually a large part of your strategy today. So how do you kind of streamline the process so that you are constantly getting mentions?

Emmanuel: Sure and that was another one we would get– we heard from a friend of ours you know that there was a site called FameBid. And so that was one thing we started doing in November kind of low key. That’s where that extra you know 6, 700 bucks came from is we just put out basically your own the website. You put out a campaign saying we are a brand looking for YouTube personalities. And so they put that out, they have a network of about 6,000 personalities they work with, and people bid on your proposal. They send you proposals. So a lot of them came in 90, $100.

They’re pretty clear that you know they’re people just kind of up and coming if you have that low bit of amount you can bid. You just send a proposal off from 100 to 250, 250 all the way up over $1,000. So I just said ours are very small just $100 to $250, and I got folks who had you know 10,000 subscribers, 5,000 subscribers. But either way their bids were low 90 bucks, 50 bucks and they would produce videos. So that’s where we had eight of them produced for us. And so at the same time that the lady who was doing the December favorites video that had charged us 500, they were coming out at the same time. So that’s kind of what made it muddy.

Well fast forward to January I kind of wanted to re-engage that and go very aggressive with it. So actually when we found out that they have what’s called a brand VIP program where they will actually assign you an account manager who does all that leg work for you.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So now it’s incredible and I’m kind of my goal is to just set a budget of $5,000 every month, talk to other cap manager, and then they go out there and with that budget I think with this budget– just going around she was able to find 11 different YouTubers and really there was very little input from us. She was giving a track of the links and she will give us the videos when they are– she will give us the names of the YouTubers for us to approve, then they will give us the videos when they are ready for us to approve and then they go out.

Steve: So I had a question about how you kind of decide which YouTuber will actually provide an ROI for you. Like do you actually screen their videos and do you get an idea of how many people actually view their video once it actually goes live, like what’s the process?

Emmanuel: Sure and that’s– part of that whole learning that we did was trying to guess. So we had the initial getting the list of 32. And that was really just my sister who created the product and my other sister is dead. The lady is in the business actually looked at who would this work best for and who can spread it best, and so we just get feel an intuition. And then from that we actually use that same kind of gut feeling intuition for the proposals that came in, because when we put out a proposal we got like 40 something YouTubers that came back, and they all put it in there what they can do for us. And there are six different types of videos you can make.

And we just tried a whole bunch of different types, we had favorites videos going out, we had [hall] videos, we had tutorial videos. From that after having about nine or ten of them done, and of course seeing the most successful one that we had, it was a routine.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: The videos that work best for us are the ones where someone was saying not, “Hey look what I bought, this is great,” or someone sent this to me. It was someone saying, here is the problem with my head, this product solves that problem phenomenally and I’m going to show you how I use it so that you can you them the same way– a tutorial video.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: That worked extremely well for us. So now all our videos that we are having made are just that.

Steve: So when these YouTubers make these videos, is your product the only product that’s mentioned?

Emmanuel: Not always.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And if you use something like FameBid you can specify that, like so to take away the FameBid the two videos we had downloaded two personalities. One was a December favorites videos where other products were being mentioned. Actually both of them were. In fact in the original YouTuber she also had other products she basically called it her nightly hair care routine. So at first it kind of seemed like we don’t want to be mentioned with others, but we also had the competing idea that you know we don’t want to have a video just about ours because it would be obviously a sponsored video.

Steve: I see.

Emmanuel: Unless we do a good job. So we kind of wanted to work it in. So it actually worked out well. And so when they had the December favorites where it was just here is a lot of different products, it didn’t do as well as the one that said here’s the products with specific pinpoint.

Steve: Got it.

Emmanuel: So if we had three or four shampoos and different things, and then our SLAP as part of that, and so people were going to buy all of them.

Steve: So what are the six types of videos?

Emmanuel: If I remember correctly there is the [inaudible] [00:34:38] there is the…

Steve: What’s that first one?

Emmanuel: A [inaudible] [00:34:40] is just you know they went shopping and they brought a whole bunch of stuff backward then.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: You know they are opening their bag you know, there is get ready with me videos which is kind of like the routine video I’m describing. There is tutorial videos where you are showing someone how to do something. And if you give me a moment I can actually pull it up.

Steve: Okay, yeah I’m just curious. This is all new to me, so it’s very interesting.

Emmanuel: Okay. Then there is specific like sponsored videos where it’s a video where it’s just you. Just you and your product and that’s it.

Steve: Okay. And are they required to say that it’s a sponsored video?

Emmanuel: I think so, I’m not sure the rules on that, but I think if they bought it themselves they don’t have to say it’s sponsored video, I don’t know. Don’t pull me on that.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: But if it was sent to them I think most of them are pretty good about mentioning, “Hey this was sent to me.”

Steve: Okay. I think that was what four?

Emmanuel: Four, yeah I’m trying to find…

Steve: There is two more.

Emmanuel: Yeah there is two more out there that I’m working on bringing in.

Steve: Actually you can probably just get back to me later on that.

Emmanuel: Sure.

Steve: I’ll just put it in the show notes, so it’s cool. So going forward with your business is this sort of influence to a marketer? Is that you are going to be your primary channel or do you have other things in the works?

Emmanuel: I’m sorry I missed the question but I actually found them.

Steve: Oh you did okay yeah why don’t we– so what were the last two?

Emmanuel: There was the review video, a plug mention, a [whole] video, a look book and that was one I forgot, a favorites video and a tutorial.

Steve: What’s a look book?

Emmanuel: A look book they actually put it on, but we did a few of these as well. They actually put it on and style it, because we are just one cap you know it’s hard to see what will that look like with my outfit. So they’ll do three or four different outfits with the cap on.

Steve: Oh I see. And how much– what’s the cost like depending on the audience? Like how would…

Emmanuel: It depends.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: With the fame of the platform you are able to just put out a proposal, and then they come back to you.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And I can give you kind of relatively I worked with a multi channel agency for a little bit. And for one YouTuber to do one video was $4,000, one on FameBid it was a 1000 for the same YouTube.

Steve: Interesting.

Emmanuel: So just the highlight how huge a difference it is when you work with them directly versus through an agency.

Steve: Okay, so for that $1,000 how many subscribers did they have?

Emmanuel: I think that one was well over 350,000 or 500,000, they had quite a few.

Steve: Oh wow okay. So this is like an alternative to television. And it sounds like it’s just as effective or more effective.

Emmanuel: It’s the equivalent.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: I think it’s– the more I read about it and there is others starting again to us, I’m reading other blogs and things, it truly is. And it’s surprising to see how many people actually sit and watch subscriber channels; it’s almost like sitcom television. Every week they have a regularly scheduled post where they put out a video and then in there, there may be even commercials and things like that.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: People watch that more than they do TV you know who and other things, it’s incredible. We spoke to celebrities in there and what’s nice is their fan bases are very-very targeted.

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: So you find one that fits your brand message, I mean it’s almost a slam dunk where you know even if five– 1% of their population actually goes and buys one, that’s enough to hit your monthly quarter at least for us at this stage.

Steve: Oh yeah for sure. So the other question that I asked you while you were looking things up was what else do you have in the pipeline in terms of marketing your shop besides the influencer marketing?

Emmanuel: Perfect. So we are doing a couple of other things. We learned through that process you know building lists. So we actually– you can believe it, we didn’t even have a email sign up form on our website when we first launched. So we started that and started collecting email address, we got about 2,000. And it’s true what they say about the there is money in the email list because now every two weeks we send out a list an email. And we’re getting probably about a 6% conversion just off of our emails.

Steve: Nice.

Emmanuel: So yeah that’s working really well. So we are really being very robust with that. We are tying it to a blog, we actually putting out more blogs. Our own YouTube videos like tutorials and how to wear it and things like that. Then we then send out through email and put it on to our blog and things like that.

Steve: So what’s worked the best so far, probably email I would guess.

Emmanuel: Absolutely by far email has been the best.

Steve: Okay and oh sorry…

Emmanuel: The main focus of our marketing efforts is along with the email and the blogs we are also in the social media. We are really tracking all that, I mentioned being very disciplined with trackable links and things. And I actually was listening to one of your podcasts, heard about mixed panel. So I probably will be getting that started soon just to kind to get a funnel going. And I’ve gotten some of the little bit more experiential landing pages. So for targeted responses to like ads if we start going that round with ads, have very specific you know this is why you are clicking and here is why you are here on the landing page.

Steve: Just curious what form of social media is working the best for you guys?

Emmanuel: Oddly enough Pinterest.

Steve: It’s not odd, it’s pour best also. Yeah.

Emmanuel: It converts well. We don’t get hardly any traffic from it at all, but it converts really-really well. We get a lot of engagement on engagement front just within the platform from Instagram, a lot from Instagram.

Steve: Interesting.

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And then we also have Facebook which works pretty well just an all around general you know poster, you can get some clicks through. It hasn’t converted hardly at all for us, but we do get click throughs from the site. And then Twitter we just haven’t really done much on that at all.

Steve: Yeah actually Twitter is something I haven’t tried yet either, but from what I’ve heard anecdotally it’s not as effective as the other platforms.

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: Well that’s cool. So you mentioned “The Lean Start Up” as one of the books that kind of influenced you. Were there any other books as well that you kind of recommend that the listeners read?

Emmanuel: Sure, well for every single one of those you know I think I’ve read them all, Lean Start Up, [Inaudible] [00:40:48] now re-brandings coming out and customer development. I have actually been– I used to do a lot of reading books you know kind of game planning and I also love blogs. A lot of blogs running information, Quick Sprout, and things like that to figure out what the social media thing is. And ecommerce field of course I’m on there, there is a lot of clear information, I’m always impressed to see because it’s really niche, right?

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: There is not a lot out there for a specifically independent ecommerce store owners. So they’ve got a lot of niche content there and SEO models, I take a lot and look at a lot of them, and looks at their stuff as well.

Steve: That’s awesome. Well hey Emmanuel we’ve been chatting for a while now and I want to be respectful of your time. If anyone has any questions about influencer marketing or your products, where can they find you?

Emmanuel: Sure they can just reach out to me on my email emmanuel@gracerlayer.com, and I’m always more than willing to help out.

Steve: Cool and I’ll be sure to link that up in the show notes. Emmanuel thanks a lot for coming on the show, I really appreciate your time, and I’m just really excited with what you’ve been able to do with influencer marketing.

Emmanuel: Thank you so much. And if they want to come to the website too it’s Shopslaps.com.

Steve: Awesome, I’ll link that up. Thanks a lot for coming on the show Emmanuel.

Emmanuel: You take care.

Steve: Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode as much as I did. What I like about Emmanuel is that he tried a bunch of different things without success, he didn’t give up, and then he stumbled upon the one marketing technique that vaulted his business to the top.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode57. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

How To Take Eye Popping Product Photos For Your Online Store With Minimal Setup

$
0
0

Having eye popping product photos is probably the most important aspect of your online store website.

After all, if you can’t convey the quality of your product to the end customer, you aren’t going to be making any sales no matter how awesome your product is.

Product Photos

But the problem is that taking professional shots can be extremely challenging if you have no clue what you are doing. And there’s this common misconception that you need expensive equipment or a super nice camera in order to produce high quality photography.

Long story short, taking great product photos is all about the lighting. If you can get the lighting down pat, then you can use any cheapo camera and get great results. But getting your lighting correct is harder than it looks.

The Problem With Using Natural Sunlight

When my wife and I first started out, we took all of our photos in natural sunlight and they turned out pretty well. But the problem was that we wanted all of our photos to use the same background and depending on the color temperature and intensity of the sun on that particular day, the background would look completely different.

If you look at the photo below, both handkerchiefs are taken on the exact same table but the color of the table looks totally different because they were taken during different times of the day.

background

Also because we both worked full time jobs, it was extremely difficult to get home from work and take photos before the sun went down.

The Problem With Using Individual Lights

Eventually, we decided to invest in some lighting equipment and stumbled upon this inexpensive lighting set from LimoStudio. I liked this lighting kit for a few reasons.

One, it was pretty inexpensive. And two, I could use it for creating videos as well.

Here’s a picture of our setup below.

(Note: We actually use 3 lights for our product photography but I couldn’t fit the 3rd light in the photo)

Clunky Setup

Now this setup has served us well for several years but there were many things that my wife and I didn’t like about it.

For one thing, we don’t have enough room in our house for a dedicated photography studio.

As a result every time we need to do a photo shoot, I have to go to the garage, lug around these big lights, move the furniture aside and set everything up. While the setup process only takes 15 minutes, it’s a major pain in the butt.

In fact, I find it so tedious that I dread doing product photography altogether and take all of our new product photos in large batches. As a result, sometimes it can take months for a new product to make it to our website just out of pure laziness.

The other major pain is that I have to wait until the sun goes down in order to take pictures with consistent lighting. After all, if I let the sunlight mix in with the fluorescent lighting, the results become unpredictable. (Note: Almost every room in our house has a window except the garage)

The Best Solution That I’ve Found So Far

Lugging around our big lights didn’t really bother me that much until I discovered the magic of portable light boxes. The light box pictured below is made by SimpQ and measures about about 16in X 16in X 3in. It’s literally the size of a large briefcase and it’s super light!

SimpQ Collapsed

When opened, this little box expands to fully functional light box. Total set up time for me was about 5 minutes which is pretty fast considering that I wasted some time fumbling with the different panels and light diffusers.

SimpQ Open

And what’s really cool is that you can fully enclose your product in the box and completely remove and minimize the shadows in your photos. This particular box comes with a few different panels to allow you to easily take your products from different angles.

DSC_7806

Once you have the box setup the way you want, there’s this little opening where you can stick your camera. And outside of this opening, the product is pretty much bathed in consistent light from a set of fluorescent bulbs within the unit.

SimpQ Taking Pictures

Here’s a picture of what it looks like from the camera’s perspective.

SimpQ Close Up

Before And After Shots

As soon as I got my hands on this light box, I immediately did some comparison photos with my existing 3 light setup.

The first photo below was taken in my living room using my 3 big fluorescent lights. As you can see, there are some light shadows underneath the red hoop and the light blue hoop looks a little dull.

Hoop1without

But with the SimpQ light box, both hoops are evenly lit with very few shadows.

Hoop1with

I know that I’m probably being a little too anal, but not having to worry about shadows is a major plus because I often have to adjust my lights in order to minimize reflections and dark spots in my photos.

But with the light box, every surface is consistently reflective which results in very even light with the same color temperature and intensity.

Conclusion

While the picture quality of my 3 light setup is perfectly fine and acceptable, it’s a major pain in the butt for me to setup. Not only does it require more space but setup also requires a bit of adjustment in order to remove reflections and shadows from my product images.

Ever since I started using this light box, I rarely bust out the big clunky lights any more unless I’m filming a video for my blog.

The product photos for your online store are way too important for you to not invest in some sort of lighting setup. It doesn’t have to be expensive and it doesn’t have to be fancy, but you need to get something.

The box that I used in this post is made by SimpQ and costs only $295 dollars. It folds nicely into a small box the size of a stack of records and you can easily setup and break it down in a matter of minutes.

In fact, I may take this baby along to the next trade show and take product photos directly in my vendor’s booth.

A Special Offer

In fact, I liked this box so much that I reached out to SimpQ and they were nice enough to extend a 5% discount to all MyWifeQuitHerJob.com readers.

To redeem the discount, click on this link and use coupon code: MYWIFEQUITHERJOB to receive 5% off your order.

Note: I am not affiliated with SimpQ in any way and do not receive any compensation for any purchases made. I really love this product and I think it will drastically improve your product photos.

MWQHJ 058: How Steven Essa Makes 6 Figures Giving Killer Online Webinars

$
0
0

Steven Essa

This podcast episode with Steven Essa was one of my favorites because I learned so much about the art of giving effective online webinars. Seriously, this episode was so jam packed with actionable tips that I found myself furiously taking notes during the interview.

In fact, Steven was so engaging that I barely spoke at all and he did most of the talking. He’s got tremendous energy and I know that you’ll get as much out of it as I did. Enjoy!

BTW, you can check out Steven’s websites at StevenEssa.com and X10Effect.com

What You’ll Learn

  • How Steven stumbled upon giving webinars for profit
  • How Robert Kiyosaki influenced Steven to take control of his life
  • The fine art of giving effective online webinars
  • How you should break down your presentation to maintain interest and sell your products
  • Should you give away your best stuff in the webinar?
  • How to get people excited about your information
  • How to do a webinar even if you have no audience or email list
  • How to start creating webinars now even if you don’t have a website
  • How to price your webinars
  • How to sell a product that you haven’t yet created

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I am giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. In this episode I’m going to be talking to Steven Essa. Now the reason why I decided to bring Stephen on the show is because I wanted to interview someone who makes a living with webinars. Now Steven is actually recognized as one of the leaders in the webinars niche, and today he speaks at major online business events, internet marketing events around the world and teaches people how to animate their webinar processes.

Now here is what I like about Steven, he is a hustler. The guy started out with no money at all when he was a heavy metal rocker, then he went through a bunch of jobs deep in the trenches like being telemarketer, a maintenance man, network marketer until he found his calling with webinars. Now personally I actually don’t have a lot of experience with webinars so it will be a real treat to learn from the guy. So with that, welcome to the show Stephen. How are you doing today man?

Essa: Yeah, great Steve. Thanks for having me on man.

Steve: Yeah, great to have you. So give us a quick background story in case people haven’t heard you before, and tell us about your business and how you got started with webinars.

Essa: Yeah, absolutely man. I think, you know, I was always been searching for a way to achieve financial freedom since I read Robert Kiyosaki’s book, “Cashflow Quadrant” in the year 2000 when I was banging my head up against the wall in a job doing telephone sales for a company in Australia here, and at the same time I was in band trying to make it in the music business. I had a dream of one day performing some big shows and all that and he worked very-very hard in the music business for 13 years which taught me a lot of business, taught me a lot of networking and the importance of marketing yourself and all of that stuff.

So we took that as far we could, we ended up in Los Angeles in 2003 to 2005, and they said, you know, it’s the worst time ever for music. So I just got really-really frustrated and said, “Well 13 years and now it’s over?” So it’s like– it wasn’t a very good plan. So I basically said to myself, “I’m going back to Australia where it’s nice and relaxed and it’s not as superficial, not as superficial as Hollywood.” And I basically just started to focus on creating a business and investing in real estate. And I tried to build a website, and I’m not a techy at all, so I think I had one meeting with a guy and that was the end of that business, and then I went into real estate and I started buying property and in 2008 pretty much got wiped out like many people who are highly leveraged.

So I thought– I went back to the Robert Kiyosaki book, I read eight years earlier and he said, “Build a business and invest in real estate.” So I was trying to invest in real estate as a business and I said, “Well I don’t want to go and buy a franchise and spend all this money or rent a store. And I have to basically pay for all that expense and I got no idea how to run a business.” So I looked online because online is cheap, it’s a cheap place to fail. And he said, “Look to fail as many– he said, ‘One in ten businesses makes it, nine out of 10 fails.” So he goes, “That just means you have to try 10 times.” And I thought, “Well I don’t mind trying 10 times if it’s online because most you’ll spend is a couple of grand.” And that’s what I did.

So initially I was working in a real estate job and I looked to help my boss’s business with his internet marketing. And it’s what I always tell people Steve is if you have don’t have a business right now, go and apply these stuff that we’re teaching and that you teach and your other experts teach. Go and apply it to someone’s business because one of my favorite mentors when I was growing up was Bruce Lee. I read in many of his books and he says in his book, “Knowledge is not enough.

We must apply what we know, otherwise it becomes lost.” And I went to internet marketing events and read books and started applying that to my boss’s business because I didn’t have a business. And I helped him make like 106 grand in sales using the presentation techniques I was learning and the copyrighting and all that sort of stuff, and it gave me confidence. I said, “Wow! I can do this for myself. If I can do it for him, I could do it for myself.” So I quit my job in 2008 and I started my own business at that point.

I basically run my first ever webinar, made $594 selling a product that I hadn’t created yet which was teaching churches how to make money, churches, and charities using internet marketing. And from there I made 4 grand, 10 grand, 20 grand, and 100 grand and it’s just sort of grown from there. I said to my mentor, “How good is this, you know, this webinar stuff?” And he said, “You should become the webinar guy.”

And I said, “No one is going to pay me to do webinar and teach him how to do webinars because they are so easy, right?” Who would pay to learn how to do– all you got to do is press record, have a PowerPoint presentation, and start talking. He said, “No, you’ll be surprised.” And eight million dollars later, it’s like– and five years down the track, he was right. It’s like it’s found a niche for me and I became the webinar guy.

Steve: So today you actually go around the world teaching people how to make money with webinars, is that right?

Essa: Yeah, that’s right exactly. We did a world tour. My wife and I– we said, “What’s the ultimate?” We really-really are passionate about helping people achieve financial freedom and achieve– get their message out there. Many, many great experts have great knowledge but they are working one on one in their business or their practice and they don’t have leverage.

So unfortunately they are going to die with their information in them when many people around the world could benefit from that information that they share. They could have a healing modality that no one knows about, that they could help people heal and there is all sorts of people that can cure cancer and do all these sorts of things that are amazing, but they are stuck in their little local town and they are very busy in their business, and they don’t have time to actually implement any of this.

And I teach people to– who is an expert how to leverage but also teaching other people to go these experts and help them set up a webinar business because they can get their information online and out there and they can pay you 50% for doing it. And that’s sort of what I do now– is I have business partners that I just control the backend, control the webinars and I own five companies now that are doing anything from 5 to 50 grand a month. And also we do is teach the expert how to present on a webinar, how to sell and leverage them.

Steve: Okay. You know, we are going to go through that in a lot more depth in today’s interview. I just thought I’d make a couple of comments. So one of the reasons– so I’ve done a couple webinars in my day and one of the reasons I don’t like to do them very often is because I got to prepare a really good presentation and a lot of times it’s one off thing, right? And so what I understand is you actually offer this software that allows replays of the webinars, right? So can you kind of comment on how that works?

Essa: Yeah absolutely. If you’re going to be doing the work you want to leverage it right. So you want to create a webinar presentation, run the webinar live, it forces you to actually do it and record it. And once you’ve recorded it– it’s not just my webinar software, there is many people who have webinar replay softwares out there that will automate your webinar. Mine is just one I created for myself, then customers started wanting it, so I made it available to my members and we sell it online, but basically it just allows to replay your webinar in one of many forms.

You can have it as a video that’s like people can watch the video and then when you say buy now, a buy now button can drop down and they can click on it and buy and that’s how you make money while you sleep. And then there is also scheduled replay webinars which allows them to watch it, but they can’t fast forward or rewind it, so it has a bit of a live field to it. Now when you’re marketing replay webinars to people, don’t say it’s a live webinar if it’s not, because deceiving and I think people these days will– you don’t want to blow your credibility in terms of saying, you know it’s a live webinar when it’s not.

I always tell people if it’s a replay, it’s still a replay but they have to watch it or at the best you just say, “Watch this webinar or watch this webinar online.” And then they know it’s scheduled at a certain time, they’ve got to come and watch it, but to be honest…

Steve: So you actually have to schedule it, even though it’s a replay you still have to schedule time to watch it?

Essa: There is one of three options, that is what I was going to say now. To be honest I just allow people– I have a play anytime option, I just let people watch it anytime. But I removed the control so they can’t fast forward and rewind because a good webinar presentation is a process that people need to go through in order to get into the buying frame. They need to see each section. And when I do, when I help people put together a webinar whether it’s at one of our events where we pick someone out of the crowd and do it from scratch or whether it’s one of my 75 grand clients– I go through the same process.

It’s the same template; our templates that we’ve created, they’ve probably done over $50 million in sales for us and our clients that have used them, so it’s a proven formula. I just have people fill those in and then we present it in 60 minutes or 90 minutes depending on how much content they’ve got and we make an offer at the end. And if they don’t have a product, even better we just create a product on paper and then we sell it and if people buy then you deliver it. It’s just more webinars, something we talked about before, just sell more webinars. Yeah.

Steve: Okay. And so you mentioned that you do these seminars across the world and you actually pick people from the audience and then just create a product from scratch. So what I was hoping to do today in this podcast is pretend that you are talking to me and I want to create some sort of product, but I have nothing. I don’t have an audience; I got nothing, so walk me through the process.

Essa: Yeah. So the first thing is who is the target market? Like what do you– what information…

Steve: Okay. Yes, so my target audience are people who want to create eCommerce stores. But let’s say I have no content, I got nothing. So what would you advise me?

Essa: Yeah. Basically what I’ll do is I want to put together a webinar with you. That’s the first the step, no matter what. Whether someone is in your position or not I’ll just sit there and go, “Okay, first we need to choose on who is the target market, who are the people that we want to target.” We want to choose people who want to create an eCommerce store or they already have an eCommerce store and they want to monetize it more. They are making a million dollars from their eCommerce store. There are people over 60 who have got eCommerce stores, or what is that target market, what can we identify is the common denominator with all of them, out of all of those things I’ve just mentioned or if you can tell me who is the target market.

Steve: Okay. So let’s– just for the sake of this example, lets beginners. Maybe people who want to start a family, so maybe they are in their early 30s; late 20s and they want to spend more time with their child so they want to start a business that they can kind of run from home.

Essa: Okay great excellent. They going to spend less time with their kids if they work from home let me tell you. No, I’m just kidding. Okay, so how to make– and what’s the best– have you actually done this? Have you made money from eCommerce sites?

Steve: Yes. So let’s say I have my own eCommerce site. Actually yeah, I have my own eCommerce site.

Essa: Great, excellent. What’s the best result you’ve got in a month in sales?

Steve: The first year that I launched it, I made six figures.

Essa: Okay, great. So if you could give me an exact figure that would be better because the more exact we are with the titles, the better. So people– instead of saying like how to make a $100,000 a year thanks to eCommerce sites, the headline I’d want is something like, discover how to generate $171,000 in 12 months thanks to eCommerce.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Okay. So that would be title of the webinar. Just grab any title for now, it will do and let’s work now. If haven’t got that result then you say, “Discover how to build a highly profitable eCommerce website in five easy steps.” So we’ve charged in the target market. We could even say something like, ‘Attention Beginners.’ So spend a bit of time on working out who is the target market and come out with that title of the presentation and then we want have– create the introduction of the webinar which is about 10 minutes of content.

Any introduction on a webinar what you want to do is Steve is, number one when people come to your webinar you got to be quick to tell them what’s in it for them. They’ve registered, they’ve come to the webinar, you’ve got a couple of minutes at the beginning to really make them decide whether they’re going to pay attention to the webinar or if it’s a going be a webinar playing in the background like a radio. Because too many people these days they think, “I got 100 people to the webinar.” But you got to get them engaged, it’s not enough to have them there. You’ve done the hard work, now you’ve got to keep them there.

So when the webinar starts, if you use GoToWebinar, there is a lady that says, “Broadcast has started. All attendees are in listen only mode.” Right? As soon as that hits, and you’re sharing your title of your presentations on the screen, you got to get– “Hi, welcome to the webinar. It’s Steven Chou here and today you are going to discover how to make $171,500 in five easy steps building an eCommerce website, okay?

And today I am very excited because I’m going to show you how to retire with this strategy. I’m going to show you if you’ve been wanting to make more money, if you have been– I am going to show why eCommerce websites are the best thing out there since sliced bread and why you should use them and most importantly what to avoid when you’re doing them. Let’s get right into the content here.

So put down any distractions, grab your pens and pad and this an interactive webinar, so make sure you’re taking lots of notes. I’ll be grabbing questions at the end, so let’s get into it.” Then I want to basically put in a slide. Who is this webinar best for? Who is this webinar for? And what I want to do there is I want to touch on all the different demographics that we have there, the different target audiences. This webinar is for you if you’re a husband or wife that you want to work from home to spend time with your kids more. You are looking to replace your income. Ecommerce website is perfect because they are easy, you can do this and na-na-na. It’s perfect for you.

This is for you if you’ve got a product, a small business offline right now, but you want to move online and you’ve got a range of products. This webinar, we’re going to show you how to build an effective eCommerce website. This is going to be perfect for you if you’ve got some products and services already. This is for you if you don’t have any products or services. We show you how to white label stuff, so that if you don’t a product or service you are not sure what to do but you like the concept of eCommerce websites, we are going to show how to be effective with this strategy as well, and also this is for you are blah-blah-blah. So you are trying to– you want everyone on the webinar to say, “Ah, that’s me at one of those or more of those.”

Steve: Okay. And in this period is– you said five to 10 minutes of this?

Essa: Yeah. They still going with the five– we’re still in the first. These are some of the concepts within the first 10 minutes.

Steve: Got it.

Essa: These are things we want to touch on them. And then you want to get into the proof. So any proof– nothing sells like proof. So if you’ve got a screenshot or a bank account statement of you making that money, now black out all your banking details and stuff, just show the figure. All right, this is my bank account guys in 12 months, or this is my financial year review bank. This is 171,000, that’s my website. That’s what I did. Here is the front of the website, this is what it did, okay?

Here is a client of mine, he did– like I’ve got– one of my clients is a vet. He made 300 grand and sold his business in 12 months thanks to webinars, created a website called thewebinarvet.com; people can go and check that out. They can hear his testimonial on YouTube if they don’t believe me, it’s there. Also he made over a million dollars, he sends me an email, I put that he sent me in there. I show people, I’ve got a pilot he made 450,000 pounds thanks to webinars. I’ve made $8,000,000 thanks to webinars. I show my PayPal account somewhere.

But here is a webinar I ran last week. I want people to know that this is current. So I always update my testimonials as often as I can. Hey here is a– like I said to you at the start of the course. I just did 57 grand two weeks ago, last week I run a webinar, made a 100 grand selling 10, $10,000 products last week, right, to a boot camp we’re doing. So the more proof that you have the better, the easier it is to sell. If people don’t have proof Steve, they just got to find the statistics.

So they say something like, look nine out of 10 ecommerce websites don’t make money according to the Bureau of Statistics website, and you quote the source and you say, “Here is why they don’t make money, because they don’t follow the five steps that I’m showing you here, or look at this guys one out of every 10 people who comes to a webinar buys, right, whereas one out of every 100 on a website.” So webinars are much better conversion and you could sell products that are 10 times more higher in price. How do we know? Because we’ve tested this over and over again. This outs our research or other people’s research, quote the source.

And I look at that first introduction Steve like a lawyer, you know, when you watch your lawyer closing a case, he goes to the jury, and he or she says, “All right, here is the case. Here is the story. Here is the precedence that have been set before, here is the proof that we have that we’ve put forward to you; the gun had the fingerprints, the DNA, the blah-blah-blah.” My wife and I watch all these crime shows. So it’s basically putting that case forward and adding that credibility in the first 10 minutes. And as well as you can tell your story in there as well, but don’t do what everyone else does and go, “Yeah, my story is I left school and then I did this and then I did a white law thing.”

Make sure your story relates back to the audience. So I always say something like, you know, I failed school and I told people I failed school because I want people to think you don’t have to be smart to do webinars, right, because it’s true. You don’t have to be rocket scientist to do a webinar. And then I say, “My dad told me to get a safe secure job and have a trade to fall back on so I became a body mechanic. So I fixed smashed cars and I tell people that. I said, “Whose parents told them to get a safe secure job?” And people type in on the webinar, “Yes mine, mine.” I say, “Yeah Bob, Linda, Berry yeah, your parents told you job security, right?”

Now it’s relating back to them, okay? Instead of me saying, yeah, my dad told me to get a job, and it’s panel beating, I’m relating it back to them. Then I say, but my dream was to play music and be in a band. Who has a dream or a goal but because of time or money, you can’t do that. All day your are day dreaming about doing what you love but you can’t because you got to be in a job because you don’t have enough money and people always say, “Yeah, yeah that’s me too, right?” So I told them I am a musician, I told them where I’ve come from, but I’ve related everything back to them.

Then I say, “Then I got into real estate. Who’s invested in real estate, didn’t have enough cash flow before?” Yeah, absolutely that’s what happened to me. I realized I needed a business, so I started a webinar business and I made 10,000, 20,000, 100,000, and there is the proof, and that’s what I do is I teach people how to make money. Here I am today teaching people how to do this. So I give them my story of the important points that were turning points in my life but turning points that are going to relate back to the audience as well because that’s really what we want.

People buy from people they know, like, and trust. If they say, “Ah! That’s like me. My parents told me that too.” Now they have an affinity with you, they have something in common with you and the more you create that– it’s like at the start while we said, “This webinar is for you if you are looking to retire or looking to spend time with your family.” We want people saying, “Yeah, that’s me. The more you get them saying, “Yeah, that’s me.” The more they feel understood.

Steve: This is really good advice. I actually have this video as part of– incidentally I gave away a free six day mini course on how to start an online store and I started with an introductory video and I think I’m making some of the mistakes that you just mentioned. I basically tell my story, but I don’t probably do a good job of relating it back to the listener. So this is really good advice.

Essa: Yeah, awesome. It works really good, it works really good. And it’s okay, because when I started out, that was my story but then I started thinking about it, “Okay, why am I telling– always ask yourself, why am I telling them this.” How does this relate to them? How can I relate this back to them? Whatever you say on a webinar, how can I relate this back to the audience? That’s what I always look to do. And that whole section what we just covered there is the first 10 minutes, okay? If you are on a 90 minute webinar, then you want to do that in 15 minutes.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Okay? And then we get into the content, and the content is the bulk of the presentation, and the content is where many people make a mistake because they fail to deliver content. If you are not making sales on your webinar, one of the primary reasons could be you are not delivering enough content, you are not demonstrating enough information, you are not demonstrating your skills enough. And a lot of people have a problem with the content they’ve got because if I give away everything Steve, what’s the point? They are not going to buy from me.

I said, “I challenge you to try and give away in the next 40 minutes as much information as you can. Everything you know about your topic, give it away in the next 40 minutes. So I challenge you to try, okay?”And there is no way you could do it, right? There is no way Steve you could give away everything you know about eCommerce websites in 40 minutes, is there?

Steve: No, there is not. But there always is this thing in the back of my mind that you might be giving away too much, right?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. It’s a very, very common fear of a lot of people have. Let me tell you that the buyers are the buyers. On a webinar if you’ve got 10 people there, one of the people who is there is a buyer, okay, if you’ve got the right target audience there. Now the other people they are coming along this– there might be three or four people just sniffing around going, “Okay, I’ll just come along. I’ve got nothing to do and I’d rather come to an eCommerce– learn about eCommerce. Maybe I’ll pick up a couple of things, maybe I don’t know, I don’t really care.”

But there is someone there that when you say, “This is for you if you’ve got a family, and you’re looking to retire and whatever.” They going, “That’s me.” And then they are watching and they are going, “Wow! I really think I could do this,” and then you are demonstrating and you’re going, “Oh wow! That’s really easy and wow, how good is Steve at his teaching.” You know, that person who is out of those 10 is going to get excited and go, “Wow! Look what I learnt from Steve in 40 minutes. Imagine if I buy his course.”

Imagine the value, look at these templates. Imagine if he just gives me that $50 million template or that ecommerce template that he’s created $171,000 with, you know he’s just explained it, right? He’s just explained it but imagine if I get my hands on that template, that’s going to be so much faster if I work with Steve. After 40 minutes I’ve learnt so much, imagine what I’ll learn in his course eight modules and the templates and the couching calls with him and all of that stuff. That’s what happens to people, but if you don’t demonstrate enough, and it’s a fine line, you don’t want to turn it into a lecture.

So you wouldn’t want it– for example, you talking about eCommerce websites. In the five steps, you got to create three, five, or seven steps in the content, right? Three and five steps is the best, seven gets too much, right? Three or five steps to building a successful $171,000 per year eCommerce web business. What we want to do there is we don’t want to turn it into buy a domain name and here is how you buy a domain name. Go to Go Daddy then click there and then do that and then– and then what do you is go to the hosting and don’t use the $9.99 option, choose that option and then after that you’ve got that hosting.

And then go to this website here, it’s called eCommerce themes. I go here and I buy the theme and then I go into choosing the theme, then choose the theme there and then I go– add this to the WP admin, WordPress thing, now if you don’t have WordPress then here is what you click on.

You don’t want to turn it into like a — too much of a drill by a drill, step by step because you just don’t have enough time in 40 minutes and you are not completely– they aren’t convinced 100% they want to do this yet. So you want your steps, you want to give the fundamentals and a little bit of how to and some resources, but you can’t give them everything that’s in the course because you don’t have enough time to deliver it.

So at the end of 40 minutes, we wouldn’t have even gone through the first couple of sections and then you’ve left out all of the other stuff like how to get the product, where to source the products from, where to do this– you got to give an overview of every step, but don’t be afraid to sink in a little bit on each one and say, “Here is a resource that can help you do that, like you can buy themes for eCommerce websites here for like $100. We have our own themes.

Don’t be afraid to say we have our own themes, our proven templates that our students use available in our program. But hey guys, you could still go to a website likes this and buy it if you wanted to. There are some options for you or you can get them created, go to odesk.com and they’ll create, ask someone, look for a eCommerce expert. Just be careful of this and this when you do it that way and make sure– ask for the quote upfront. And you are there to help them as best as you can, you want to stir them in the right direction.

Let’s pretend in the first 40 minutes they are not going to buy from you, all right? They are going to leave there and you have to help them become successful whether they buy your product or not because that’s just the right thing to do. They are investing an hour with you, you promised to give away great information. We have to fulfill that promise, and those of us that have been to webinars where the guy just sold-sold-sold-sold-sold the whole time, we left feeling disgusting and we said, “We’re never going to another webinar with that guy again because he just sold-sold-sold- sold, delivered no content to us at all.”

The sale happens in that 40 minutes of content, that’s when the people who emerge– who say, “Wow! These awesome, I want more of this.” That’s what we want them to do. We want to whet their appetite, by the time we get to end of 40 minutes we’ve given them stories, we’ve illustrated, we’ve shared testimonials, case studies, people who’ve used that information. Here is how you do this; here is how you do that, here is what you do there, and then we recap that after 40 minutes.

Steve: Okay, all right. Yeah, that’s good stuff. So that accounts for 50 minutes. So you don’t sell anything until the very end, is that how you structure it?

Essa: That’s right, yeah. The last 10 minutes now– there is a lot of people out there that will say, “Oh you got to start selling in the middle because people leave on your webinar.” That is BS, that’s total BS.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: And if you don’t keep people interested enough in your content, right, if you’ve done your job properly on your webinar, they are going to hang around till the end and they are going watch your webinar because they’re just genuinely interested. A percentage of people are like, “Wow! I mean– I don’t even know what it is yet, but I mean I want to work with Steve.” They’ve made up their mind.

They’ll come up to you later and they’ll say to you, “You know what Steve, I really resonated with your story about what you said about your mum and how you want– how you’ve got a kid and you’re retired, you know, you tried to do this for your kid. I like you, I resonated with you, and I really see how this works. I see how you made the money, and I see how that works, and I really want to do this, and I want you to help me because you sound like a really, really good person.” They’ve already made up their mind.

If you think back to when you’ve bought something especially on a webinar you’ve made up your mind that you want to work with that person or you know that their information is going to be good in that book or the course that they are going to run. You’ve already made up your mind. It’s just about now; they have to give us an irresistible offer. Like one of my favorite movies, the God Father, “I’ll make him offer he can’t refuse.” You know what I mean?

You got to make them an offer they can’t refuse. And how do you do that? You stack the value. Now nothing– people give you money if you give them value, okay? And what I teach people in the close of your webinar, first before you close, you recap everything. You say, “Here is what we covered. Here is proof, I showed you how to do it, right? Step one was this, step two was this, step three was this, step four, step five was that.” That’s the recap.

And then you need a transition slide because Brian Tracy, one of the best salesman in the world and a sales trainer– he says, “The sales section is the bumpy part in the whole process when you are giving a sales pitch, when you are giving a sales talk or something like that, when you are asking for the order that’s when the hardest part is for most people, right?

Steve: Right.

Essa: And so to transition into that I use a slide that is something like– or you just say something like, “So there is the five steps guys, I taught you how to do that. So would you like the fast and easy way to make all these happen for you? Would you like to know an even faster way that you can make an eCommerce website making $171000 a year from? Would anyone want to know how to do that?” now you’ve just delivered 50 minutes of quality, right? They are going to be going, “Oh yes please,” right? Say, “Well if you do stick around because here is what I’m going to show. It’s called the eCommerce Mastery program, all right?” And if you don’t have a name for your program you just call it something-something mastery program. It’s just…

Steve: Okay.

Essa: It just becomes like, have they mastered building an eCommerce website, right?

Steve: Sure.

Essa: And you say, “Here is the program.” And if you don’t have a product right now Steve, it’s perfect because here is what I do. I tell my students put together eight, 10 or four, eight or 10 more webinars and also we need– is the topics that you are going to cover. So you to say people, “Okay, what’s the guaranteed formula to make all these happen the fast and easy way? Introducing our eCommerce Mastery program.

You’re going to get step by step instructions on how to implement these strategies right now and the great thing with our eCommerce Mastery program is that you’ll get– you’ll know exactly how to put a eCommerce website together the best way, the fast way, the easy way using our approven templates so you can start making money sooner, so you can retire faster, so you can make $171,000 a year. And instead of struggling to do it yourself, you’ll basically have a proven formula there for you.”

And then I say, “Webinar one, we are going to cover researching and market to look out what’s the best market and in this webinar we’ll talk about X, Y, Z, this and this and this. And the benefit of that is blah-blah-blah.” Now here is the biggest mistake people make Steve when they are doing it close on a webinar, they start talking about the features. “Let me tell everyone listening right now, no one wants to work with you one on one, no one wants to watch your DVDs, no one wants to watch your webinars, no one wants email support from you, no one wants anything from you.

They want the result of what that product or that one on one coaching call will do.” And people fail to close highly when they fail to tell the benefit of each of the features that they have. So instead of saying, “You are going to get this webinar which shows you how to research and in webinar two, you are going to get a webinar which shows you how to pick the best domain. In webinar three, you are going to learn how to get the best hosting and webinar four, you are going to learn how to get white label products and webinar five– instead of saying that you say, “Webinar one, we are going to show how to market research.

In this webinar we’ll look at the best markets to go into so that you make the most amount of money, so that you are starting off in a profitable niche. This is what gives you the best chance of making more money so you can retire sooner, so that it’s less headache to manage, so that you get to spend more time with your kids, you get to spend more time on things you want to do and that’s really what you want, isn’t it?

Steve: Okay. So instead of going over what your course offers, you just emphasize the benefits to the person who signs up for that particular webinar.

Essa: Exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: I say 30% features, 70% benefits. So if you say you get this DVD set which is a weekend workshop with me and we show you– we basically go through the whole process, it’s amazing, it’s awesome, it’s blah-blah-blah, that’s 30%. The rest is you are going to learn how to build the business faster, you are going to go– you are going to be able to do it in two hours a week, you are going to be able to retire sooner, you are going to be able to have more cash flow, spend time with your kids, you are going to be able to buy properties with one cheque, you are going to be able to run a webinar, you are going to make money, enough money from that webinar to put a deposit on a house. How good is that going to feel? That’s what we teach in that webinar.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: You know what I mean. Instead of saying we show you how to put together an introduction, a middle and close, and how to put a product together, they don’t care about all that. They want the end result, so you got to remind them and don’t be afraid. If you know your target audience wants to retire and you’ve got a whole bunch of people on your webinar and they want to retire, quit their job and spend time with their family, don’t be afraid to say that 10 times in the close.

Remember guys when you do this, when you setup a eCommerce website the right way, you are going to be able to retire, spend time with your family. When was the last time you took your family on a holiday? You are going to be able to do this when you set it out and you can manage your eCommerce website when you are on holidays if you need to in just one hour. You can have the sales coming in, you make the money while you sleep, you wake up, you check your sales, you add a couple of extra products on it, you spend the rest of the day with your kids. Paint that picture of what life is going to be like after they own your product.

Steve: So the first webinar is free and then you charge for the subsequent ones. Is that…

Essa: That’s right, yes. If you didn’t have a product right now I would create, get you to create some more webinars, right? So four, eight, 10, or 12 over one per week. So you can run them live each week and you only have to record them the first time and customers will be really happy because they get to speak to you more. They get to ask questions and the good thing about creating your course this way Steve is that basically you can fix it on the go.

If you notice that your customers are too– falling behind and they are not keeping up with you and you are going too fast, you can basically– you can change it, you can change the course midstream and add in there an extra webinar or add in there speed it up or slow it down or add some more resources in there. If people rush out and they write a book and then they go and build a course and then they try and sell it when they haven’t got any feedback from anyone, it’s the worst thing you can do. You are not going to create a good product.

How do you create a good product? You market research, but you get people to pay for the market research by selling them the webinar series on the course, on the free webinar. You sell them the series and now you have people paying for market research and you are trying to make them successful as best you can so get testimonials for next time.

So I want take those customers over the first four, eight, 10, 12 weeks whatever you’ve created. I normally create eight week webinar series, and those webinars can be anything from five minutes to 90 minutes. Just as long as you teach me how to get those steps, that’s all I need, right? Give them the content and then give them some homework and see you next week. And then you report…

Steve: How much do you charge?

Essa: Depends on the product, you know, it’s like– normally for a little of your product normally something like you are offering there. For eight webinars, $297 is a good price point to start off with.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: And what I want to do is I want to make them as successful as possible. So the first lot of customers that I have, I want to call them up. I’ll call them up. Say we get 10 or 20 people signed up, I want the business owner who we’re starting a business with to call them up and say, “Why did you buy? What made you buy our course?” And they are going tell us. Those 20 people are going to tell us why they bought and that’s good information for the next free webinar we run. And then I’m going to say, “What’s your idea, what’s your topic, blah-blah-blah,” and I’m going to help them become successful because I want testimonials. Nothing sells like proof.

If you can help people do what you are saying and you get a testimonial that helps sell more on the next time you run it, right? And it helps them talk to other people and it’s what your product should be doing, your product should be getting results. Like I think my webinar costs– gets more results for people than any other internet marketing product that I know, and it’s more real results, because putting a webinar together works. When you do it the way we teach, it works and that’s why we have so many successful students.

So to me in a business, results is everything. We want to get– whatever we’ve got to do, bend over backwards to help that first bunch of customers get the result, that’s going to help us put the price up, it’s going to help us to add more value to it, get testimonials, sell more of them later on. And if you are selling more than one in 10 at $297 put the price up to $497, then $997, 2000 and that’s how I started. I started with a $300 product and now I sell a $50,000 product but my average product on a webinar I sell it $3000. I don’t have a product cheaper than that except my webinar replace offer which is $497, but I don’t sell that on a webinar. I just got a website for that, we don’t spend too much time focusing on that. We sell our $3000 webinar training and that sells by itself on autopilot.

Steve: Through your webinar replay.

Essa: Yes, through our webinar replay, exactly, yeah.

Steve: Okay. So let’s go over something else. So let’s say you’ve got the presentation. How do you actually get people to sign up for your webinar?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. There is many, many ways. We cover a lot of information on how to do that. It’s the biggest question we get, but I’ll give you two easy ways that you can do that, right? The first one is joint ventures. First thing you need to do is start building your own list. If you are in online marketing, then you need to start building your list, right? And if you don’t have a GetResponse or AWeber or Infusionsoft or one shopping cart, MailChimp, you know accounts to capture names and email, that’s the first thing you need to be doing. You need to be capturing names and email addresses yourself, and every opportunity you want to capture names and email addresses at every opportunity.

At my event I actually show people how each person who comes to your webinar is worth $70 when you follow our sort of model of creating products at $300, then in $2000 and $10000, but we don’t have time to do it here, but basically each person who attends your webinar is worth a dollar amount if you are selling products and stuff. So you have to realize that building your own list is number one, critical and something you have to do every day. But the number one way to fill a webinar is to find people like me who’ve got $25,000 subscribers or more and ask them to mail to their list for you, for your webinar and give them a percentage of the profit if you make a sale.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Yeah. It’s what I do every week, right? I either promote other people on my webinars and they sell, like I had a guy last night. Last night we run a webinar on Amazon. The guy made three sales so far at $500, right? We had like 80 people there. So conversion rate was a little bit lower than what we’d expect. He wasn’t a student of mine, he was just a guy I met at an event and he interviewed me and I said, “Okay, I’ll do a promotion for you for a 50-50 deal.” And I’m sure the webinar replay has already made sales.

If I check now in Infusionsoft I’m sure there is more sales coming from the replay, but basically find someone who has got a list, who will mail for you for a percentage of the sales because they can make you rich. Three or four guys like me can make you enough sales if you’ve got the right target audience, the right product, the right price; you make it irresistible, you’ll close 10%.

And if I can get 500 people registered for webinar I can get at least 200 to 300 showing up to watch it and then the rest of them on the replay. If you can close 10% of those, that’s 30, 40 sales at 300 or even $500 or a $1000, that’s 30, 40 grand. You are giving half away but– then you get other products and services for a higher price to those people who bought at the end of your eight weeks or 12 weeks course, you should offer a done for your service for 10 grand.

Steve: I see.

Essa: So once you’ve sold something for $300 or $500 then you– at the end of that, you say, “Hey, how can I help you more? We offer one on one, we offer this, we offer that. We do a done for you; we’ll build you your own eCommerce website for 10 grand.”

Steve: Got it.

Essa: All of that and that’s a 100% profit for you as well. So what I do is I spend 15 minutes or I tell people to spend 15 minutes every day looking for joint venture partners, create a spreadsheet and have your assistant email potential joint venture partners and keep chasing them up until you get them because a couple of those, we’ll make you a seven figure business quite easily.

Steve: So you mentioned the typical conversion rate for a well done webinar is on the order of 10% of the attendees, is that what you said?

Essa: That’s right. Yeah, that’s right.

Steve: Okay. And then do you use any sort of paid advertising like Facebook, adwords and that sort of thing typically?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Absolutely. We totally do but I tell you now, if I lost everything tomorrow, if I lost everything and I had to start from scratch, I wouldn’t be starting off with Facebook ads because it’s so much harder and more expensive to do. And you can lose– what I always tell people is I’ve spent three grand on Facebook ads and made 30 grand, you know, I’ve made money with Facebook ads, but they are coming harder and harder to get them right. And if you are a beginner, it’s very-very hard.

If you hire someone to do it for you then great, but what you really– what the best use for your time is finding that JV partner because there is someone out there that needs more content for their database. When I do a JV webinar for someone like I did last night, the Amazon one, the guy delivered so much great information from me. Now, if I didn’t give that information to my 25000 people as option for them to sign up for that webinar, someone else will email them a webinar about kindle. You know what I mean? They’ll end up on someone else’s list.

Now why wouldn’t I want them to number one, make sure that the expert I’ve got– he is a good expert. He’s been doing it, he showed me proof how he is making money, 15 grand a month thanks to kindle. Why wouldn’t I want to put him through my list to my subscribers, it helps him. If he makes sales, he gets 50%, I get 50%, and my list gets great information. Even if they don’t buy they’ve gotten a resource, a great expert that they could reach out to, they could get help from if they want to buy the course later, or at least they know about it, and the webinar went for two hours and he was answering every question they had at the end.

So it’s another way– people say, “Why would someone want to promote me for that exact reason?” they are looking to promote more stuff to their list, they’ve got a list, they’ve got nothing else sell. The list– most of your list won’t buy product, so why wouldn’t you offer other people’s product to sell, right? So I could launch your webinar Steve, how to make a $171,000 a year thanks to eCommerce websites because I don’t have an eCommerce website, and most of the people in my list I think– there is only about three and half, 4000 of the people out of 25000 have bought something.

The rest are just on the list for information or their email addresses are bad or whatever it is. On your database there is only a certain number of active people and if you are not offering them something, they are buying stuff from other people. So why don’t you filter that and make a cut and bring the best experts to them?

Steve: Okay. So let’s take a step back and also talk about some of the tools that you use. So for example, webinar software, what do you use?

Essa: Webinar software, I just use GoToWebinar. I’ve got the same account that I setup in 2008. I think it’s $79 a month now for 100 people and people say, “Oh, but 100 people. That’s all you can have.” Well if you got a 100 people coming to your webinar, you can always upgrade it, but if you’ve got 100 people coming to your webinar every week then you are making way more than $79 a month unless you are doing something wrong.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of collecting the email addresses for go to, do you use anything? You use Infusionsoft I thought I had you mention.

Essa: We’ve got five businesses and across those we’ve got one shopping cart, we’ve got two one shopping cart accounts, three Infusionsofts and our students– we teach them how to setup GetResponse because it’s 15 bucks a month, it’s cheap and you don’t need something so– as heavy as Infusionsoft when you are starting out. It’s a bit overwhelming for people and you don’t have a business yet.

So spend $200, $300 is a bit of a stretch for some people, so GetResponse or AWeber will do the job for you for 15, 20 bucks a month. GoToWebinar as well, 100 bucks a month or whatever and yeah, those are two main softwares that you need to collect names and emails and run webinars. We also have another tool we use LeadPages, which integrates really nice leads through those, so when people register for GoToWebinar, when you’ve set it up in LeadPages they automatically sign up to your AWeber account or your GetResponse account and the GoToWebinar at the same time. So that’s a really cool tool, Leadpages.net. These guys in the states made that. They are really-really clever, so that’s a good software to have.

Steve: What about Google Hangouts, have you ever tried running a webinar through hangouts?

Essa: Yeah. We’ve run webinars through Hangouts before and the software– first you need other software to actually capture names and emails for it, and secondly I don’t know about in the states but the internet speeds in Australia aren’t quite at that level yet where– you know, it’s a bit more laggy, it’s a bit more not as good quality, and at the end of the day I just didn’t have as much success with it and I didn’t find it as easy to use as GoToWebinar.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: But it’s a free software, Google Hangouts it works, whatever just choose the platform and roll with it and you’ll just become professional at that. On GoToWebinar and Google Hangouts you are going always have people on your webinar that have technical problems, okay? You are going to have a percentage of people that have a technical issue on their side; there is nothing you can do about it. You just got to send them a replay later. So I get people typing in questions, “I can’t see, I can’t see anything,” I say, “Don’t worry, I’ll send you a reply later.” And then they just go away and they don’t have to stress out anymore and they can watch the replay the next day.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of support, do you provide support to all the people who watch your webinars?

Essa: When they are watching a webinar– do you mean after they bought the products?

Steve: I mean after– yeah let’s say they bought the product. Yeah, let’s say they bought the product, yeah.

Essa: Yeah if they buy the product, yeah. We– it depends on the package. I mean, if you want to you can add support. Our $3000 program has email support; it also has a weekly group webinar which one of my head trainers runs. So they can get on a call every week and ask questions and interact with my head trainer, which she also allows them to present as well so they can get a student feedback and stuff like that, but that’s for $3000.

So it’s got to make sense financially, but if you are just starting out and you don’t have any money coming in, give away the whole house, give away everything for free as part of the package and then you put your price up when you are getting people successful. Because remember, once your calendar is full then you start putting the price up. I get a lot of people when I put the webinar to give and I say, “Throw in there some Skype sessions, throw in there email support and sell it for $297.” And they resist then I say, “Would you rather be busy and making a little bit of money or would you rather be not busy and not making any money?” You know what I mean?

Steve: That’s a lot of sense.

Essa: So I say, “Get busy.” If you are busy, busy people get stuff done and then you put the prices up. And next time you run it you go, “I’m putting the price up.” And then tell people on the webinar, “Guess what guys, this price is going up, okay? It’s going up. I’m going to do double the price very soon because I’m not going to have time to do this and they charge more money, so get it now while it’s cheap.”

Steve: So when does the actual website come into play? Do you always just do the webinars, but do you ever put that stuff on a website, like a membership site or is it always just webinars?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. We’ve got a– we just build a membership site through WishList, WordPress. Wishlistmember.com I think they have a $97 plug-in and you plug it into WordPress. There is other sites out there like Kajabi.com and OptimizePress which is WordPress again, but you can basically build your own membership site or have someone build it for you for about $1000. Then you store those replay webinars that people paid for– you put them in there and you give them access to the membership.

You can charge them a fee but I recommend you just let them access the course they paid for because they’ve already paid for it for free. You can setup multiple levels and stuff like that, yeah. But we don’t spend a cent on that until we’ve made money, so we are only reinvesting money. It doesn’t make sense to spend stuff that you haven’t made on the business yet. So you got to reinvest a percentage of the money you’ve made into a membership site so that people can watch it after.

Steve: Okay. You know what’s hilarious about all this Steven is I thought…

Essa: You are doing it.

Steve: I’m doing it this way, but I thought it was very unconventional when I did it this way. Like, I launched without any content pretty much and I just kind of had buyers with the promise of content and then once I got these buyers, I started putting out the content. The only difference is I was doing it live to just a small set of people in the beginning. I wasn’t doing a whole bunch of webinars, but it sounds like your strategy would work a lot of better to expand and convert more people so.

Essa: Oh absolutely, absolutely.

Steve: Yeah.

Essa: It definitely works some. People say, “But Steve, doesn’t some people get upset that there is nothing there yet?” I know I always ask the audience. I always say, “Don’t ask me, ask the audience.” I say, “Who in the room here, who in this seminar room if I was selling a eight week webinar course for whatever price, $497 or whatever, who would rather watch the replay videos of those modules? Who would rather– put your hand up if you would rather watch the replay modules, or if you would rather me present that live to you each week where you can ask me questions at the end of each webinar.

Who would rather the replays, the video only? And always one or two people put their hand up but when I say, “Who would rather watch it live with me each week, and then I give you a copy of the replay if you can’t make it or if you want to watch it again?” And all the audience put their hand up. The audience wants to speak to a human being. This online that you can automate everything and whatever; they still want to be able to speak to a human being. They always prefer that over a video. Now they’ll take a video second, all right, they’ll take a video second.

So if you can show me how to build a eCommerce website in a video tutorial series that you’ve created, I’ll take it, but if you give me a choice then I can talk to Steve on the call each week and he’s going to run me through that eCommerce thing and I can put my hand up and ask a question and I get the replays, they are always going to take that option. So never be afraid to sell something that you haven’t created yet, just make sure you’ve got it created and it’s easy.

You just got to be one week ahead over the course or the modules. Now if you go halfway through and you go, “Guess what, I can probably create all the rest of them.” Create all the rest of them and send it to the customers and say, “Hey, I just created it all. If you’ve got any questions, email me. I’ll jump on a Skype call with you if you need to and whatever we are going to do to make you successful.” So it’s totally okay.

Steve: That is really great advice Steven. Hey man, I want to be respectful of your time. We’ve already been talking for 50 minutes, so just in enclosing where can people find more information about your webinar training classes?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely man. Well we finished the– I think we’ve finished the web business boot camp for this year, the tour. We did a world tour, my wife and I finished with that, but usually webbusinessbreakthrough.com is where we pull random attendees out of crowds and we did it all over world, but Steveessa.com just S-T-E-V-E-E-S-S-A.com– Steveessa.com is where you can check out my webinar where I talk about– I do a demonstration actually.

I pick someone on the webinar, do a webinar with them, and quickly show you how to automate the webinar, show you how to record and I also talk about the medicals and the module nuts, setting up webinars for other people and taking 50% of the company. And that’s– I’ve got one company that’s done like over $2 million now in three years, and I own half of that and that business partner has done 120 grand on a webinar with 13 people on there, and I make half of that and I’m not even there.

Steve: Crazy.

Essa: It’s a hugely powerful model. I call it the Medical center model where you get experts working for you. So in a medical center the model, the medical center owner is a smart one because he’s got the leverage, right? The doctors sort of pay a percentage, or pay a fee to him and her and they don’t have to go to work every day. So I’ll show you how to create a medical center model that you can make sales from.

Steve: Okay. And this is where you are sending them traffic from your list or is it just– how is this structured? What is your value add?

Essa: Yeah. Check out the webinar and you’ll see.

Steve: Okay, yeah. I’ll link up to it, I’ll link up to it.

Essa: It’s another podcast for you.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: There is many ways to do that. I don’t mean to be like avoiding, but there is many ways to do that. You can basically– a lot of businesses have lists already, but if they don’t you can yes absolutely set that up for your list, anything that you’ve got or you can go out and find JV partners for them, and make a cut of that, yeah.

Steve: Okay. All right, cool. I’ll link up all those resources in the show notes, and hey thanks a lot of coming on the show Steven. I really appreciate it.

Essa: It was my pleasure Steve. I hope people get value out of it and I hope more importantly you go out there and take action and get results.

Steve: All right man, take care.

Essa: Cheers man, bye-bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. After talking with Steven, I actually went back and re-recorded all of my sales videos for my six day mini course, and I’m actually seeing the results and his techniques actually work. For more information about this episode go to Myquitherjob.com/episode58, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not always make me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice for my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

My Thoughts On Jealousy, Inadequacy And Finding Work Life Balance

$
0
0

I have a love hate relationship with Facebook. On one hand, Facebook allows me to keep in touch with and keep track of what my friends are up to.

Work Life Balance

But on the other hand, I’ve had many a Facebook session where I’ve left with a healthy dose of jealousy and feelings of inadequacy.

  • Oh look! the company that my classmate at Stanford started just reached 100 million in sales!
  • Wow! My friend R is really living it up by travelling the world!
  • Geez! I’m the worst parent ever. Look at all the cool stuff my buddy J is doing with his children while I’m working on my businesses!

As a result, I sometimes wonder what I’m missing out on and whether I should be doing something else?

Do I have the proper balance between work, play and other activities in my life?

Where Are You Spending Your Time?

Frustrated

As it turns out, I’m not alone. Every single day, I get emails from readers who hate their jobs and question whether they are making the right decisions with their time.

Recently, I had one reader who complained to me that he works a decent paying job (>100K) that occupies his schedule from 6am to 10pm every day (That’s a 16 hour day btw in case you’re counting).

By the time he gets home from work every day, he feels exhausted and anti-social. As a result, his social and personal life has suffered over the years and he often gets depressed. But at the same time, he does not feel like he can quit because he’s become accustomed to living a certain lifestyle that he does not want to give up.

In addition, he has a hefty mortgage that he needs to pay off.

What’s funny is that these emails usually end with…

“Steve, I think starting an ecommerce business could be the answer. Can I start an online store on the side in my spare time and how quickly can I make (insert dollar amount here) so I can quit the job that I hate so much?”

Now how would you respond to this question? To me, the answer isn’t entirely obvious and it doesn’t necessarily involve starting an online business.

You Can’t Have It All

cake

Those of you who have followed me for a long time know that I have 2 kids, an ecommerce store, a blog, an online store course and an entrepreneurship podcast. And on top all of this, I still work full time as an engineering director.

While I feel proud of what I’ve accomplished so far, I still wonder whether…

  • If I focused 100% of my time on one business, could I create a 100 million dollar company? Could I take my businesses to the next level?
  • Would my life be more exciting and exhilarating if I took the family and traveled the world?
  • Would my kids turn out better if I spent more time with them and put less emphasis on my businesses and career?

Here’s the thing. I know that I can’t have it all.

Every choice and every minute that I’m spending on a certain activity is a minute that I could be spending somewhere else.

The Real Question You Should Be Asking

So the real question I always ask myself is…

“What do I value the most and what is my order of priority?”

My kids and family are my highest priority. I want to spend time with them and be an active part in their lives. And to facilitate this, my wife and I created our online store in order to have the flexible schedule that raising kids necessitates.

On the personal front, I love solving technical problems so my other priority is to keep my brain stimulated. As a result, I continue to work my full time job because it keeps me mentally fit even though it makes the least money out of all of the income sources in my household.

Now on the surface, these two priorities seem to conflict.

If spending time with my kids is my top priority, then why do I devote the majority of my week at my day job? The truth is that I don’t think I could spend every waking moment with my kids because I’d probably go crazy.

So to compromise, I make sure that I’m always there when they need me while I take care of what makes me happy as well.

Healthy Sacrifices

Want Need

But the reality is that juggling the businesses, the day job and the kids requires a hefty amount of sacrifice. I take a lot of pride in what I do but I full on admit that I would love to do some of things that my peers are doing. I would love to accomplish what some of my friends have accomplished.

But my priorities in life have made me realize that…

  • I will not be creating the next 100 million dollar company by only devoting 8-10 hours per week on my businesses. Furthermore, anything beyond just a lifestyle business requires serious dedication and a huge time commitment that I would not be able to bear. As such, doing smaller scale projects like my online store course, blogging and ecommerce are perfectly suited for me.
  • I will probably not be traveling the world and living out of my backpack for months at a time anytime soon (at least not while my kids are living at home):) More date nights should be feasible however.
  • I most likely will not become Vice President or CEO of my current company. As a director, I believe I have already reached my ceiling given the amount of time I’m willing to devote to my day job.

But despite these sacrifices, the upshot is that I will always be close to my family and I will never miss any important life changing event or achievement in their lives.

What’s The Right Answer?

Now I’d like to take a moment and go back to my reader’s original question. If he hates his job but doesn’t want to give up his existing lifestyle, then what’s the correct course of action? Should he start an online business or quit his job?

Well for one thing, he could suck it up, not sleep, and start a business on the side. But after working a 16 hour day, I doubt that he’d have any time or energy left over. For this reader, I would probably have him sit down and figure out what his priorities are.

Is living a lavish life style more important than personal happiness? Is owning a nice house worth the pressure of working a job that you despise?

If I were him, I would NOT add a new business to the mix. Instead, I’d pick one aspect of my life that I want to improve, focus on it and drop everything else that does not contribute to my goal.

For me that one thing is my family and kids. As such, it’s fairly straightforward for me to make decisions on what to add or drop in my life.

But the reality is that we all have to give up something. Is affording a nice house and living a lavish lifestyle more important than being happy 16 out of 24 hours in the day?

The answer seems pretty clear to me at least.

photo credit: balance scale and pattern blocks Late Night Mathematics

MWQHJ 059: How Will Mitchell Makes 6 Figures Selling Online And Teaching Others How To Import From China

$
0
0

Will Mitchell

I became a huge fan of Will Mitchell when I accidentally stumbled on his blog, StartupBros.com. Not only is Will an excellent writer but he always writes from experience which is quite rare when it comes to the Internet.

In this episode, Will teaches us how to find products to sell online and how he has created an incredible business importing goods from Asia and teaching others how to do the same. Enjoy the podcast!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Will got started in ecommerce
  • What Will sells in his ecommerce store
  • Will’s techniques for finding the right product to sell
  • What margins Will likes to see on his products
  • What tools Will uses to find products to sell
  • How to import goods from China
  • How to get around high MOQs
  • How to distinguish good sellers from bad sellers on Alibaba

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’ve got someone really special on the show, Will Mitchell. Now let’s see, how did I come across Will? First off, I’ve never really met the guy in person, but I kind of feel like I know from his blog Startupbros.com. Now if you’ve never been Startupbros.com, I highly recommend that you check it out. Every single post is just so detailed and well written that I have been guilty of spending hours reading it when I should have been working on my businesses.

Now unlike me, Will started his entrepreneurship journey at a very young age. He actually started importing and selling online at age 16, then he dropped out of college at age 19 to help start Affluence which is a social network for affluent people, and after this company went public, he started a successful consulting firm and today Will focuses his time on Startupbros.com, and I believe he also leads people on tours to the Canton Fair. So with that, welcome to the show Will. How is it going man?

Will: Pretty good Steve. Good to be here, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah. You’re a hard man to track down.

Will: Yes. Finally here though.

Steve: So how did you get into eCommerce and what happened at age 16 that made you try to import goods from China?

Will: You know, when I was really young, you know, as young as 12 or 13, my parents had me really young and my dad was just a hardcore entrepreneur, did some amazing things. So I kind of got a back seat to watch all of what he did and through that from a really young age I decided that I probably wasn’t going to go to college. So I pretty much decided that school in general– I didn’t really see how it connected to the entrepreneurial journey, and I didn’t see how people that were really dedicated to the education system got further in the entrepreneurial world.

So I kind of decided from a young age that I was going to use entrepreneurship and trial and error as my schooling sort of thing. So the first business I got into was– and this was 13, 14 years old, I started doing counterfeits and things like that.

Steve: What does that mean?

Will: So counterfeits purses and counterfeit wallets.

Steve: Oh okay. Got it, okay.

Will: All the fake Gucci and Chanel stuff you see.

Steve: Right.

Will: So that’s actually how I started off. So it gave me a good footing and everything but obviously it was a little risky, but that’s actually how I got started off. So I started selling those on eBay, Amazon. Back then it was a little bit lucid than it is now, they are not as strict. So made some good money doing that for a good two years until I got a cease and desist from– you know, I started getting them from pretty much everyone: Nike, Burberry and Gucci. So luckily for me I respected the cease and desist, didn’t get sued or anything, but kind of took all the profits that I had from the counterfeits. That’s funny, I actually I still have like a box of a whole bunch of fake Chanel purses and Gucci purses and stuff in my garage.

I kind of took to the– what I learned from that and profits from that and I started trying to go legit with it, so tons and tons of failed products before I really figured out what I was doing. And back then– this is 2002, 2003, early 2000. So it’s still pretty almost like the Wild Wild West of the internet. There were a lot of scams out there; doing business on Alibaba, doing international business in general was really quite risky. So I did make a lot of mistakes, I got scammed quite a few times. I’ve seen pretty much every scam in the book, but eventually success did start to happen. I only had four or five failed products before I really started to figure things out.

And yeah, so from there I kind of transitioned into– I was selling everything from decorative knives and swords to eventually I really focused– like you said, by the time I was 16, 17 I had pretty much figured out that I only wanted to sell airsoft goods. So I really started focusing on that, really built relationship with the manufacturer. He helped me get– setup a distribution center in the US, and yeah, just kind of grew it from there, and it went pretty well for a while. Eventually China actually made airsoft guns illegal, so that’s actually what eventually shut my business down, and it actually happened around the same time I was supposed to go college. So at that point I kind of started to go on a direction but…

Steve: Okay. Do you sell anything today?

Will: Yeah, definitively. We sell a lot of beauty products, a lot of cosmetic products, things like that.

Steve: Are these white label or have you created your own formulations?

Will: So we have two or three brands, product lines that are white label and then four that are private formulation.

Steve: Okay. And just– since you’ve sold– it sounds like a wide variety of stuff, like what is your thought process when you try to decide what to sell online?

Will: Oh that’s a good question. Yeah, I really have sold just a whole world worth of stuff, so pretty broad categories, but yeah, it’s really all about the numbers for me. We have a few– we have this product selection check list that we give to all our clients and it basically in a nut shell it says that if I can pick up the product and toss it around with my hands comfortably, then it’s good to ship and everything. So that’s one of things I look for that’s not super complex to ship, it doesn’t have tons of regulation surrounding it, it’s not going to have crazy labeling requirements, it’s not going to be something like a computer or a car where if one little piece goes bad, the whole piece, you know, I’m down.

I try to go for things that have a high margin there and then in addition to that, really just looking for fast moving products that have great margins. I really focus on finding products that have 67% plus margin. So if I am buying a product for five bucks, I’d really like to be selling it for 15. I think at that kind of margin and that kind of mark-up, that’s where you can really grow a business quickly and have a lot of fun with it, so that’s what we encourage our clients to do.

Steve: So that pretty much excludes drop shipping or domestic wholesale for the most part, right, would you say?

Will: Yeah, we tend to encourage people to go with importing either private labeling. Most of our clients will start off private labeling and then eventually know once they really start to figure out what the customer wants, what makes the customer tick as well as obviously testing their product out and proving their product. At that point we try to transition them from that into creating a really established brand, building their own website and kind of transitioning from getting off the ground private label to real sellable company or real sellable brand.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of– so you mentioned some of the aspects of the products that you like to sell, how do you actually come up with the actual goods and what is your kind of formula so to speak on how to evaluate whether a product is going to sell or not?

Will: Okay. I use a tool that you’ve probably heard of and I’m sure a lot of your listeners have heard of called Terapeak, one of the only tools out there that I absolutely say every entrepreneur really needs to– every importing entrepreneur really needs to have, really every eCommerce entrepreneur. So I have this production selection spreadsheet that essentially just has a list of products, and then what I can buy it at, what I can sell it and just kind of figures out roughly my margin and everything. So I literally– my goal and I do product research is to fill up that spreadsheet with as many products as possible.

So I kind of just let my mind go wild. There is a lot of little tips, like for instance if you find like a good private label or a good importer on EBay, Amazon you can take that seller and put that seller into Terapeak and actually do the research on that seller’s name and figure out the other products that they are selling. So in terms of brainstorming, there is a lot of good ways to get ideas for products like that, spying on the competition, looking at hot sellers, Amazon movers and shakers, and things like that.

But you know from there I just try to get tons of ideas, get them all into this spreadsheet and my whole goal with this spreadsheet really is to just get like I said, 50, 100 products on there, get all the data on there, all the numbers and even though all of the estimates on what my profit margin is going to be, what my profit per unit is going to be, even though all that is just rough estimates, it really gives me a good comparative view of 100 different products and at that point it just becomes a game in numbers.

If you have a100 products in there that you’ve– kind of let your mind go wild and just put 100 different things in there, you are going to have at least one really good product and it’s going to be obvious just from a comparative view of the other products. So I don’t know if I explained that well, but that’s kind of my process for product research if that makes sense.

Steve: So just for the benefit of the listeners, Terapeak is a tool that essentially scraps all the eBay listings and I believe it scraps some of Amazon’s stuff as well, and gives you an idea what is selling well and what is not selling well. So if I could just summarize what you just told me Will, it sounds like you go and you kind of look at some of the hot sellers or– like, walk me through how you use Terapeak because I know how I use it. I’m just curious how you– do you look at the best sellers and then see if you can find the suppliers of the best selling items and then get your own and sell them?

Will: Yeah. That’s definitely one really good way to do it. Yes, so Terapeak like you said, eBay, data scrapper for the most part, but they actually– they have an exclusive deal with eBay and they are actually the only company that has access to eBay sales data and as you know, Amazon doesn’t give anyone their sales data.

Steve: Correct.

Will: So eBay really– Terapeak is really the only place to get this really, really in depth eCommerce data. I actually don’t know anywhere else that it really exists, I don’t know if you do.

Steve: No I don’t actually and for Etsy there used to be a tool, but it’s kind of become defunct over the years to scrape Etsy as well.

Will: Yeah. So that’s really the only reason I really recommend Terapeak. I always hate recommending any type of paid tool, but if you are getting into importing I definitely recommend it. They have seven-day free trial; I definitely recommend jumping on that trial even if it’s just for the seven days, even if it’s just for the week that you are doing product research. It’s going to expedite the process, so it’s just going to make it so much smoother. So…

Steve: So let me ask you this. How did you go from like airsoft guns to like beauty products? It just seems kind of random to me. So do you know anything about that market or was it just a number– purely the numbers?

Will: It was purely the numbers and for anyone that’s looking for a product right now, I’ve just recently seen a lot of beauty products, a lot of things like essential oils and things like that just have crazy margins right now. So for whatever reason, the margins are really good in that niche, so that’s where we’ve been. But yeah, after I got out of air soft, like I said that was right around the time I was going to college. So I actually went to college for about a year, two semesters before I dropped out, and I pretty much learnt nothing here in college but how to drink. So say I went to college for a little bit, after that didn’t do really any business in college which eventually really kind of depressed me. It was kind of amazing to see how college influenced me to become a less productive person.

Steve: Interesting.

Will: Yeah. And one thing I kind of thought too when I was in college is entrepreneurship really is just, you know, there is all these lessons that you have to learn in entrepreneurship and there is no way to learn them. You can’t learn them in school; there is no way of teaching them. You literally have to learn from going out there and making mistakes and getting stung basically. So my philosophy was I just wanted to get out of the system and start that journey and start going down those path of lessons.

So that’s what I did. I dropped back out and started the company Affluence that you were talking about. So that went pretty well. We actually took that public about a year and half after we launched it. So from there we took the money we made with that and then bought a company called organic color systems.

Steve: I see, okay.

Will: And basically again just the margins– when we were looking at– we went through tons and tons of different businesses trying to figure out which business we were going to invest and which business we wanted to spend our time growing next. And just going through it for whatever reason again, cosmetic industry the margins are just ridiculous. So that’s the business we ended up buying, kind of built out the take end of the business, the back end of the business, the automation and sales and everything.

Steve: So this company, were they manufacturing their own products or…?

Will: Yeah, they are actually– they are a distributor– they were a distributor for a manufacturer in the UK. And like I said, now we’ve grown it, now we have seven or eight different product lines and then one side of our warehouse actually just has one of my friends from high school just shipping out all of her random Amazon products and stuff like that.

Steve: So you don’t use FBA or…?

Will: Not really actually, no. We recommend that most of our clients do, but just a situation we are in; we are a distributor for seven or eight different brands. We have exclusive deals with most of the brands so we typically have to buy huge MOQs and stock our warehouse for six months a year at a time. So the FBA just– not only would it not make a ton of sense for our business, but also the business already had a warehouse when we bought it. So…

Steve: Okay. Yeah, but just in terms of sales, right, people are more likely to buy the prime products, right?

Will: Yeah definitely true. But we actually– I would say maybe five percent of our business’s revenue comes through Amazon, so actually that business specifically we actually focus a lot on the professional market, professional hair stylist and things like that. So now there is much on Amazon.

Steve: So you are kind of more like a wholesaler, right, essentially?

Will: Yeah. So we are a distributor for those seven or eight brands like I talked about. I know this is getting a little confusing for your readers.

Steve: There is a lot of stuff. Yeah, maybe we should just focus on one thing.

Will: Yeah.

Steve: Let’s focus a little bit on just the importing process. You’ve done a lot of this, right?

Will: Yeah definitely.

Steve: So let start with some of the main challenges with importing and some of the misconceptions on how difficult it is, and let’s just go from there.

Will: Okay, cool sounds good. So I guess what does your audience really have trouble with just the process aids here.

Steve: Most of them are a little bit scared of importing.

Will: Okay.

Steve: And they have problems finding products to sell which is why I kind of asked you some of those questions. So if you can just kind of walk me through your process from start to end, just at a high level, and I’ll just ask you more specific questions as you are talking.

Will: Yeah definitely. So the first thing we really talk about is– for all of our clients and stuff like, the first thing we talk about is really kind of laying the foundation and really getting a good upper level view of what you are going to trying to do. Like, I said we always recommend people start really small, find a product, find a supplier, which I’ll talk about in a second, but in terms of the top level view of the concept, you are really just trying to find a good product, a good supplier, buy a sample from that supplier, sell that sample, doing that is going to alleviate 90% of the risk of the business. And then from there, you are going to get pretty much immediately, you know, if you buy three samples and they sell, you are going to know right away if you want to buy more units of that product or not.

Steve: So when you say sell, do you sell on eBay, Amazon?

Will: We typically recommend our clients to sell on eBay just because if you make a mistake on eBay, not only is the lower quality buyers on eBay that are less likely to skew you in the reviews and everything, but also if you get a bad review on eBay, they are not going to ban your account for one bad feedback, whereas Amazon if your first feedback on Amazon is bad, I’ve seen them close accounts for that many times.

So we definitely recommend starting on eBay just because you can mistakes there, but yeah. So that’s really the top level view of it. So the first step obviously is that product research deep dive, really figuring out. And like I said, the way I do this is to just pull out a spreadsheet, get a list of products on there and just go through Terapeak and start just putting data in the spreadsheet basically. You want– the things that I really look at are the sell-through ratio, and the sell-through ratio is a number that you can only get through Terapeak, and the sell-through ratio is basically going to show you not if there’s– you know, people are always scared of, oh there is competition, there is other people selling this product, so can I sell it?

Don’t be worried about competition, you know, competition is a good thing because if there is no competition that means that there is no market there and there is no money to compete for. So definitely don’t be scared of competition. We need to be scared of market saturation. Are there still new buyers coming in, and that’s really what matters. So the sell-through ratio is basically going to measure the market saturation if there is too much competition or too little competition.

And so basically we recommend that people go for products that have at least a 30% sell-through rate which basically means that for every 10 listings that go up on EBay, three of them get sold. So we recommend at least going for a 30% sell-through ratio, obviously the higher you can get the better. The most successful clients we have get 50, 60% sell-through ratio on their products. So that’s a really important number, your sell-through ratio, obviously your average sell price– and this is a question we get all the time.

So when you are going through Terapeak and looking, you know, putting your average revenue for selling the product, your average sell price, we always combine the average sell price and the shipping price and that will give you your total revenue. So you want to get the total revenue in there and then obviously the cost of the product and that’s really the only three things that you need in the beginning. And we go through– and like I said, get a 100 different products on a spreadsheet and just get a good comparative view of 100 different products and figure out, out of those 100 which two or three are really hot sellers, where is the opportunity at, and from there move forward.

Steve: Okay. And then your next stop is usually Alibaba or…?

Will: Yeah, exactly. So once you have those two or three products then start going at Alibaba looking for suppliers. Obviously you only want to look for gold suppliers, that’s really the number one requirement. So we recommend our clients go through Alibaba, obviously look for gold suppliers only. All the other things are just kind of cherries on top; you have things like supplier assessments and things like that. Gold supplier is really the only minimum requirement, so go through– find how much good gold suppliers and just go out and message two or three of them.

And we usually just go out and one little hack that we always teach our clients to do is to act like their own secretary. So never act like the boss of your own business because when you are talking to these suppliers– there is a weird thing in Chinese culture, if you are the boss of a business, they kind of would look down on you and your business if you were the one speaking to some secretary at their company.

So we found that by acting like your own boss, not only does it kind of put it on a level playing field, make you look like a bigger company and a bigger importer, but it also buys you a lot of flexibility in that you can say, “Hey this price is pretty good but I have to go back and talk to my boss. Hey my boss said that this didn’t work out, I’m really sorry.” So it allows you to retain the relationship while being a little bit more assertive.

Steve: Okay. That’s good advice.

Will: Yeah, that’s one thing that we always recommend. So yeah, reach out to these suppliers as your own secretary and say, “Hey, my boss is looking for a new supplier for this product, you know, we are a large– we have branches all over the country that sell this product and we are looking for a new manufacturer. Can you send us a sample of five or whatever?” And what will usually happens is they’ll usually send you like an excel spreadsheet which is basically a catalogue of a bunch of different products and price specks, and shipping specks and things like that.

And pretty much you just kind of grow through and analyze the pictures, kind of have conversations with the supplier and see how you feel about them, how much you trust them. And obviously if you are really on a budget, you can really start an importing business with a 100 or 150 bucks if you needed to. So if you are really on a budget, obviously just get one or two samples from one supplier, but ideally you can get two or three samples from two or three different suppliers and then you pretty much wait for those to come in. In terms of how these get shipped and everything, it’s really quite simple, you generally just ask the supplier hey, can you ship this for me? And they pretty much just ship it through their DHL account. And ironically it’s actually much cheaper for you to do it that way too because you can actually benefit from their bulk shipping discounts, their bulk box discounts, tape and everything.

Steve: So Will, how do you deal with– so we import for our online store and what happens is sometimes we get samples but they aren’t the same as the production run that we get. So how do you kind of get around that aspect, quality control? Does that make sense?

Will: Yeah definitely, so one problem that we see a lot of our clients running into is when they get their samples, they’ll have another company’s logo on it and then they can’t sell it. So usually the way to get around that is just to ask when you are getting those samples, just make sure you asked for a blank production run with no other product logo on there or anything. A lot of times we’ll tell people that we are actually going to stamp the logo on there ourselves, so it needs to be blank.

Steve: Okay. Typically when we get samples, it’s usually off of some old production run of someone else. That’s what I was asking.

Will: Yeah. That’s really the only good way to get around that that we found is just asking for a fresh one right off the line. A lot of times if you ask for one that’s unbranded, you know, completely blank, they’ll pretty much have to give you a new one because a lot of times they are only producing and when they have a logo to put on them. So that’s really the only that we found out other than just asking.

Steve: Okay. What is your tactic of getting around high MOQs or minimum order quantities?

Will: Typically just pushing. It really– a lot of it has to do with the perception that you create about yourself and your company. So a lot of it has to do with that shipping hack that or– sorry, that secretary hack that I talked about. You really need to act as if– so, you know, don’t go way over board and start– one of the big mistakes that I see people make all the time, is they start talking about MOQs right off the first order.

They start asking what’s the lowest MOQ possible, how low can you bring this MOQ? I wouldn’t do that, definitely act as if, you know, act as if you are this huge company with 200 branches and 6000 sales people in the US and you need– you got a sample of five of these silicon baking mats, but you have 200 locations with 6000 sales people so now you need a sample of 500 silicon baking mats so you can get those to your main location and send those out to your sales people all over the country, so they can try it in their markets.

So that’s really the best we’ve seen. It’s just act as if– you know, most people are willing to bring their MOQs down. You just need to convince them. So that’s probably the best way we’ve seen is– because that kind of alleviates a lot of the risk of– if you say we have this websites that sells 20,000 units a day, they can go easily check that, but if you say we have 200 physical locations in the US and people are physically going out and selling these products and we need to get your– these samples in the hands of our sales people all over the country, and MOQ of 5000 is not going to work, we need a sample order of 500. That’s really been the best way that we’ve seen, and again using the secretary hack and that too, so you are saying, you know, “Well boss– you know, I’m really sorry, but my boss said that this is the way it has to be.”

Steve: Okay. And in terms of just kind of navigating the difference vendors on Alibaba, do you have any tips on how to distinguish the good from the bad and what you look for?

Will: You know, like we’re talking about earlier, it used to be really like the Wild Wild Western in the early 2000s. Alibaba was just this crazy place where scammers were– it was a scammer paradise. So it’s really changed a lot since then and it’s recently– Alibaba went public I think three or four months ago, and I want to say it was the biggest appeal of all time. So Alibaba I think– they are just improving so much. I think their big goal right now is really making a safer place to shop, and I think their goal is to kind of permeate the US market, the American market. So I think we are going to see Alibaba become much, much more like Amazon in the future. So in terms of staying safe on there, it’s getting safer every day, right now it’s relatively safe.

Like I said, just going through and buying from gold suppliers most of the time, you are going to be safe at this point. But in terms of alleviating the risk of importing in general, any time you are– even with your sample order and definitely anytime you are doing a large order, you need to use some sort of third party financial protection. So whether it’s PayPal, whether it’s Escrow, most of the time we recommend that people start with PayPal for their first couple of sample orders, and then move to Escrow once they are making thousands, 2000, $10,000 orders.

But you know, you really have to have that third part financial protection because then if the product isn’t up to your standard, or you are not satisfied with it or if they do scam you then you actually have some repercussion. You have some way to go back and actually get that money back. So, that alone is going to alleviate most of the risk of scammers on there.

Steve: Have you used the Alibaba Escrow services before?

Will: Yeah I have. And they actually– it seems like just in the past few weeks they’ve really built it out. I think they are kind of rebranding it as Alipay now, so I think they are trying to really become the PayPal of international payments at this point. So it’s going to be really interesting to see them grow in the future and just– things like Aliexpress too, more and more– I meet random people now that are like, “You teach about Alibaba. I just bought, you know, my Halloween costume on Alibaba or Aliexpress.”

Steve: Interesting.

Will: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So it really is kind of starting to permeate the US culture and with how much money they just got from their IPO, give it another two years and I think we are really going to see some amazing growth out of them.

Steve: So at this point, let’s say I have some product ideas, I’ve gotten some samples; I’ve placed the bulk order, where do you typically sell your products? Do you go on Amazon first; do you establish your website? Like what’s your strategy after you have everything ready to go?

Will: So for your first sample, like I said, we always recommend eBay for the first sample.

Steve: Sure.

Will: Main reason being eBay has got really low quality buyers there, just kind of impulse buying, just kind of browsing and impulse buying. They are much more likely to leave good feedback and much less likely leave bad feedback, whereas Amazon buyers, you know, they are coming there to buy something, they are coming there because they need a fan and they want a fan with a great customer rating, and they want it in two days and they want it to work perfectly right out of the box.

So it’s just really much higher quality, much higher demands on Amazon but– so we recommend starting with eBay in terms of how to create the listing and everything. A lot of what we recommend is just going out there and copying what works already. So go out and find some listings that are working well, kind of make this weird amalgamation of it that is improving.

So build your listing like that and just sell the first few on eBay, and once you sell those first few samples, that too is going to alleviate a lot of the risk because what you’ll see a lot of times in importing is and where all the horror stories come from– because there are so many people that have stories about, oh I lost $1100 on importing, I lost $1500 on importing. Your first order doesn’t have to be that high. Most people assume that they have to buy 25, 50 of a product their first time, but you know, just buy three to five samples and sell those. Not only are you going to get to experiment with that supplier, you are also going to get to sell your product to actual customers with the actual expectations of your products.

So you’ll really get the true view of how your product’s quality is, if it’s really up to the standards of your customer, and you’ll also get the true sale price. It’s really easy to come up with really good margins in a spreadsheet, but you are never going to know what the actual sale price is, you are never going to know what you are actual revenue is until you go out there and actually sell it on the real open market, and there is no way to do that without samples. So just those first three to five samples, get them up on eBay, get them in and out the door as quick as possible, and that’s really going to get the ball rolling and then from that point it’s just getting that snow ball and keeping it going.

Steve: So assuming the eBay test passes, what is usually your next step? Do you start going to Amazon at that point and selling on Amazon? Do you start creating your own site? What is the ordering?

Will: Yeah, definitely. After eBay, after you know you really verified that the sample is going to work and the product is going to work, then we typically go back to the supplier and try to put in an order of 25 to 50.

Steve: Okay.

Will: And yeah, the next lowest hanging fruit usually is going to Amazon. Obviously it’s going to be different from product to product, but yeah definitely we recommend everyone at kind of that second stage start looking at Amazon, start trying to take advantage of Amazon because Amazon just gets so much traffic right now, you know, why not?

Steve: It’s almost like you can just put up anything at this point and it will sell. It’s kind of scary actually.

Will: Yeah, especially during the holiday season. We have a holiday jump start group right now, and I always talk to them about this concept of discounted risk. Any other time during the year, it’s still pretty risky to buy samples even if it’s three samples, five samples. There is still a chance that they are not going to sell, and the only time that’s really not true is during December. So anyone that’s starting importing in the month of December, early December you can get your products in the door and out the door in 20, 30 days and really verify your first products, verify it’s going to work and everything. Again it’s not nearly as risky as it usually is during December.

Steve: Absolutely. So I’m just curious and this is just based on running my own store. For us at least prices in China have been increasing dramatically as of late. I don’t know if you guys have been seeing the same thing, but are looking into other countries at this point?

Will: Yeah definitely. So for specifically for our cosmetics company and beauty company we’ve one supplier, one manufacturer in Taiwan which is basically China, and their prices have just gone through the roof in the past two years to the point where we might have to drop them. So yeah, we have seen the same exact thing and China’s economy in general, their wages are going up, in general the economy is really doing well over there. So I think what’s really starting to happen now is a lot of the reason that china was a manufacturing power house was because it had such low wages and it didn’t really have a middle class. For better or for worse, that’s one of the reasons.

So I think now since they are starting to kind of get into middle class and starting to become a more intelligent workers rather than manual worker, I think that whole industry is starting to kind of permeate into the rest of Asia. So I have seen places like Myanmar, places like Malaysia, all these places that are kind of surrounding China, Thailand, Cambodia, things like that– a lot of the actual manufacturing is starting to go out there now from what I’ve seen. And it’s good too because you can actually still find those same suppliers on Alibaba, it’s just a little bit tougher; they are not as well listed. But you can definitely filter down and find suppliers from any country there, so that does help.

Steve: Okay. Outside of Alibaba, are there any other places that you typically look for vendors?

Will: Just Google actually. So a lot of our client want to– even though we recommend against doing heavily regulated products, things like food or anything that you ingest pretty much, a lot of our customers decide that they want to go into this anyway. So for those people specifically we usually recommend that they import– source domestically. So we have like one client that is doing supplements, so things like Maca Powder, and things like that.

So to get around the requirements or all the red tape and everything and the regulations, we basically told them like you should just go on Google and start Googling Maca Powder white label or Maca Powder private label, Maca Powder wholesale and just going through and trying to find a domestic supplier that will be able to do this for you because then that domestic supplier is going have already gone through all the regulation, all the loopholes and everything.

So for people that are doing products like that we do recommend sourcing domestically and like I said, the way we do that is to typically just Google. A lot of the US based or I should say Western based private label manufacturers will have websites up and things like that, but they won’t be on Alibaba.

Steve: Okay. And then do you– when you are working with clients, do you actually go as far as– do you just primarily help them source, or do you actually help them get their brand off the ground as well?

Will: So we help to an extent, with the branding and the selling and everything. Right now our current mastermind group is actually specifically geared towards selling during the holidays and everything.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So yeah, not as much going through branding and everything, but definitely going through driving traffic, driving– especially the initial traffic, things like that.

Steve: Okay. And then it’s probably primarily through selling on Amazon. Is it accurate or…?

Will: Yeah. Most of our clients here make most of their money through Amazon and in terms of kind of like the third step– so we talked about getting the samples and getting your products up and eBay and just really sales channels first, and then kind of that second step would be ramping up your order sizes a little bit and starting to expand on the Amazon, and other established sales channels like that, taking advantage of those existing sales channels is really important. And then after you’ve kind of exhausted those two, all the other existing sales channels, then we really recommend that third step.

People start to build their own website, people build their own brand because branding and building your website really a different animal than just getting products and putting them up and letting someone else drive the traffic and convert it. You have to do– not only do you have to do everything you’ve been doing but now you actually have to do Amazon’s job too. You have to drive their traffic and convert the traffic and send it out so– and manage their customer relationship. So it really is a different animal: building your own website and building your own brand, and it’s the type of thing that you really have to go through those first two steps of building your business through existing sales channels first before you take on all that extra burden.

Steve: Okay, cool. Let’s see well what– I’ve been trying to think I mean you started at such a young age that our experience is just completely different. Are there any business books or any entrepreneurs in particular that have influenced you over the years?

Will: Yeah definitely. In terms of the people who’ve influenced me I’m sure a lot of the same people that have influenced you and your listeners. So a lot of the people in our market, people like Tim Farris, but yeah I mean people– Mark Cuban, for me specifically like I said my father is a really proficient entrepreneur, so I have a lot of respect for him. But yeah, in terms of books too my all time favorite book by far is ‘How to win friends and influence people,’ that’s the only one that I go back and re-read all the time. There is a really good book by a guy named Felix Dennis called How to get rich, and that’s a really good one too. He just has like a really vulgar way of teaching it.

Steve: That makes it entertaining I would imagine.

Will: Yeah definitely. He has one quote in there that has always stuck with me. He says, “If it flies, floats or fornicates rent it, it’s always cheaper. So he has a really good way of writing though. That’s a really good one for people who are just starting out that kind of need that inspiration coupled with that step by step action plan. He has a really good way of doing that.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of everything that you do related to importing and selling online, what are some of the online services that you use for your business that you just can’t live without?

Will: Specifically for importing, I mean our whole business really runs off QuickBooks, so QuickBooks has obviously been huge for us. But that’s really for– if I was just starting out again, my main goal is always to just keep it as simple as possible.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So in terms of tools and software and things like that, if I was just starting out, I would try to keep as many– keep it as simple as possible. So really the only things that you really, really need to get started in importing are Terapeak…

Steve: Alibaba.

Will: Alibaba, Amazon and eBay. Those four things really are all you need. And there is a lot of little tools that will help you manage inventory, that will help you optimize your listings once you start getting sales, that will track your sales and all sorts of things. But, it’s really easy to put the cart in front of the house and start thinking like– we get so many clients that before they even start looking for their first product, they are thinking like, “Well wait. What about this form 56-56 from the RIS, and what about CIFs from customs and how do I get this through customs and what do I do when my products get to the port? Do I just drive there and pick them up?”

It’s like there is so many questions that you can ask to complicate this process for yourself, but I really encourage listeners and anyone getting started in the importing and eCommerce or business in general. Don’t put the cart in front of the horse, you really have to think big and act small. So, you know, think big, have that big vision and everything, and then think like, what’s the smallest action I can possibly take to get there? And just one small step at a time just kind of build up and all the tools and everything, those will always be out there, those will make themselves apparent when they are actually going to solve a problem for you.

Steve: Awesome. That’s a really good advice Will and I wanted also to give you the opportunity to talk about Startup Brothers, and some of the courses and that sort of thing that you provide and where can people find you.

Will: Okay, awesome. Anyone can– like Steve said we really go all out in creating really actionable detailed, step by step guides on our blog. So check out Startupbros.com, check out all of our really in depths data driven guides and everything to see how you can copy what’s working for us in our business right now. And then in terms of what we are going to be doing, like I said, we have our current mastermind group is going to be closing up here in January 8th. So we are going to be launching a new importing gem start group, and basically we bring in a whole bunch of guest experts and things like that, people that have helped in my importing business and just kind of go through step by step, hold your hand and show you– go through as a group and kind of launch these importing businesses.

So this is going to be fourth time we are doing it, so we’ve gotten pretty good at this point. So definitely if you are interested in seeing our entire process A to Z, we have a free webinar in January 8th that will kind of show everything for free. So definitely be there.

Steve: Okay. Hopefully this will be recorded, I’m not sure this episode is going to air by then, but I’m sure you’ll have other webinars as well. I’ll link them up.

Will: Yeah definitely.

Steve: Hey, awesome Will. Really appreciate you coming on the show, great material, and great advice as always.

Will: Okay, awesome Steve. Yeah, I hope your listeners got a lot of value out of it. I know I’m kind of all over the place, so I hope there is some good tidbits in there for your listeners.

Steve: No-no-no. It was man, it was good.

Will: Awesome.

Steve: Cool, take care.

Will: Awesome. You too, thanks.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. Will has been buying and selling goods from China for a very long time and he is a seasoned eCommerce store owner and not only that, he’s also an incredible writer and he does a great job articulating his experiences. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode59, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you leave me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep my podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m also giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

How To Start A Business When You’re Clueless With No Money. Here’s What I’d Do…

$
0
0

Whenever I have a conversation about entrepreneurship, I often find that most people have a strong desire to start a business at some point in their life.

But here’s the thing. While the desire is there, it’s often the lack of confidence and the uncertainty of the outcome that prevents most people from taking serious action.

Start A Business

In fact, I would go as far as to say that most people are not willing to take any risk at all unless they are confident that they will succeed.

I was the exact same way. To be honest, selling handkerchiefs online still sounds completely ludicrous to me. And if you told me that I was going to make 6 figures blogging? I would have told you to get the heck out of town!

In fact, the mere premise of making significant money selling wedding hankies is so ridiculous that I’m often challenged by my readers as to whether my success was a direct result of luck and circumstance as opposed to skill.

Did I just happen to stumble upon a small niche that no one else was into? Did I just get lucky that no one was selling these types of linens online?

And the answer is yes. Luck certainly did play a part. It always does. But you have to put yourself out there in order to take advantage of it.

Today, I want to address the readers of MyWifeQuitHerJob.com who are currently on the sidelines with very little money. I want to address those of you who have no idea where to begin but want to start your own business someday.

How do you convince yourself to begin? How do you lay the groundwork for your future business if you don’t feel ready today? Here’s what I would do in your situation.

Start Gathering An Audience

Audience

Before I started my blog, I used to think that no one would care about what I had to say. And as a result, I had extremely low expectations when I first started writing for MyWifeQuitHerJob.com. To put things in perspective, I didn’t think that anyone would read my blog except for close friends.

But then something surprising happened. Very few of my friends took an interest in my writing. And instead, complete strangers started emailing me about my experiences and my philosophies on life.

I started having conversations with random people and these random people and I started to become friends. And before long, I had a bunch of regulars reading my blog.

Note: This was the complete opposite of what I expected to happen!

  • I expected many of my friends to take an interest in what I was up to.
  • I expected my friends to be 100% supportive of everything I was working on.
  • But I did NOT expect total strangers to care at all. After all, why would people care about some random Chinese dude on the Internet?

The truth is that people care about what you have to say! You just have to find the right people to talk to!

Put Yourself Out There

Guitar

But the only way to find these people is to put yourself out there!

Even if you have no money, there are a variety of ways to create a following.

For example, there’s this Asian kid I follow on YouTube who has over 1 million subscribers to his channel. His name is KevJumba.

Kevin started out by posting silly videos of himself dancing online. Then, he used a cheap webcam to record himself talking about his beliefs and his philosophies on life. Things started out slow but year after year, he started gathering more and more followers to his channel.

And over time, he developed a huge following. Because of YouTube, he now makes a living creating his own films and producing his own movies!

Here’s one of his very early videos below. As you can tell, there’s nothing crazy about it. The quality of video isn’t amazing. But the guy put himself out there!

Here’s the thing. Kevin was only 18 years old when I started watching him online. And you would think that a 30 year old dude would have no interest in what an 18 year old would have to say. But Kevin was spunky, funny and I liked his attitude.

Not only that, but the reason I followed Kevin had nothing to do with the production quality of his videos (which were pretty bad early on). There was just something about him that resonated with me and I wanted to know what he was up to.

This is exactly what you need to do!

Choose Your Medium

Even if you have no clue what business you want to start later on in life and even if you have no money, you need to put yourself out there.

I started MyWifeQuitHerJob.com by writing on a consistent schedule about life, family and ecommerce. People found me via search, social media, word of mouth and my readership gradually grew over time to where it is today.

Once I developed an audience, making money became an afterthought.

When you have a large group of raving fans interested in what you have to say, the money will come. Trust me on that.

The hard part is finding and gathering your fans.

Today, we live in a day and age where you have lots of options depending on what you want to do. I personally chose to start a blog but there are many other low cost options to choose from.

Gather And Retain Your Followers

presentation

Once you’ve developed your fan base, it is essential to retain them as you continue to build your brand.

In the case of MyWifeQuitHerJob.com, 99% of my early readers would come, read a single article, and then leave forever. So instead of missing out on a potential regular, I started gathering email addresses using a service called Aweber.

In return for a reader’s email address, I would give away a free 6 day mini course on ecommerce. And 9 times out of 10, that reader would stick around after the mini course to check out my new articles and updates.

In fact, I have readers on my blog that have stuck with me for over 5 years(you know who you are) and I’m very thankful!

The key is to retain your existing audience while simultaneously attracting new fans. This way, your audience count has no where to go except up.

One thing that I like to tell my friends is that my blog is like a stock that only increases in value. As long as I keep doing what I’m doing, it can only get better, not worse.

I’ve Got An Audience Now So What?

Once you’ve gathered a small group of raving fans is when the fun begins. And it is infinitely easier to start a business when you already have an established base of potential leads.

Using my blog as an example, if I ever wanted to develop an ecommerce plugin for Shopify or BigCommerce, I could instantly gather a small user base of customers by sending word out to my email list and blog.

I could also leverage my audience to gather ideas for products to sell even if I had no idea what to create. The possibilities are endless!

But none of these fun things can happen if you don’t have an audience. So if you take away anything from this post, please remember this…

Start creating something today and put yourself out there!

It doesn’t have to be anything fancy. Take your smart phone and start recording videos about your philosophies on life. Find something that you are good at and start talking about it. Put together some tutorials about a recent skill you have acquired!

At first, you will be skeptical that anyone will be interested in what you have to say. But there is always someone out there who will care. You just have to find the right audience. (I’ll bet KevJumba had no idea that he’d be attracting people almost twice his age to his YouTube channel).

The point is that you’ll never know unless you try.

Start gathering an audience now and you will have the courage to start your own business someday. I guarantee it!

photo credit: Graveyard Lemonade Stand Live with Regis and Kelly, NYC, 9/10/08 – 26 of 63 Am7 rally clegg 4

MWQHJ 060: Brad DeGraw On How To Maximize Your Sales On Amazon

$
0
0

Brad Degraw

Brad DeGraw is my go to guy when it comes to selling on Amazon. Not only does he run many of his own businesses using FBA, but he also helps small to mid size companies establish their online presence as well.

In this episode, Brad gives us an inside scoop on all of the tips and tricks he uses to maximize his sales on Amazon. Do not miss this episode and be sure to check out Brad’s site at AZDoneForYou.com.

Quick Note: At the time of the recording Brad thought that his new website AmazonSherpa.com would be complete but unfortunately there were some delays. Please visit AZDoneForYou.com instead. Thanks!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to create a profitable business on Amazon
  • Why you should be selling on Amazon today
  • The best way to sell depending on your budget
  • How to find profitable products to sell
  • Why Brad likes to source domestically at first
  • The components to a high converting Amazon listing
  • Brad’s tricks for pricing products on Amazon
  • How to combat Amazon fraud

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Brad DeGraw on the show. Now Brad is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel live conference and I’m really happy to have met the guy. Brad is probably the most knowledgeable person I know when it comes to selling on Amazon.

Now, not only has he published a successful book on the topic called The FBA Hot List piece also well know as an Amazon selling coach, and today he’s actually going to tell us his story and educate us on how to take a product and sell it on Amazon successfully. And with that welcome to the show, Brad, super happy to have you today.

Brad: Thanks Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, and so Brad, you know, tell us the back story because I actually looked online for it and I couldn’t find it. How did you get into E-commerce and how did you get into this whole Amazon selling game.

Brad: So for me I had no background in online sales when I got started. I made my money on the phone. I did phone sales, I sold buildings over the phone, and that’s a real thing, you can sell buildings over the phone with people you’ve never met before.

Steve: Interesting, cold calling a regular person to sell a building?

Brad: Yeah, it was warmly.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So, we have in bound calls and ironically the buildings we sold didn’t even exist. It was not a scam, we sold them pre-engineered buildings. So they came to us with an idea, we took the idea, we got them hot and bothered, and we sold them a future building.
Steve: Okay.

Brad: And after getting fired from that I took my hand with selling consultant over the phone, so business consulting, and that was fantastic again until I got fired.

Steve: So I get trend here, Brad.

Brad: That’s when the light bulb went off, it’s– I know how to provide value for people. I know how to bring in revenue; I just maybe don’t know how to get along with the owner and sometimes the owner’s wives. Maybe I should just be the owner.

So that’s how I got my start in Ecommerce, you know I read a book and I just got started with a $100 and a Wi-Fi connection said, if I’m going to fail I’ll probably fail within the first two weeks and it’s only going to cost me a $100, and it worked. Sure enough you can buy– at the time I was doing arbitrage, which is buying low and selling high.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So I sold other peoples brands and that worked, made great money, did that for a few years and realized, you know what it’s time to really start selling my own brands. I don’t like to compete and price erosion just doesn’t work for me.

Steve: Aha.

Brad: And that’s when I learned that I could sell my own brand of products. First I started bundling other people’s products to create unique skews, and then I went out to the manufactures. They were happy to sell me things directly with my label on it.

Steve: Uhh.

Brad: And now we make most of our money working directly with manufactures.

Steve: Okay, and this is all on Amazon that you’ve mentioned so far, right?

Brad: And this is all on Amazon.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: It’s the easiest place to get started. It’s not that you can’t make fantastic money beyond Amazon, but it’s the best place to get started.

Steve: Okay, so the motivations for just selling on Amazon was, that was your primary source of income at the time because you got fired from your jobs, is that?

Brad: Yeah, exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: The thing is I didn’t know how to build websites and put together hosting and auto responders. None of that, I’m not very technical.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So this was the place where I could simply upload the information, the pictures on Amazon. If you are selling other peoples brands, everything is already there. You just enter your quantity and your price and you make money. Now…

Steve: Okay so– oh sorry go on.

Brad: Well, it gets more complicated than that once you are launching your own brands, but that was an easy place to get some traction.

Steve: So is that a place where you recommend that people get started selling other peoples products first on Amazon, or do you recommend that they just kind of jump into selling their own stuff?

Brad: It depends on your budget, if you only have a 100 dollars and a Wi-Fi connection, go ahead and start with what we call arbitrage, buying low selling high. Go to any drug store, hit the clearance aisle, buy something for 90% off, sell it for four retailer more. That’s an easy way to get started. However if you already have a few thousand dollars, that you can get started, go ahead and start looking to sell your own brands.

Steve: Okay, and then just as an example so I run a class and often times they get hung up on what they want to sell so I thought it would be useful to go over some of the stuff that you’ve sold and how you’ve come up with the idea to sell those specific products

Brad: Sure and can I just tweak the question a bit is because when I find when people come to me and say that they don’t know what to sell, what that really means is that I don’t really understand my market. Because when you really understand your market, then the products are easy.

So if we take it back one step and no one is teaching this, which is a shame, we teach how to have a market based business rather than a product based business. What that means is that a market is a group of people who are passionate about spending money on a particular problem or product. That’s worth writing down.

When you have your market, and a market can be Moms. So I’m a Dad and it’s almost like saying. I’ll spend any amount of money that shows and proves that I’m the best Dad. For example, I spent 180 dollars to buy flash cards to help my son read. At six months, he could read elephant. And it wasn’t so much that he could read elephant, it was that I paid 180 dollars because only the best Dad in the world would spend that kind of money. I could have easily printed out the flash cards on my printer.

A couple other good markets to target come to mind, Moms, Dads, kids, pet owners. People with health issues. People who want their straight hair to be curly and vice versa.

Steve: Could I ask you a side question before we continue? How does mixing selling on Amazon versus having your own online store website come together in the way you’ve advised people to do things.

Brad: Well, it really depends on your resources. For me I didn’t know how to build websites.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Or drive traffic, so I stuck with Amazon longer. Now if you already have a background in building websites, and hosting and traffic methods, then you may go ahead and make the transition sooner, but here is what I teach.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: We show people first build your empire on Amazon and then as soon as you have something worth protecting, you need that Amazon proof your market. So use Amazon because it comes with all the traffic and credibility and then you can build your own in parallel to that. So as soon as it’s worth protecting, and it’s covering your bills and then some, go ahead and start diversifying.

Steve: Excellent, that’s actually a strategy that I’m transitioning to in my class. It will be very interesting; we’ll get into that a little bit later.

Brad: Awesome.

Steve: Sorry I interrupted you though. So we were still talking about finding a market and then products that serve that market. So what is kind of– what are some of your guidelines in doing so?

Brad: So first thing is, you want to make sure that there is already money being spent there.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: It’s– we are trying to compress time, some of the values that we teach is you have to compress time, minimize your risk and then scale up on your winners. If you are following that system, then the first thing you need to do is figure out your market, after that you figure out maybe it’s pet owners.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Then you figure out where they are spending their money online. So you can type in if– let’s see, Chihuahua owners.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So you just type in Chihuahua on Amazon and see what comes up, or Chihuahua, color, pet, products, and you see what are the best selling products there. Now that you see the best selling Chihuahua color, you read the one, two, and three star reviews, and again we are teaching something here that’s a little bit against the traditional thought, but is the most effective way to do it.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: After you find the number one best selling products, you do not make a me too product, you do not copy it. What you do is you read those one, two, and three star reviews and you find out how can you build a better mouse trap? Where are people’s missed expectations? And when you understand where their missed expectations are, you can make a better product. Does that make sense?

Steve: It does, absolutely. That also implies however that you would need to be able to manufacture your own products, is that accurate?

Brad: Yes and no, I don’t own any manufacturing equipment. Most products with name brands on them, those companies don’t own their manufacturing equipments either. You have a manufacturing market and you put your branding on it or you can even put your branding in on it afterwards, put it on the packaging.

Steve: Okay, it’s just in my experience, when you want to make customizations to a product that you are having manufactured overseas, for example, the minimum order quantities tend to be a lot higher. So using your methodology, what would be some– what would be the estimated order investment that you would have to make to describe the methodology that you outlined?

Brad: Well, and if you haven’t notice by now, I’m a little bit of a contrarian.

Steve: Okay

Brad: When everyone else says start overseas manufacturing, I do the opposite, I say start domestic. If you are selling product here in the States, you probably need to have a manufacturing care in the states and the same goes with Europe.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: If you are selling in Europe, have it made in Europe and your minimal orders go down. You don’t have to have a palette or a shipping container. So half the products I’ve ever gotten start with were under a 1,000 dollars and the other half were beyond 35,000. So-

Steve: That’s very interesting Brad, yeah.

Brad: It’s not that big of a deal financial wise. The reason why you want to start domestic, and again this goes against a lot of the gurus out there. One, your minimums can be much lower. Your communication is much easier, but most importantly, the size of your shipping time is much-much less. You can ship it ground and it’s a lot cheaper than shipping it air. You can build the relationship, it’s easier to build a relationship with folks here in the same time zones, in the same culture, it’s much-much easier, and that relationship will save your neck. It’s not all about the margin; you have to make money, but building that relationship will save you more often that you can imagine.

Steve: I would tend to agree with you Brad. So a lot of times what we do know is we actually have prototypes made in the US just because the whole designing, communication process will be really miserable doing that with someone overseas, and then once we have that prototype then we actually go on and actually have something made.

Brad: Excellent, Yap.

Steve: So, just curious though, where do you find your vendors in the US?

Brad: We use a service called reference USA, it’s free if you have a library card or you can pay for it, it’s called info USA, is the pay version.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And what that is, is that’s a data base of data bases. You can find anything there. So if you want a plastic bottle manufacturer, you type in plastic bottle manufacturer and you can search by region, by state, by area, and you’d be surprised at how many manufacturers are in the United States and want to have your business, it’s insane.

Steve: And then what– this is going to be a very vague question, but what is the order of– what is the difference in price typically between getting something made in the US versus something equivalent in Asia with higher minimum order quantities?

Brad: It really depends on the labor. The labor is where you are going to see, the big cost differential.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So plastic is plastic, all over the world is basically the same price.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: It’s how much labor that goes into it is your real increase in cost, so if you could on your first few products, try to find something that there is not a lot of moving products and pieces to it, there is not a lot of technology, it’s a real low risk winner.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And then as you scale up then you can have more complicated, more labor intense products.

Steve: Okay, do you have any example of that that you could you use to illustrate?

Brad: Sure, you know Rocco & Roxie is a product I like to put out as a sacrificial lamb.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: That’s not one of my products; it’s not one of my clients. With dealers it’s a pet odor spray, so your dog has a little accident in the house, you spray this and you know it doesn’t stink and the stains come out. So there is not a lot to it, it’s basically a disinfectant perfume in a bottle, no moving parts and well, the sprayer is a moving part of the piece, but it’s a bottle, it’s a sprayer and it’s fluid.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Not a lot to it, you can’t fail.

Steve: And is that fluid– is that something they design themselves or is that a white label product?

Brad: I don’t think I’m letting any cats out of the bag when I say most the products have the same ingredients and formulas.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So yeah, what you do is– on this example you’d read the one, two and three star reviews, you’d find out that people hate the smell of this particular product, you call the manufacturers and you say, hey listen, I know you do pet odor sprays, I’d like one that smells like lemons or anything. I want it to smell like apple cider, can you do that? And chances are they do, the already have that technology, they already have a research and development department and it’s just a matter of saying, that’s what I want and they’ll do that for you.

Steve: Okay, so you are saying that I could actually contact the makers of that odor spray and then have them formulate my own concoction for sale?

Brad: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay, and what would be hypothetically some of the minimum order quantities I would have to purchase for something like that?

Brad: Most of the time I’m able to get it under 200, 250.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So it depends on how many fit in a case, what the configuration is. Worst case scenario you are looking at 500 units, but I can’t remember the last time I had to order 500 units for a minimum first order.

Steve: Okay, and this all in the US so it could just be delivered with ground shipping, right?

Brad: Exactly, and so that’s much-much affordable. They probably have their own account or you can use your account.

Steve: Okay, and so now that I have my product and I have– so hypothetically speaking I have already done the research on Amazon that this pet order spray is a good selling product, and I have gone through the one or two star reviews and I have found out that people don’t like the odor so the I formulate my own concoction, what is the next step?

Brad: Next step is create your Amazon listing.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So you want to make sure the listing can be seen, and there is two dances that you are doing. One is with the search box and the other is with the actual human eye balls. You have to be appealing to both.

Steve: So we want to have great images, high quality, professionally taken– don’t use your iPhone, actually have a photographer do it. You want a title that is key worked rich, and when I say key word rich don’t duplicate it, don’t put that odor-odor-odor-odor. Once is enough.

In Amazon key word density doesn’t mean anything, so don’t duplicate your key words, put most of your high end relevant traffic key words at the front of the title, don’t put your brand on trial, Brads pet owner because that’s– no one is looking for that, the search posts will think you are invisible.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And then hire a copy writer, if you are not one hire one, that’s the easiest way to do it. You are looking at two to three hundred bucks there. They’ll put your title, they’ll put your description, your bullets, all the benefits, it’s huge, it’s worth it. This is going to encourage your conversion rates.

Steve: Okay, I have actually been experimenting with different product descriptions and what not with some of my listings. I noticed that by far, I think the photos make the biggest difference for conversions, because the description is kind of buried down below.

Brad: Yeah, I totally agree. Amazon customers have been trained. They are hungry buyers, they want to do a key word search, whatever is in the top half the first page, they click through based on the image, your click through rate is based on the images. So not only do you want to have a good looking image, it needs to be compelling, and when I say compelling, it can’t just be a hero shot just with the product standing there with its chest popped out. You need to tell a little bit of a story.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So open a loop is another way to put it. Have a story started so if it’s something that can be worn, have a person– have it on a person, have the person in motion using it, have a compelling look on her face. It could be disgusted, it could be excitement, it could be curiosity, get them to click through.

Steve: Interesting, so in this case of pet odor spray would you have something stinky maybe in the picture and then I don’t know, human with their facial expressions, I don’t know.

Brad: Well, I found that humor doesn’t necessarily compel people to buy.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: We’ve tested that, but pictures of pets and babies do really-really well.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So you could have a picture of the pet looking all sad, you can have them looking all happy. Have an emotional pet there and of course a picture of the product, so you can have it as if you are spraying right behind the dog, yeah definitely.

Steve: So I was just curious you know, Amazon has some guidelines through their photos, words just suppose to be their product on a white background, how do you get around those guidelines?

Brad: So, some of the things we teach are what we call grey hat, and just so every one hears this very-very clear, white hats are the good help cowboys and the bad cowboys are the ones who wear the black hats. White hat means every rule is followed not just to the letter but also to the intent of the rules. Black hat is where people get deceived, we don’t do black hat, we don’t teach it, we run away from it and try to correct people every time we can. Amazon’s cardinal rule is no customer should ever feel deceived, whether you meant it or not, if someone feels deceived you could loose your entire business.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So we stay away from that. But a grey hat is where we like to play and that’s where we do go against the Amazon terms of service, but we stay within the intent. Amazon’s intent is to match up people who want to buy stuff with people who want to sell stuff, that’s all Amazon is, it’s a search engine. So we will do things like make compelling images, we will do things like put line spacing in the product description, or bolding the fonts, technically those are against the rules but we do it because it helps the buying experience.

Steve: Okay, So what are some of your tips or your grey hat tips when it comes to writing compelling product descriptions?

Brad: So product descriptions, forget about the technical things. No one cares that it is 32 ounces, no one wakes up and says man, I really wish I had 32 ounces, they wish they had the solution. So whatever you are selling sell the experience, sell the emotions. So there is three ways to market a product, you have what the thing is, what the thing does, and then who it’s for.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: If you are taking notes you need to write that down, what the thing is, what the thing does and who it is for. Your key word strategy is your copy; everything needs to fall into one of these three categories, because you have to be consistent.

Now what we found is the third option is where the premium sales are. Nobody cares that salt is salt, nobody cares that salt is salty, but what they do want is to enhance their culinary experience, and so we talk about their day to day issues, about what is going on in this persons life. Why they would even need this product and where they are from where they want to be. We bridge that gap and that’s why the transactions comes in so frequently, is because helping people live a whole new life from where they are in real life to where they want to be on Facebook, that’s where our product comes in.

Steve: Do you have…

Brad: Does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. Do you have any examples, maybe if you don’t have these on hand I could just post links to them maybe after we are done, just as an example of very compelling copy that creates an experience.

Brad: Yeah, just pull out the Rocco & Roxie example.

Steve: Okay, I’ll definitely link to that.

Brad: They are doing a really compelling day to day. They are not talking about this once in a life time thing that happened. It’s just a day to day– oh man, it’s Friday the boss made your work late and you got stuck in traffic and all these things happen, and your best friend had an accident in the house, don’t worry we are here to save the day, boom. So yes, they don’t care what it’s made out of, they don’t care, they just care that it saves the day.

Steve: Awesome. So let’s assume now that we have the photos down, we have a compelling product description, it’s still at this point just a brand new listing on Amazon. So are there any tips that you have to drive traffic and then how does kind of the whole pricing thing come into play. Do you play any tricks with pricing at all?

Brad: Oh, yeah, pricing is a fun game to play and you are never done.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So what we found is changing the price helps conversions and that may sound strange but it works, test it and you will see that it works for you, and it doesn’t matter whether we go up or down, changing the price works. So you can go up or down pennies or tens of dollars, it doesn’t matter, you will see an increase in conversion.

Steve: Can you elaborate on that a little bit, it just…

Brad: So yeah, let’s say you are selling the product at 20 bucks 19.99, lowering it to 19.95 on Sunday and raising it to 19.99 on Wednesday you will see a spiking conversions, and it’s because people put it in their cart and it’s also called cart abandonment. The door bell rings, the dog barks, the baby cries, something happens and they are not able to complete the transaction and then they are there later looking you know, they should be working on something and they are distracted shopping on Amazon, Amazon says wow, the price on this changed, do you want to buy this, and that little, that little inspiration, that little input forces some people to buy and others not to, but you will see in overall conversion in– increase in conversion just because of that.

Steve: That is very interesting, I’ll have to go and try that, okay. Now– oh, sorry go on.

Brad: One more thing on pricing, we’ve tested the last digits, so 99, 95, 88, 77 and 50 are the best converting prices, so, if you are going to compare $35 flat to 35.99, 35.99 will outsell 35 flat.

Steve: Interesting, what about the 88 and the 77 and the 50?

Brad: Those all convert really well and those will also exceed the flat numbers or random like 35.23, 35.50 will still out sell it.

Steve: Okay, and do you actually recommend pricing your products very low in the beginning to generate some quick sales and reviews?

Brad: I like to keep my prices high and then do promotion codes.

Steve: Uh okay, can you walk me through that process?

Brad: So yeah, let’s say you are selling a product for $40, something to get free shipping. So between 35 and 40 dollars is kind of a sweet spot. I want to say, even if I could afford to sell it at $20 and make a healthy margin, I want to sell it at 40, I want to go for premium, because you have already done this homework and if this is truly a product that has an emotional response from people and you are tying in to that emotional response, the price doesn’t even matter, it really doesn’t.

So start high and then reach out to your network, maybe it’s your friends, your families, your– the other coaching students that you are working with, do a promotion, you can do it at half off, you can do it for a dollar, you can do it for free. Get some sales, get some verified reviews. This is important for your credibility. You want user generated content. So those could be reviews, those could be customer questions and answers, those could be votes, those could be customer images. Make sure that you get some user content before you go and start running ads.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And then as you get some traction, Amazon will understand what your product is and who it it’s for because of the traffic. Amazon algorithms is sensitive to traffic patterns. This is huge, so what you can do is once you have few reviews and this looks like a product people want to buy, you can click on the number one bestselling product and then back to yours. It doesn’t have to be the same competing product, it can be irrelevant. If you are dealing punching gloves, click on the number one bestselling punching bag and then over to your listing and the hardware and the magazines and the foot wares and the pants back to your product, and now Amazon algorithms starts to recognize that.

Steve: Does that imply then that if I were to include a link to one of my Amazon products for example in one of my email new letters that goes out, and I just had a whole bunch of traffic over to my Amazon listing, would that affect the search results?

Brad: It depends on what kind of link you sent.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: We call it Amazon’s magic tail, so if you do a search on Amazon, the key word search and then you get to your page and you use that entire URL, the whole thing, it includes on the far right it says REF equals, and then it’ll have page number, position number, unique time stamps, key words, equal, patch plus order plus fray. If you use that whole thing yes, that would be huge, you got great value out there, now if just copied and paste, if you were in seller central and you clicked on it through there, you lose all of amazons magic tail, you lose that tracking code, that REF equals. REF equals is the bread crumbs of how did we get here, does that make sense?

Steve: Okay so to summarize basically, you are taking the key word portion of the search query in Amazon, and you are driving traffic to that to kind of tell Amazon that people are using that key word to find your product.

Brad: Yes, they look super organic.

Steve: And does the conversion rate matter? I would think that if you drove a bunch of traffic that way and people didn’t buy that would reflect negatively on your listing, right.

Brad: Honestly there is this myth that conversion rate is a big deal for the algorithm. We’ve tested it to the X factor. We went way overboard testing this and we found that that’s just a myth, conversion rate does not affect your search position.

Steve: Interesting, okay. So Brad so just try and focus the discussion here, so I got a brand new product, I put it on, is the first thing that you do is you put some promotional codes on and get some reviews, is that the first step?

Brad: Yeah, get some reviews on it, verified purchase reviews, you can’t tell people what to say, but tell them that you are looking for an honest review and if there is an issue to contact you privately and directly. So this is still legitimate, this is still within Amazon’s terms of service.

Steve: We have the listing looking sexy. Any human eye ball that sees it, it say man why wouldn’t I buy this, why wouldn’t I buy two. Now it’s also time to also use Amazon ads, responsive listings.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Amazon ads are really-really cheap, I mean we are talking nickels and dimes and they convert really well, double digits conversion. Then it’s also time to go ahead and go beyond Amazon, go ahead and see what your natural plateau is on the Amazon for a week or two and then move in to Facebook, Pintrest, anywhere else that you can get some traction.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: I like the deal sites, that wallet, slick deals.

Steve: Aha, okay.

Brad: Those are nice and so that’s another place for you to put it for like half off. Do another half off code and you can– not with your personal account, have someone else do it on their account, make it look organic, don’t just the first post on day one brand new user put up there. Season that account a little bit, like some other stuff, put some key mark clients deal up there, really try to make this look as organic as possible.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And you will be amazed at what you can get from these deal sites, it will be insane, and that brings us to another thing, don’t sell out of your inventory, do not run out of stock. Raise your price through the roof, buy that at 10X if you have to, just don’t run out of inventory.

Steve: Uh, okay, and so, regarding the Amazon ads, that’s paper click, is that correct?

Brad: Yes, yap.

Steve: And you are saying that the– it’s just like on the order of nickels and dimes per click and the then conversion rate is really high, so it’s really a no brainer to run those.

Brad: It’s a no brainer. That’s– we call it day two activities, it could be week two for you but don’t just put a listing and stop, these are the things that you do on the next day when you show up to work. So you’ll get your hands on ads going, you’ll do your traffic patterns, you make sure that you have some engineers– engineered reviews and again you are not writing the reviews, but you are just making sure friendly people who are willing do to it are the first in line.

Steve: Okay, got it, and at some point there is enough inertia that the sales will start generating their own organic reviews, is it?

Brad: Absolutely, you can do a few things, there are, there are services, Feedback Five is one of them, Feedback Genius is another. They will do your Amazon messages for you, so for examples we do a three message campaign. So as soon as someone orders we say hey, thanks for your order, you are smart, you are safe, it’s okay, welcome to the family, because the moment someone clicks the button all they know is they spend money, but they don’t have anything to show for it, so there is a little bit of vulnerability.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And the whole thing we are trying to do with Ecommerce, is eliminate that feeling of vulnerability, we are trying to build that trust. So we let them know here is your order number, it’s going to be shipped to you right away, welcome to the family, you are going to be so happy, by the way if you need anything, reach out for our store record. That is message one. We are not asking for anything. Message two is hey, your product is about to deliver or just delivered, either way you want to set it up; it’s about the same process.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: If you have any issues, if the box is damaged, if it’s not exactly what you expected and more, please reach out to us, and again it’s just service-service-service.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And then the third one if they are happy you can ask for a review, you can ask for referrals, you can really put your acts together by the third one, but you really want to show service first.

Steve: Okay, and typically in practice, what percentage of the people who buy actually bother to leave a review?

Brad: It’s low.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Single digits.

Steve: Okay, single digits, okay-okay. That’s what I’m getting, I think it’s like 1% or something so I was just curious if that was on…

Brad: It really depends on the market and their motivation for buying. You know if you are doing something, sex toys that maybe they don’t want their minister to see their review, they may not be so willing to do it but yeah, you are going to look at single digits, somewhere between one and five is realistic.

Steve: Okay-okay, and then, okay so we’ve done that we are starting to go through the deal sites, at some point when in this whole process do you start creating your own site? Like when do you start protecting your moat like we talked about earlier?

Brad: Once it’s something you start to brag to your friends about, hey listen, I’ve got a business that pays for my boat, or whenever it’s something you would cry for, if it would make you cry that you lost it, now it’s time to protect it.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So now you can do a few a things, you can– you don’t have any website experience and you are not comfortable there, go ahead and start your next platform as e-Bay or Open Sky or Racket Top. Go ahead and start maybe shifting to other platforms, so you are a little bit Amazon resilient. If you do have some website experience, just go ahead and do, I mean there is Shopify and Bigcommerce, there is not a lot, it’s just plug and play right there. You can do this without a whole lot of stress.

Steve: And is there like a way that you can actually somehow get your Amazon customers over to your own property?

Brad: That is a sensitive topic, the answer is yes, but you have to thread the needle. So you could do that with– the old school way is registering the product, hey we will give you a lifetime warranty, you just need to register, or we will give you a free refill just you know, give us your information. We will give you a bonus, a free E-book, a recipe guide, a care kit, just come over here. So you can do that with QR codes and the images are products, inserts are fantastic, put it in a box. Nobody has to see about the customer, following up with them by mail, by phone and discreetly by Amazon message service is an option.

Steve: Okay. How do you get their phone information and what not.

Brad: Amazon gives that to you in the orders.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: You just click on the orders and you will have their phone numbers.

Steve: Uh okay, I guess I have not tried that yet.

Brad: And again be very-very discreet depending on what your product is. If it’s a pregnancy issue, the teenage daughter may have got it, it might not be a legitimate, just be very-very conscious of who the people are and why they bought it because you– if you are not very-very cautious, you can make some people very upset.

Steve: Okay. It’s hilarious Brad, these examples you keep bringing up kind of implies that you sold products, like a wide variety of products that are really random.

Brad: Yes-yes, I have learned all these the hard way so.

Steve: All right cool, so at that point things are going smooth and then we started on site and we were just kind of steering stuff over, what are some other tactics that you use to kind of further extend your moat, your Amazon moat?

Brad: Well, you’ve done what you need to do now, now you’ve proven your market and like you said it’s about compressing time, eliminating risk, now it’s time to scale up because as you have your own sites and other platforms, you are going to have better margins now. So now you scale up, buy traffic, hire professionals, don’t just go take another F course on how to do Facebook ads. Just hire someone to do it as long as it’s profitable, you are in the money.

Steve: Okay, and then you have a couple of options. We like to– once we get into the top 20, we knock off our own brands, so we will be our own competitions. So now we take up half of the top 20 rather that just focusing on the number one spot.

So you can duplicate your own success or you can pivot and do relevant products. If you are doing baby products, well those babies turn into infants and those infants turn into preschoolers and as preschoolers turn into schoolers and just chase that market, because whatever the market is, whatever that problem or fantasy, it doesn’t go away. Throughout life they are always going to have that. So keep selling it.

Steve: So given– you mentioned margins, given that Amazon takes a pretty hefty fee especially if you use fulfilled buy, what are some of the margins that you recommend before even thinking about selling on Amazon.

Brad: Minimum five X, so when I say five X that means if you bought it for five dollars, you need to be selling it for twenty five dollars.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And ideally you’d aim more for 10X, so if you buy it for five you are selling it for 50. That’s a healthy place to be because now you can scale the business. If you can’t afford to advertise, then you don’t have a scalable business, which means you probably can’t sell it; it’s not worth a whole lot to anyone else but you.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And by the time it shrinks, if you have new competition that comes in and it erodes the prices, by the time you get to three X, it’s time to look at moving on.

Steve: Interesting, okay, and so manufacturing stuff in the US you can still see those margins?

Brad: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And another thing, just to dial into this is a concern I hear all the time, you know I’m not making enough time, you know. I’m not making enough money if I start with that, it’s okay, your first production run is just to eliminate the risk. I have made stuff for $16 a unit and sold it for five on the first production run, and that’s losing money, a lot of money, but I wanted to prove the market because I knew as I could scale, that I could maximize my margin on the next production runs, it’s that important.

Steve: Okay, and then along the way you are garnering reviews, I mean you are still getting value out of your sales, right?

Brad: Exactly.

Steve: So, Okay. Let’s see, what else is there to talk about? I had a couple of questions for you just on Amazon fraud.

Brad: Sure.

Steve: A lot of people are copying listings, copying photos, and what not, how do you combat all those things?

Brad: Well the first thing we do is we send them a scary letter, so that works about a third of the time, hey you are a bad guy, this is against the rules, this is against the law, this is against whatever. That will work, one in three will actually disappear, and they will stop bothering you. That other two out of three times we go ahead and buy out their inventory and then we complain to Amazon saying, listen, I’m highly concerned that this inventory may not be legitimate and for the customer’s best interest. Amazon only cares about the customer and in the customers best interest I’d love you to look into it, we’ve already bought the inventory and we’ll be sending you an update, I just wanted to get the case– the ball rolling and the case started now.

So document everything and then one of two things is going to happen, you are going to see that the inventory is exactly what it was supposed to be, which case you have a leak at your manufacturing level, or it’s something completely different, and now you have a legitimate case against them. So either way you just kind of follow up with whatever your reality is once the merchandize gets delivered.

Steve: How important is it to register your brand on Amazon?

Brad: Very, that’s another day two or week two activity. So once you have a product up, go ahead, and get registered. It may be three or four emails back and forth to Amazon, that’s what we found. It doesn’t matter what shift, who it is, they will always ask for something a little bit different but by the fourth time we say is this everything you need? Normally by about the fourth time they approve it.

Steve: Okay, I have just noticed some stories on some of the Amazon forums that despite having your brand, people still manage to use you know, use your skill and try to hijack your listing as well, but I imagine the safe guards are a little higher once you have your brand registered, right?

Brad: Well, yeah. What it is, is I make it difficult for the people who are going to hitch hike on my listing. So if I’m selling at two buck and they are going to hitch hike on, as soon as I sell that inventory I’ll have a sale, I’ll blow through my inventory, and I’ll ship this in as a three pack, update the images and the description, and then I will let them know hey, this is a three pack, you are selling a two pack, you are about to have some serious problems and especially if other customers are saying hey, this is a three pack and they gave me a two pack.

They have to ship all that inventory back to themselves and make it a three pack and then ship it all in, and if they do it again and they are messing with the price and the sales, then I’ll sell through that inventory and I’ll make it a four pack.

Steve: Interesting.

Brad: And I just make it so ridiculous for them to follow along and ride on my cocktails that it’s just easier to go bother someone else, because knuckle heads will always be knuckle heads, I just make it difficult for them to bother me.

Steve: Okay, okay, yeah, that sounds like a good strategy and what are your views on using fulfilled by Amazon versus self-fulfilled. Are you FBA all the way?

Brad: Yeah, all the way. You could do this yourself; however you are missing out on Amazon’s prime customers. Prime customers pay a membership fee so that they can get a few extra perks, but the main thing that they do is that they want it yesterday.

Amazon prime members have an option and Amazons skews the search results to show FBA merchandize first. So you will be missing out on Amazon’s best premium customers if you don’t put it in Amazon’s ware house, plus it’s not that much extra money, a dollar or two here or there to not have the headaches, it just makes it, it makes it a no brainer.

Steve: I completely agree, cool. So Brad, we’ve been chatting for quite a while, I did want a couple of words and motivation for the listeners out there. If they want to get started selling on Amazon, you have a couple of words to say to motivate these people to give things a try?

Brad: Absolutely, you can do this, you just have to make up your mind that this is something you are willing to do, and then also before you get started you need to look at why you are doing it. Are you doing it to increase your lifestyle? Are you doing it to save the whales? Are you doing it to improve the lifestyle of your family? Figure out why you are doing it, and tell yourself why you are doing it every single day, because you will have bad days and if you know your why, you will be able to get through those bad days. Things will happen that you didn’t understand, you couldn’t have planned for. Knowing your why will get you over those bad days.

Steve: Awesome, thanks so much for that Brad and more importantly where can people actually find you if they have questions about selling on Amazon and where can they find the product or get some coaching from you.

Brad: Oh, yeah. Check us out, our site is Amazonsherpa.com. We are the Amazon Sherpa because we will take you Amazon business to the next level. We have all kinds of tips, stories, news, what’s working right now on Amazon because things change from time to time. So yeah, go over there, check us out, sign up for the newsletter.

Steve: Sounds good Brad, hey thanks a lot for stopping by in the show, there is a lot of tips you shared today on Amazon that I did not know and thank you for that.

Brad: Thanks for having me, we’ll talk again soon.

Steve: All right take care, Brad.

Brad: Thanks, bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode; Brad DeGraw is actually my go to guy when it comes to selling on Amazon, and he’s got a ton of experience and he has a bag full of tips and tricks on how to make more sales on the platform. He also knows enough to give an exclusive lecture to the students of my ‘Create a profitable online store’ course, and for that I’m very grateful.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode60 and if you enjoyed this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud but it also helps keep my podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.


What Happened To Our Store After We Started Selling On Amazon. Here Are The Results

$
0
0

On MyWifeQuitHerJob.com, I often write about the need for motivation and determination when it comes to starting a business. After all if you don’t have the drive, then you will never take any action.

Well today I have a confession to make. I had major problems motivating myself to sell on Amazon.

Fulfilled By Amazon

Our online store was doing very well on its own, growing in the double digits and I didn’t really see a strong need to sell on a platform where I had little control.

But thanks to my friend Lars Hundley, I finally saw the light towards the end of last November. For all of you who don’t know Lars, he runs 2 successful ecommerce stores, CleanAirGardening.com and YoyoPlay.com, and he was also a featured guest on my podcast for episode 29.

Here’s what the guy did to get me off of my butt. Every single week, he started sending me emails politely reminding me to list my items on Amazon.

Then, he started telling me how much money he was making off of selling a small set of products. And when that didn’t do the trick, he started telling me about all of these cool strategies that he was using to make his Amazon listings more visible, strategies that very few people were using.

After several weeks of hounding, I finally broke down and decided to list a few items on a whim. And the results were immediate.

Within 8 days, we sold out of our initial inventory of 60 units as a completely brand new seller and sales have been going up ever since.

It just goes to show that sometimes you need a bit of external pressure to get yourself off of your butt which is why it’s EXTREMELY important to associate yourself with like-minded people on your entrepreneurship journey.

Note: I also wanted to give a special shout out to my friend Kenric for sending me his Amazon income reports as well which were ridiculous and served as a great motivator as well:)

BTW, if you want to get motivated by a group of over 1000 like minded ecommerce entrepreneurs, consider joining my community:)

Jumping On The Amazon Bandwagon

bandwagon

Before I talk about my experiences selling on Amazon, it’s worth noting that everyone seems to be jumping on the Amazon bandwagon right now.

And the reason is because selling on Amazon is almost too easy. In fact, I would argue that you could practically list anything on Amazon during the holiday season and it would sell.

Whenever things are too easy and whenever people get too excited about making money is when red flags light up in my head. This happened with EBay in the early 2000′s and it’s starting to happen on Amazon as well.

Eventually, these platforms will become saturated and it will be harder and harder to make money.

In the long run, you can not rely on a 3rd party marketplace as your primary source of income.

In order to ensure long term success, you will need to establish your own platform and brand.

However in the meantime, Amazon is there for the taking and you should use it as a means to validate your products and generate some early sales.

Fulfilled By Amazon

FBA

If you are going to sell on Amazon, you absolutely have to have your products fulfilled by Amazon(FBA). By choosing fulfilled by Amazon, it makes your listings eligible for free two day Prime shipping which is huge!

Anecdotally, having your goods fulfilled by Amazon will increase your sales by up to 3X. As a result, we only use FBA for our Amazon listings.

We also buy Amazon ads for all of our Amazon listings and for all of the products in our online store.

For example we purchase Amazon sponsored ads to make our Amazon marketplace listings more visible. In addition, we also purchase Amazon Product Ads to drive traffic from Amazon to our online store.

Both advertising mediums convert extremely well and if I could spend more money on Amazon ads, I definitely would.

Our Results

In our very first month of selling on Amazon, we made almost 3K just selling 3 products using the techniques outlined in my ecommerce course

Just one month later, we were doing over 5K/month. Right now, we are making just over 6K per month listing only 8 products online.

While these numbers are only a very small fraction of what we make with our real online store, they are definitely on our radar screen. And what’s surprising is that our online store sales are up for the same products we have on Amazon.

Anyway to put things into perspective and to illustrate the potential, we sell over 460 different products in our store but only have 8 or so listed on Amazon at the present time. Eventually, we plan on incorporating more of our branded products into the mix.

The Pitfalls Of Selling On Amazon

pitfall
The main negative of selling on Amazon is that it has thrown a major wrench into our inventory management. In the past, we only purchased inventory for what we knew we could sell in our online store plus a set percentage to account for growth.

As a result, inventory management has been quite predictable for the past several years.

But with Amazon added into the mix, all of our projections got majorly screwed up.

Now you would think that additional sales would be a good thing but that’s not always the case. Here’s why.

A significant portion of our customers are event and wedding planners.

And when they make a large purchase with us, it’s often all or nothing. If we have the quantities they need in stock, they buy. If we are short even a little bit, we lose the sale.

Because we were a bit overzealous with Amazon in the beginning, we lost out on a few major deals because the inventory was locked up in Amazon’s warehouse.

There were also cases where the opposite was true. We could have easily made more money on Amazon these past few months but we had product listings that were sitting idle because we couldn’t keep the Amazon warehouse stocked with inventory.

Here’s the thing.

It often takes 3-4 months for us to have goods made and shipped to the US so it’s not like we can acquire new inventory on a whim. Also, there was a major port strike recently which delayed several of our large shipments.

The Pros/Cons Of Amazon

Overall, I think that having an established online store prior to selling on Amazon has been a huge advantage for us. But if I were to start all over again, I would use Amazon as a way to test and validate my products before going full force with my own website.

Start making some money on Amazon, gauge the demand and then launch your own website to establish a long term brand for your business.

Amazon is great for making money fast because of its huge established user base. But keep in mind that the Amazon marketplace will eventually saturate.

Also, because people who buy on Amazon have no idea that they are buying from you, you can not establish any sort of brand selling on their platform.

Anyway if you are just starting out with ecommerce, here’s how I would proceed today.

  • Pick a niche and sell your products on Amazon to validate the demand
  • Once you’ve established demand and have real sales under your belt, work on your own branded website ASAP
  • Continue selling on Amazon but focus on your own website. Establish your own customer database, gather emails, etc…

In fact this is the exact methodology that I teach in my course on how to start a profitable online store. And today, I have an entire module dedicated to selling on Amazon based on my own experiences and what I’ve learned from Amazon veterans like Brad DeGraw and Lars Hundley.

I also regularly invite industry experts to give lectures to the class on various topics to further strengthen the curriculum.

For example, I recently had Brad Degraw on as a guest to talk about Amazon, Andreea Ayers to talk about marketing and publicity, Spencer Haws to talk about SEO…The list goes on!

If you are currently on the sidelines, sometimes all you need is your very own Lars Hundley to give you a kick in the pants:)

Especially if you are looking for some extra motivation to get started, then let myself and the other 1000 students in my class push you to succeed.

Nothing is more effective at getting your entrepreneurial juices flowing than interacting with other like minded entrepreneurs.

And sometimes all it takes is a little spark to light a fire under your butt. Start now while it’s still relatively easy to take advantage of what Amazon has to offer before it becomes too saturated.

Click Here To Learn How To Run A Successful Ecommerce Business Today

photo credit: Covered Wagon ii Bay Bridge Collapse

MWQHJ 061: Natalie Sisson On How To Create A 6 Figure Location Independent Business

$
0
0

Natalie Sisson

Today I’m thrilled to have my friend Natalie Sisson on the show. Now if you’ve never heard of Natalie, she is known as the Suitcase Entrepreneur, and her story is pretty damn cool.

Since 2006, she left her hometown of New Zealand and she’s basically been traveling the world by living out of her suitcase while running her location independent business. She’s got a popular blog, a bestselling book, a podcast and she is just an all round great person as well.

Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • Natalie’s motivations for creating a location independent lifestyle
  • Why documenting what you do can eventually lead to a steady income
  • The basic tools you need to go location independent
  • How Natalie created over 8 streams of revenue
  • How to have an effective launch of your product
  • How Natalie has attracted thousands of raving fans for her blog and products
  • How Natalie got her first customers in the door
  • How to make your first 1000 dollars
  • How to attract JV partners
  • How to handle payments, bank accounts etc…when you are a nomad

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have my friend Natalie Sisson on the show. Now I first met Natalie randomly when I went to attend a conference in Austin, Texas. Now Natalie didn’t actually attend the same conference, but I ran into her randomly at a party completely by accident and I’m really glad that I did. Now if you’ve never heard of Natalie, she is known as the Suitcase Entrepreneur, and her story is pretty damn cool.

Since 2006, she left her hometown of New Zealand and she’s basically been travelling the world by living out of her suitcase while running her location independent business. She’s got a popular blog, a bestselling book, a podcast and she is just an all round great person as well. And what is especially cool about Natalie is that she is an incredible ultimate Frisbee player which is actually a sport that I really been into for the past decade. Now Natalie specialty is building amazing businesses online that can be taken anywhere, and today I am hoping that she can teach us her secrets on living such an exciting and free lifestyle. And with that, welcome to the show Natalie. How are you doing today?

Natalie: I am doing amazing actually. As we talked about just before we jumped on here. And by the way you have an awesome audio voice. Not that I mean you’re made for radio, but you have a really great voice on audio.

Steve: Well thank you.

Natalie: Look at that, well thank you Natalie.

Steve: So you are already buttering me up for the interview. I am going to throw you some soft balls I guess. So you know, for those of you out there listening who do not know who you are Natalie, what was your motivation for actually living out of your suitcase, travelling the world? And what’s the story behind the Suitcase Entrepreneur?

Natalie: I hope most people listening know who they are. So if they don’t who I am– this is where it started actually. I am Kiwi, so I am from New Zealand hence the accent. And I have been living out of my suitcase now for almost five years. It’s actually going to be– yeah, it’s just over four and a half years now. And my motivation for it was kind of just came about by the fact that once I had a little bit of an online business where I was actually starting to generate some revenue, I said, “ Ha, why not take this on the road? No need to be based in Vancouver, Canada where I was at the time, one of the most beautiful, but the most expensive cities in the world.

And I said, “You know what, I’ve just launched this program and it made me like, “Uuh, a whopping $1000.” For sure I can just keep going with this and then head off to Buenos Aires, Argentina and live there and then live in other places. So it wasn’t– I wouldn’t say it was by accident, but it was definitely by choice. I wanted the freedom to be able to work from anywhere.

Steve: Okay. And did you have like a day job in the beginning at any point?

Natalie: I have had eight years in the corporate world. So I feel pretty okay with the nine to five. You know, a really good experience on the whole but the last couple of jobs have stirred me over the edge. And I am really glad they did because they forced me to get off my back and go and launch my own business. And I actually cofounded a text startup before launching my business.

So I had that nice sort of [inaudible] [0:04:19] the entrepreneurial world, well I wouldn’t say nice because I just got dropped in the deep end and had to figure out how to create a tech company and develop a product and act for Facebook, get financing, get investors, all those things, but it was really great setup for me then launching my own business.

Steve: So is that what drove you over the edge, that startup or…?

Natalie: No. The startup was just a great experience and as I said, a deep dive in into the entrepreneurial world. The thing that drove me over the edge was my last job in London and it was like perfect on paper, it was highly paid, I was head of a new department, I got to setup a new team, I got even a new office, I got to travel around the UK, I got to help doctors become business people. So on paper it was amazing, right, and as I said really well paid. But it was just the organization that was just an old boys club.

There was so much sort of political bias, there was office politics, there was people who would just clop in at nine and leave just on five and nobody wanted to do anything extra. And I just felt everything I tried to do in that organization was stopped by the very people who hired me to do it and it just stirred me now. It’s like it actually made me miserable which is pretty hard to do.

Steve: So did you start the Suitcase Entrepreneur during one of these jobs, or did you…?

Natalie: No, I started during the text startup. So I was blogging and I was doing the online marketing, I was trying to figure out how to use social media to build a business from scratch with zero budget and zero customer base. And I started my own blog at the time around 2009 just because I was fascinated by what I was learning and I thought, surely other people would be interested in what I’m learning.

And surely my main blogging which is quite methodic, people will learn something and I can also interview other people and see how they got to succeed, specifically women at the time, in the tech field where I was like how did they become CEO, how did they deal with this male dominated industry, what else can I learn from them. So that was really the reason behind my blog which is– became my business.

Steve: So it wasn’t intentionally made to make money in the beginning.

Natalie: Absolutely not.

Steve: It was just a document.

Natalie: Yeah. It was just a journey.

Steve: Okay. And you know what’s unique about you is that most businesses have kind of some sort of a home base, but in your case you travel a lot, you are literally in a different country every couple of months. So I kind of want to ask how the heck do you run a mobile business and can we just kind of talk about some of your revenue streams a little bit and how you make money.

Natalie: Yeah, for sure. Well I mean all you need and I talk about this a lot. There is three things you need; electropas smartphone and an internet connection, but more importantly you need a freedom based mindset. So I think the biggest thing that holds people back from just working from anywhere and taking their business on the road is that they are kind of bamboozled by how do you that or what that means. And I think once we get past this sort of constructs of our normal daily routine and what is defined as normal like: you should be in an office, you should be working these hours, you should be off on these weekends– that’s when you really start to make some magic to happen.

So I think for me, once I realized that I could do everything from my laptop, I didn’t need to be in meetings with people, I didn’t need to have a permanent office, I didn’t even need to work the normal five day week, then I was able to kind of runoff and travel the world and set up by business in a way that I didn’t have to be online or always there for it. That’s pretty much all you need, is just that mindset to go, yeah anything is possible. Let’s do it.

Steve: Okay. Does that mean that you are pretty much solo right now? Do you have a team of people helping you out or…?

Natalie: No I have really cool team. So I have a virtual assistant who works 20 to 30 hours a week and I have an online business manager, online freedom manager as we call it who helps with some of the content and the copy writing and the podcasts. So I actually had outsourced a lot. I’ve got a really lovely stream line business so I just focus on the awesome stuff like interviewing people on my podcast, like writing the great guest posts, like being interviewed on other people’s podcasts on Skype and working out the strategies for future launches and the whole plan of the tech for my entire business.

And then I hire contractors for certain projects like for membership sites, for any tech stuff that I don’t want to do, and copywriting from time and time like videographers. So I just hire the right people when I need them.

Steve: Okay. And then would you classify yourself as a kind of like a tech savvy person?

Natalie: I am, yeah. Do you know what? I think I always have been but over the years I’ve been less inclined to like look at all the new stuff and I have just become a deck to outsourcing. So when I first started I had to do everything obviously, I had zero budget and I really loved playing with all these tools, but I have got it down. Right now I have a few key tools that I use all the time and I love, I’m pretty good at working stuff up but where possible now. If that’s not the best use of my time, I just get somebody who is an expert to do it.

Steve: Okay, yeah. That’s completely makes sense. So before we start talking about your businesses, I was just personally curious, what does your day to day look like? Like I see your postings on facebook and you are always out having fun. You just played tennis before this interview. How do you kind of separate your work and your play time?

Natalie: It’s a good day. So yeah, I got up this morning and made myself a smoothie, went off and played tennis for two hours, came back and dived into my 15 day blog challenge that I am about to launch and also a little bit of my freedom planning launch which is coming up in April, then I am here with you and next time I’ll be going on a motorbike ride up across to visit a friend. So I guess I’m very cognizant of what my priorities in life are and for me freedom is my underlying ultimate value. So if I feel I am not getting enough of it, I make a means to get more of it.

Also as I said, I’ve really worked hard over the years to build a team to create really great systems so that I don’t have to be online all the time or I don’t have to be doing everything. And I also have really clear goals, like I have a three year vision for where I want to head, so that just helps me to bring it back to on a daily basis what’s the most important thing I could do today that’s going to make a huge difference.

And so there are some days I work really hard and sometimes when I work weekends if I feel like it, but more recently in the last six months, I’ve pulled back quite a lot to focus a lot more on lifestyle and freedom, and nurturing friendships and spending time with family and enjoying travel for what it is. And that’s just really come out of having clear focus priorities and really great goals and as I said great systems and a cool business.

Steve: Okay, yeah. And we are going to delve deeply into all those things, now I kind of know that you sell a bunch of different products and you make money in a variety of different ways. So let’s talk about first the one that makes the most money for you and then let’s talk about that first.

Natalie: Perfect. So I actually have about eight revenue streams but I am dialing those down because I looked at my 2014 annual review and I was like, “Man that was an amazing year,” but my God, I did way too much stuff. So if I look at it, I have various online revenue streams and offline. Currently the one that makes me the most money is the Freedom Plan program which I launched as my flagship program last year.

It’s a combination of everything I have learnt and applied and done over the last four and a half years in business and I run it once a year. Last year I did it as a pilot which was hugely successful and then I ran the full program, and I’m amping up to have a huge launch this year. I want it to be the one definitive thing I’m known for, I want it to get amazing results from people which it has, and I want to put all my focus and energy into this program for the first half of this year. So when that launch is at [Inaudible] [00:11:29] and my biggest honor.

Steve: So can you talk about this project a little bit. So it’s a purely digital product.

Natalie: Yeah. It is– yes and no. So there are– it’s basically– I went through a learning mastery education person to actually really make sure that I got results of people in this. So I stripped back everything and figured out what do they need to know to build a profitable online business and a lifestyle they love. It’s broken into three parts. It’s very much based off kind of the fundamentals behind my book and what I do. So its starts with what’s your vision for your life, like what do you actually want out of life? Then what’s the business that you are going to build to make sure that becomes a reality and the third part is, what’s your lifestyle going to look like?

Does it involve travel or does it involve more freedom at home? So it’s kind of that three part area that I think a lot of people overlook the travel and lifestyle aspect and they focus always on the business, so they do the other part and they don’t really get clear on their vision. It’s got 11 modules which are video based and audio based, they are very progressive, and also there is weekly coaching with me. So it’s a really nice formation of that plus the Facebook community.

And I have found over the years that all the programs that I run you need to show up live, you need accountability, you need direct access to a great person who knows what they are talking about, just in this case me. And then you need modules that like are progressive and take you through this learning aspect with really great actions that you can apply. So basically people come out at the end of eight weeks with their freedom plan either partly done, fully done or well on their way to making happen, which is all that I am about by getting people to take action.

Steve: Okay. And then so when you run this weekly live class you just run it out of your laptop with an internet connection wherever you happen to be?

Natalie: Absolutely. Go to a meeting, internet, laptop, perfect, so much fun.

Steve: And in terms of just getting people to purchase your product, are you just leveraging your audience from your blog in order to get people to sign up?

Natalie: Yeah. Actually it was really interesting because last year I did this for the first time I ran a pilot; I didn’t advertise it to anybody. All I did was reach out to people who joined my community, told me about themselves and looked like a great fit. So I didn’t do it to everybody but I get a lot of people replying, “So cool to be in your community. Here is what I do,” because I was just on that you know, where are you at, what are you looking for?

And so for the few people that just seem like a perfect fit, I said, “Hey, I am actually launching this product program. You’d be great for it, no obligation but here is the sort of outline.” And I hadn’t even produced it at that point, and I literally had a payment button on that page. I was like; if you want to sign up go here. And I got 35 people which was five more than I wanted without any external advertising which is a first for me, just very small into a couple of people in my community. And then I…

Steve: When you say community, is that your email list? Is that your Facebook group?

Natalie: It’s actually just people who joined my email list, yeah.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Natalie: And people who are in– I have another revenue stream as my highflier cup which is established entrepreneurs who are earning pretty good money, and I wanted to look more at their mindset lifestyle in business. So I approached a couple of those people in there as good piloters, but the rest was really just this type on the show, that kind of approach which was really cool and very personal. And then I launched it fully in September after I got feedback from those people and for that I did a full launch. So I did Facebook advertising, I went out to my community, I had a VIP list, I did webinars, I ran webinars with affiliates, I had affiliates promoting, I did blogs, I did interviews. It was very full on.

Steve: So let’s go into depth about your launch. I mean you mentioned this full on launch. What is involved in a full launch and which aspects of the launch are the most effective? Like if you had to choose, it sounds like you did a bunch of stuff so…

Natalie: I love launches, right? I have been doing them for quite a while now. Every single time they never meet my expectations and every single time I learn more and more about it, like I have really high expectations. So I am not saying I haven’t had great launches and this was my best year, but there is just so many moving parts and every time you run them you think, I could have done this better, I could have bought this [inaudible] [0:15:20], I could have done a better webinar here etcetera.

So I guess the bits that proved the most effective because I’ve done a breakdown of the launch were definitely running webinars. It’s not for everybody but I love them. I love live training, I love live coaching, it’s where I’m at my best, it’s where I give my best value. I love being able to answer those questions directly, like an open book I can answer almost anything, if I don’t know find the answer for you. And that’s why I think people really buy into who I am and my style and my credibility of what I am about, and that’s where I convince most people whether they want to join me or not. So the webinars have worked really well.

Steve: How did they find you to sign up for the webinar?

Natalie: So I had around 1500 people registered through my existing community of email lists. So my one list is the most I’ve ever had on a webinar, like crazy nuts.

Steve: That is a lot of people.

Natalie: It is a lot of people. I mean, that’s how many registered, they were around 600 or so live which is so crazy.

Steve: That’s a lot too, yes.

Natalie: To be a part of that many people on a New Zealand internet connection, always fun with a loud hungry cat in the background which was quite amusing because I was house sitting at the time. And then the second one we actually ran to people who were not in my community at all, through Facebook advertising. So we did a non-targeted fans and community Facebook advertising campaign and got around 600 people registered for that although [inaudible] [0:16:38] 300 turned up live.

That definitely wasn’t successful– as successful in terms of conversions because these people didn’t know me from a bar of soap. But the great thing is that now my community and since then some of those people have gone on to buy stuff and become a much more integral part. So when I come around to launching it this year, it’s highly likely that many of those people might be like yeah I am ready.

Steve: Can we talk about your Facebook campaign real quick. So how did you set that up and how did you– like how is it structured?

Natalie: So I hired an awesome lady who is actually in my highflier club and has become a good friend, but she is also extremely savvy on Facebook advertising so shout out to Marie Corner [ph]. And we just worked through what I wanted to achieve like my goals, how many registrations, how many people to the email list and worked through the kind of wording and the copy, and the imagery and what we really wanted and then she just set to work doing that.

I’ve done Facebook ads myself in the past but honestly, they are such a gold mine now and they have also become pretty complex and I think you really need to know your stuff. So I handed over to her, I said, “This is my budget, here is how much I am going to invest in you and you just go and make it happen.” So we used customized audience, downloaded my email list, did a really good job of that and targeted the likes of all the people that people think about when they are probably thinking about lifestyle entrepreneurship and me. So Tim Ferriss, Marie Forlio, Chris Decker and just a bunch of people that were really doing well that people would be searching on as well.

So yeah, it was great. It is also what I’m going to be using again in this launch because as much as I love and hate facebook in terms of advertising and targeting the right people, it’s a fantastic tool and vehicle to really get granular and know exactly who you are targeting and who is in your audience. And I know my audience demographic really well, so we can get very specific on that.

Steve: So I’m just curious, how much were you paying per sign up?

Natalie: We got it down to pretty amazing, actually to I think for the regular person, so it was anywhere between a dollar twenty and three dollars per sign up. And for somebody to come on to my email list, I think that’s more than worth it. Like this program is $1000 in value, so if you are spending $1000 and just one person signs up through that period then you’ve made your money back. But it depends, we actually had even less on clicks, on just likes and stuff but to actually join into the list and to be part of that or register, it was around that price and I was happy with that because my market and my category and industry is really competitive.

Steve: I think we are in the same market, which is why I was asking. So I have been paying around two fifty to three dollars per sign up.

Natalie: That’s good, that’s really good.

Steve: But the sign up rate is obviously for my course, I guess we are somewhere in that aspect. I sell the course; I teach people how to start eCommerce stores. And so what I do and I was just curious what you do, I send them to this email funnel where I basically teach them stuff, and if they like what they see then they sign up, but the conversion rate for that is a lot less than obviously the people that read my blog already and already know me. So just curious how you kind of track the conversions from your Facebook since they are so much longer term?

Natalie: We actually only tracked the conversions of who registered and then of those who registered, who signup via the webinar. So that’s the only thing we tracked for now. If I was now to track those people and see if they bought anything, that would be interesting as well. I probably should do that. But that is because we were just sending them straight into a webinar from a cold prospect, but I really like the style that you are doing and that’s what we’ll be doing pretty much from this month on, is sending people to get a free starter kit, and going to get all that free information and keep them as warm customers first before they then get information about the Freedom Plan.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of the actual live webinar when you’re talking, how do you structure what you’re going to say to kind of entice people to sign up for your full blown class in just one session?

Natalie: Yeah. It’s a great question. So I’ve watched– I’ve been to a lot of webinars and I always take notes. And I’ve done a bit of Clay Collins’ training; I think he’s done an excellent job at that. I’ve run a lot of webinars with experts in my community and I always loved seeing how they structure, what they talk about, how they close. I’ve also seen a lot of really bad webinars where people talk about themselves for way too long and don’t give out any value and piss people off.

So I was clear that I wanted to offer a lot of value. I probably offered too much information and left people going, “Gosh, that’s a lot to take in. I think I’ll just use the info Natalie’s given me for the day and go away with that and came back later.” So that was a great lesson learnt. But I’ve structured it through really kind of going through the three steps to creating your freedom plan which is what the program is based around and giving out lots of value adds there and actions they could take, and then in the last 25 to 30% was taking them through what they get in the program.

And this time around I’ll be definitely spending a little bit longer on that and giving it more I guess– it’s not all about promoting it but really being clear on what they get so that people literally have no questions. I kind of changed the gloss over a little, I don’t always like the pitch and selling, but I feel that just through adding value, people will make up their mind and make a decision, but there’s definitely a lot to be said by just being very clear on what you offer and how it differs from other programs and what the unique element is and then obviously having a really short time call to action.

Steve: So I’m just curious myself, so when you say you help people start online businesses, there’s obviously a whole bunch of different classes of online businesses like eCommerce, blogging, selling digital class and that sort of thing. Where does your program tend to lean?

Natalie: Yeah. And it’s a great question, that’s something that is starting to frustrate me is just how many people are moving into this area all saying, “Hey, here is how to quit your job and start a business.” So I would say definitely prioritizing and monetizing yourself. So I work with people who are finding their sweet spot, the intersection between what they are good at, what they get paid for and what they enjoy, rather than starting an eCommerce business, rather than starting an affiliate marketing kind of business. I talk about, how do you monetize yourself and create a business that works around you?

Steve: Okay, that makes sense. So it’s very tailored then to a person’s personality if you mean– okay.

Natalie: Yes, it is. And so it’s not for everybody, right, like I think during– like I do cover off on a lot of different stuff, you know, the basics that you need on a website, how to build a social media community because it’s something I’ve done really well. It’s also about building your brand, but there are many introverts and many extroverts who go through the program who do it in a really great way. So yeah, it comes down to how motivated are you, how much freedom do you want in your life and how important is it for you to be able to build something for yourself that you are really proud of.

Steve: Okay. And then obviously you have a lot of members in this class. What systems do you kind of have in place to automate your processes? Like you mentioned that you– a lot of your training seems to require tailoring to a certain person’s personality, but you’re just one person. So how do you kind of create that tailored effect for everyone and obviously have some systems in place to do that?

Natalie: Yeah, it’s a great question. I think my training is– I wouldn’t ever call it generic but throughout it I do get people to consider how that relates to them. So if this is something that has been applied successfully by myself and others over the years, how do you take that and work it yourself? Because I really don’t like when people teach you, “Hey, here’s how I made money online, this is how you should do it too.” That just drives me nuts because it’s not true of everything.

So I think that is probably where actually getting them to go through the books and work through it themselves comes out really well. The coaching course that I do is a group coaching because that’s where the brilliant questions come through and people really are starting to think through, and then I can give them customized and specific advice. And then also in the Facebook group, the questions that are asked and answered by myself and everybody else.

I think that’s where people get their lot out of it, like that’s when it becomes individual to them because outside of that, the modules are there and they get released, the emails come through. And I would say for me the biggest amount of feedback I’ve heard is just how accessible I am and how personable I am to helping each person kind of do their thing without being spread really thin and feeling like, all I’m doing is investing my time into tons of people which is a fine line though.

Steve: So what’s an example of one of your successful students and how you’ve helped them?

Natalie: Yeah. It’s really fun to see actually right now because I challenged everybody just before new years to complete their painted picture which is the fundamental of the program. It’s not my idea, but I’ve taken it and put it on steroids and I just loved seeing how people stepped up to do that and get it done before the 31st of December. And from that also what came out of it is just what people are wanting to achieve or had achieved. So Maxi Lang [ph] has launched an Amazon book and the time that she’s been through it setup their whole website, got super clear on their ideal customer, and avatar and they’re in the process of launching a program right now.

And the interesting thing that I find about it– like she’s given me an amazing testimonial and video testimony, all those stuff just because for them I think they just got major clarity on who they were serving and why, and the importance of what they wanted to achieve during this next year even. And the biggest thing is I don’t think people are going to build a business in eight weeks that’s going to suddenly return the profit, right?

Steve: Right. Absolutely, yes.

Natalie: I’d never claim for that to be true but the point is, two months down the track, three months down the track when they go through it again I am just going to see more and more people getting great results. And there have been some people who went through and just blessed it and there are others who were still– have gone right back to the beginning to redo it and are now like go, “Ah, I’ve got it,” like it made sense the second time. So I love that.

I just love the journey that people have gone. For some people they got the first hundred people on their email list, for somebody else they launched a product to make their first five grand but everybody was kind of at different stages. So as long as they see immediate results in their own small piece of their world, then I’m happy.

Steve: It’s almost like you’re a mixture of life coach and entrepreneur in training, right? You’re trying to help people figure out what they really want out of life and then you kind of tailor some sort of business that will allow them to achieve that lifestyle. Is that accurate?

Natalie: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Natalie: Yeah. I mean I don’t really like the term life coach because I’m not trained in that and how do you coach on life? It’s a huge thing.

Steve: Sure.

Natalie: But I am absolutely passionate about people figuring out what lifestyle they want and then building a business to support it, because I’ve seen way too many people who let businesses take over their life and then build a job and then suddenly they are making all this money and doing really well and they have zero life.

Steve: Yeah.

Natalie: You know? You know the people I’m talking about. Like they are making…

Steve: I do.

Natalie: …a mint and they’re very unhappy. They have no friends, they have way too much stuff, they don’t live life and life is passing them by. And I’m like, “Seriously that’s the worst thing in the world,” so yeah.

Steve: So it’s interesting that you teach this stuff because a lot of my listeners are trying to create their own lifestyle that they want to live. So what sort of advice would you give to someone kind of starting out from complete scratch? Like when you launched your program, you already had a sizeable email list, you already had contacts and groups and that sort of thing to rely on. For someone just kind of brand new, who wants to kind of live your lifestyle, what sort of advice would you give?

Natalie: Well for the very first program that I launched I really didn’t, but the biggest thing that I would say is to believe in yourself much earlier on. I really wish I’d done that from the beginning, it sounds a bit nah but I think I’d come from this corporate background and then I’ve been in this [inaudible] [0:27:48] and this technology startup and I still just didn’t fully believe that I had what it took to be able to teach others to do their own thing.

And I really wish I developed that sense of self and purpose earlier because it fundamentally changes your mindset when you say, “Yep, I’m worth it. Yep I’m turning [inaudible] [0:28:04],” I love that book by Steven Pressfield and you step up and you go. “Here’s the people I want to help and here is how I’m going to do it and I’m going to master everything I can and learn as much as I can in the mean to get ahead and be able to do that for them.

So I’d say the biggest piece of advice I have, you know, you guys listening is to become a leading learner. You don’t have to be an expert, you just have to be a couple of steps ahead of the people that you really want to serve and help. So if you know that you’re pretty good at this thing and you know that you really enjoy it, and you’re willing to put something out there that’s of value, that’s going to help somebody they will pay for it and it’s a beautiful thing.

It’s a beautiful thing when you finally go, “You know what, I have this skill people always tell me I’m really good at, but I kind of dismiss it because it comes naturally.” And you finally do something about it and you release that gift into the world and then everybody benefits.

Steve: So you mentioned just now earlier that– you said you didn’t have a sizable audience when you first launched your first product.

Natalie: Oh gosh no.

Steve: So how did you get the first customers in the door? Was it webinars or…?

Natalie: Oh yeah. Do you know what– so I actually ran it as a physical boot camp in Vancouver, Canada. I built up enough of a network there over the two years building the startup that I was like, “You know what, I think I can do a social media boot camp and maybe people will come.” And that was sold out because I tapped into some government funding and I just had the right networks, and I worked really hard, right? I was a bit worried at first, but I ended up selling the workshops for only 10 people per workshop.

And then I turned that into an online program and just naturally thought that my small blog readership and my small email list would be interested and I ran my first ever webinar for which I lost my voice on the day which was awesome, so I sounded like super hoarsky [ph]. I had 30 people, 30 people who turned up to that webinar and I made one sale and you know what, I was super excited because I made a sale. And I went on to make about six or seven more and over the space of that next month I think I got maybe 15 people on my program. So I’m not talking about like I crushed it here.

Steve: Yeah. No but I mean even…

Natalie: But the point was I made a sale, like that’s a big exciting thing when I you are first starting out, that you’ve convinced somebody that you’ve build something of value. So it’s just starting, right? You just have to start somewhere and then build on that, and I would say the first two and a half years were called strategic hustling, like I wasn’t throwing spaghetti at the wall all the time, sometimes I was very strategic and I just kept hustling and pushing and learning and being mental, or reaching out to the right people and basically emulating what they, did but in my own way that was going to succeed.

Steve: Okay. And so if you can pretend for a moment that I have just joined your program, completely lost, what are some of the things that you would have me do to figure that out, what I should do?

Natalie: You are completely lost, you are not completely lost; you’ve just joined my program, logged in and gone, “My God, what’s happening here?”

Steve: Exactly, yes.

Natalie. Okay, a really great question, so I would get you to focus on the sweet spot and I do get people to do this in the program even if they’re really advanced and they’ve already got a business. It seems to really help people. So once again the sweet spot is not my thing, it’s been around for a long time, but it’s that intersection between what you’re good at even if you are semi mediocre at it. You’re good at it or you’re excellent at it, you like it or you really enjoy doing it, you may even love it and people are willing to pay you for it.

So a really cool example of this that I think people overlook is let’s say you are really good French cook. I’m not by the way a great cook, I make amazing breakfast, but that’s about it. But let’s say you are really good French cook and you’ve loved doing it for a while and you hold dinner parties for your friends because you enjoy cooking for them. And they always say, “Oh my God that was excellent. How did you make it?” And you’re like, “Oh no-no-no, it was no big deal.” You know, a lot of chefs do that, right?

Steve: Yeah.

Natalie: They kind of go, “Oh, it’s just something I whipped up earlier,” and I’m like, ouch. Sorry I have just made this an explicit iTunes podcast. Yeah, so they go, “Look could you teach me how to do that because you make it look so simple yet it’s not.” And they go, “Oh yeah sure or you know, maybe next time we’ll do a cooking workshop.” So they come over earlier and they stand in your kitchen and you just take a video of that and you show them through it and they help you cook and put it out, and then you decide to start running a weekly video series.

You decide to just go out and put it on YouTube and people really like it and then they come across in your blog and you put out your favorite recipes. And then you keep doing these instructional videos which really help people to cook and then you decide to create a recipe book or maybe how to start basic French Cooking Made Easy, oh in 10 minutes a day. And before you know it you’re kind of off and running. You got an audience of people who really wanted to know how to become better at cooking French. You’re not the expert, you’re not a trained chef, but you’ve got an ability to make it easy for people to do those who aren’t chefs at all.

It’s just a– often people just overlook stuff that they are really good at or have a neck for because they’ve been born with it and they don’t think much about it. But you know how there’s those people who are just great at connecting people and getting them on blind dates that work, or those people who are just amazing at introducing you to the right people and just knowing– well there are people who make, you know, their complex seem really simple.

You’ve got to listen to those things that people are always telling you, “Hey, you know, you really good at this,” “Well thanks so much. It’s something you really helped me with.” And you’ve got to tune into that and think, how can I maximize this and create something that’s actually going to monetize your skills.

Steve: Yeah. I was just– when you’re talking about people who are good at introducing people I just thought of our mutual friend Jamie tardy who pretty much knows everybody, and she’s a great connector of people, and she’s created a great business for herself interviewing popular entrepreneurs.

Natalie: Absolutely.

Natalie: Just curious though. This is a kind of a funny story on my end. So you mentioned doing something you enjoy and trying to get the word out about that. A while ago my wife used to be really into embroidery, and then what happened was I kind of convinced her to monetize that for our online store, and then pretty soon orders would come in and she just did not enjoy doing that anymore. So what do you have to say about the fine line between turning a hobby into a business and losing that interest and actually that hobby?

Natalie: Yeah, absolutely. That’s why I get people to run through it and pick up three to four sweet spots, and then try out some of those sweet spots. For example, I love tennis but I’ve tried coaching tennis when I was younger and I coached little ones and I was like, I don’t want to coach anymore. It drives me nuts, they’re shooting balls all over the place, it’s frustrating, I’m inpatient as a teacher of tennis, I just want to play. So the same would apply to ultimate Frisbee. I have coached some people before but I always like captaining teams or being really part of really great teams and winning and partying hard.

So you do have to really look at the ones that you absolutely love and adore because you just love being in that moment, and then you have to look at the one that you genuinely like teaching people about. And I think this may sound odd for people, but if you think about conversations you have with friends, what are the things that you are always maybe helping them do? I go into business coaching mode with almost every person I meet unless somebody tells me to shut up, because if somebody’s struggling and they are genuinely asking me questions and I know I can add value and help them out, that’s when I go into that mode.

Now would I do that on some other things that I love? No, and that’s where I define the difference. So you know I think the things that you want to keep just to your yourself selfishly that you will always love and they are kind of like your guilty pleasure or the thing you just love to do and be in the zone of, and there are the other ones where genuinely feel I do like doing this and I think I can get paid pretty well for it.

So yeah, it’s something I think you figure out. And a lot of people go down that path and they are like, “Oh, no that wasn’t for me, great.” And then there is also that fine line that you have to figure out, is this just you being lazy or you being scared or you know really wanted to take this seriously. So lots of things you have to listen for and get a tune to.

Steve: So let’s say as your student I kind of found my sweet spot. How would I proceed to go ahead and generate let’s say my first $1000?

Natalie: Well first of all you will sign up for the Freedom Plan program.

Steve: But that would put me in debt Natalie.

Natalie: Whatever, it’s an investment that’s going to have a huge return for you. So what I’d look at then is– let’s say coming back to the chef or the French cook, I would look at the– I actually get people to do this as well. I get them to actually detail out the ideas that they have for revenue generation and then look at them all on a cost benefit analysis of what’s going to be the best and actually take them through this profit matrix.

So let’s say you are going to produce an eBook or recipe book, the cost of– uh some siren in the background. The cost of producing that might be, let’s say you pay $500 for a designer and maybe a little bit of formatting. So your baseline costs the 500 plus the time you put into it and let’s say you’re paying yourself $30 for an hour and it takes you 20 hours to write that. So 600 and you’ve spent $1100 on this book. If you are going to price it at $47, then you don’t need to sell a huge amount of copies to make that fair amount. And in addition if you can sell 20 or 30 copies a months, it’s not huge, but its bringing in the money, you’ve got a pretty good automated hopefully sales funnel to set you up and after a while you could earn a couple of grand a month from that book depending on what your sales funnel is for the very low and baseline costs.

Then the other option is you might want to run cooking workshops and you might want to hold them at a venue that has a baseline cost that’s not too much so you can charge quite a lot more. Let’s say you charge 300 for the day and you get 10 people along to each one and you run one a month. So it’s three grand from there and you cost– you can look at these after a while and go, “Okay, this is a great use of my time. This is a terrible use of my time. This has got a high return on investment; this has got a massive commitment upfront.”

And depending on where you’re at with your business and what type of business model you want, how much time you have to commit, whether you prefer to do stuff in person, whether you prefer to automate things, you can start to work out which revenue streams are going to be easiest for you. And online products, programs and places when you can monetize information on your knowledge can be very quickly put out online and make you money very quickly as opposed to some other things which take you a lot longer to setup. So it really comes back to your preferences.

Steve: So let’s say I wanted to sell something online and let’s say I’m not tech savvy at all. What sort of tools do you recommend to put up websites or collect e-mail addresses and that sort of thing? What’s your strategy that you would teach me if I was a student in your class?

Natalie: Well absolutely first off I think everybody knows that WordPress is like the gold standard for what used to be blogs but now great websites and there’s all these amazing web pristines that instantly allow you to create some form of basic shop, obviously not a full ecommerce store, but a membership site or even just a landing page and then you can actually put information behind that. Leadpages is probably one of my favorite tools for landing pages, launch sequence and sales pages, even mini-websites.

So I mean I kind of think there is no excuse now for not getting a website up in a day or two. It’s very basic, that has the minimal information but looks good and has the right call to action. And then in terms of delivering that, I mean there’s so many different ways. You can just do it via e-mail, you can send people to a secure page on a site, you can go for something like wish list or optimized press to have a membership site setup. I mean, there is a lot more tools and they’re all coming out on the last few pages etcetera.

And then you just need to figure out how you want to deliver that. Is it audio, is it video, is it a combination of both, is it PDFs? And I’ve seen a couple of posts recently and watched a few people do incredible and launches and do really well with very basic systems, because I think some people like to over complicate it. They have all these whiz-bang amazing things. I’ve done that in the past, like here is a membership forum, and here is a program in place, and here is a Facebook group and here is this and this and this. People are like, “I am just freaking confused. Give me the information.”

So I think there is a certain trend to getting back to basics and just minimalizing stuff and making it really simple so that it’s about the learning and the output, not about the whiz-bang, I look so beautiful up front.

Steve: And do you have an opinion on how to get the word out? Like there is blogging, you have a podcast, there is YouTube videos. I know you have experience in all the mediums and what kind of has worked the best for you.

Natalie: So interesting. Over time I think it’s different but I tend to pick the things that work best for my personality now. So for me interviews on podcasts or videos as well as webinars I think would be my number one choice over anything else. Guest posting fine, but takes a long time, a lot of effort, can have a long lead time, doesn’t seem to get the same amount of traction as it used to because there is lots more players in the industry. Obviously writing fantastic e-mails, really, really well crafted great copy to your email list and to key joint venture partners is another great way depending on what you’re launching.

So it really comes back to I think one the relationships you have with your existing audience and community to the relationships you have with influencers and people who have an existing community. So if I had zero audience right now and I was wanting to launch something, I would partner with one to five or 10 great people that I’ve built a relationship with and use their community instead. So there is always ways when you have nothing, right? But a lot of these things take time, and leverage, and you have to give value to get value back.

Steve: It sounds like networking and getting to know people is a large part of your strategy as well, right, as you just mentioned.

Natalie: It is now because I just think you can’t do this all alone and it seems silly to try and go and build something yourself when other people have already done a really great job of that. So I think it’s all about leveraging your time and skills there to really help them and help others.

Steve: Okay, because I was just curious. You mentioned you’d get JV partners. Let’s say you had nothing, how would you convince someone with a sizeable list to take part as a JV partner for what you are trying to sell?

Natalie: It’s a great question. You are trying to get everything out of me today. You are a good interviewer. It is a really great question. If I had zero knowledge of who that person was but– like I didn’t have any way into contact them directly, I would definitely ask around my own existing network, “Does anybody know this person or how to get in touch with them or could they do an intro? Because getting an into to somebody is far more beneficial than just cold calling them.

And if that doesn’t work, what I generally do is spend at least a week or two first off in their community, commenting on their blog, tweeting them. Like a lot of people are very active on Twitter and Facebook and just being active in person and kind of getting in their face in a good way makes you less of a stranger when you finally do hit them up via email or Twitter etcetera. I would even go the extra length these days to create a personal video and post it and ask somebody to either share it or get it to them directly so they get in front of them because it’s just a little bit more different than yet another email.

Steve: That’s a good, that’s interesting.

Natalie: It is interesting and a few people have done it for me and it’s really rocked my world. I am kind of like, “Oh I went to the effort of making a short video or a short audio and just saying, ‘You know what, here is why I love your work,” it’s always good for flattery and be credible about– like just don’t lie. So I really loved your latest blog post on this, I’ve been following it for a while, I love how you talk about this. I think this is an area that your community are calling out for and low and behold it’s something I’m really good at.

I would love the opportunity to be able to either guest post or be on your podcast show or do something to help you on this front. I just so happen to have– you know it depends how much you want to pitch them. But I happen to have a program that covers this, I would love to give you free access to it so you can look at it yourself to see whether it’s right for you and if you did like it, would you be willing to open up and to do [inaudible] [0:43:30] or introduce it to your audience or do something around it.

So I mean at the end of day think about how you’d like to be approached. You’d like to be one, know that the person knows you, that they understand the work you do, that they understand your community or who your customers and clients are and that they can add value and that it’s no pressure for them at all, like they have to do zero work. That’s going to get you know a yes.

Steve: Okay. And do you attend conferences as well?

Natalie: I do. Yeah, I love traveling around the world. I generally try to make the countries that I go and visit– either they have an ultimate Frisbee tournament, they have a conference or event that I want to go to, they have really good friends of mine or I have never visited it. And if it’s all those four things then it’s like a win. So I tend to try and go to the right kind of conferences and events that are really going to help me and also where my kind of people are going to be.

Steve: What’s your favorite entrepreneurship conference to go to?

Natalie: I have loved the World Domination Summit for the last four years in a row, I’ve been to it. I won’t be going this year unfortunately because I’ll be in Europe, but it’s my kind of people who are attending and speaking, and then my community is there in droves. So I think that one’s a really good one to go to and if not go to [inaudible] [0:44:35] because he’s a good friend. At least be in Portland during that time because there is just so many people now.

I haven’t been to NMX, you know, what formerly was BlogWorld for a very long, long time now. I think it’s grown really big but honestly when I went to it in 2010, it was fantastic for meeting the likes of like [inaudible] [0:44:52] and just some of those people that are key people now. And then this year I’m actually speaking in quite a few cool ones like Social Media Marketing World, the first digital nomad conference, NMX in Europe. So I just– you tend to be a bit choosy.

I actually prefer small in person events where there is maybe 10 to 50 people like [inaudible] [0:45:14] unmistakable creative conferences coming out of this very small and application only. I love doing my own mastermind retreats, I like going on retreats. So you really got to pick and choose what’s going to be the most beneficial for you and for what you are trying to do.

Steve: Okay. And I just have some random questions that are just out of my own curiosity here. Do you have health insurance? And since you’re always moving around, how does it work? How do you get mail, payments, checks, taxes?

Natalie: I’ve done some fun videos on this and I also have it on my Suitcase Entrepreneur book.

Steve: Oh you do, okay.

Natalie: But it makes me laugh how it’s always Americans who ask if I have health insurance. Just because I think you guys are obsessed with health insurance I frankly don’t care about it which is probably a silly attitude. I do usually go with World Nomads for insurance and that covers health, medical and liability in depth and all those wonderful things, and I used to take out a yearlong policy for the whole world which covers, you know, if I lose my luggage or whatever.

I frankly don’t care if I lose my luggage. I don’t really care about stuff, but obviously health and those things are quite important to me. So I’m bit lax on that, thank you for reminding me. I probably should sign up for one again. Most countries so health care is fairly minimal apart from if you’re in the US which is the only time I would probably cover myself. A lot of countries, you know, if you’re in Southeast Asia or South America it’s quite minimal to actually go and see a doctor or get some operations done, and so I kind of tend to know those places now, and often it’s way cheaper than doing it in the country, your own country of residence.

In terms of mailing address, I’m really good at relying on my friends. So if people are like, “Oh I need to send you my book or do something,” I just email the person I’m going to be with next or there is the hotel I’m going to stay in or the apartment and I just give them that. And outside of that I do have an address in New Zealand now which is on my mailing list because I bought the apartment, not that I’m going to be here.
But yeah, I just use that or I will use something like Regis offices where you can set up your own postal address with them and a couple of other resources in my book totally escaped my brain right now, but there are some really cool global offices that will take your mail and scan it, post it, send it, do whatever you want with it and they give you this kind of address that people can email to, so really useful.

Steve: Okay. Interesting yeah, it just blows my mind, your lifestyle– it’s not something I don’t think that I could live, but it sounds very interesting for sure.

Natalie: It is. It’s fascinating. I like the challenges that you get with it as well, you know, slowly bank some things are coming round to it. Whenever I phone them, I just have to call ahead and say, “I am going to be in this country, so please don’t stop my credit card.” And then, “Okay great, what’s your phone number and your address?” “I’m like I have no idea, just deal with it.” Like this is who I am, I think they’ve become used to me now.

Steve: Well that’s cool now. You know, we have already been talking for quite a while and I want to be respectful of your time. For those of you out there who are interested in Natalie’s program, so Natalie where can they find you and what’s the name of your website?

Natalie: I would love for them to come across and say hi, it’s suitcaseentrepreneur.com. I know it’s hard to spell so you can also Google Natalie Sisson. I used to misspell it all the time, and if they want to know about the Freedom Plan, suitcaseentrepreneur.com/freedomplan. But I am all over social media, they will find me there. I just love for them to say hello.

Steve: Okay. And do you have a Twitter– what’s the best way to reach you?

Natalie: Twitter is great, I am @Nataliesisson. I’m also Natalie Sisson on Facebook; I’m Suitcase Entrepreneur pretty much everywhere. Natalie Sisson on Instagram, come look at my photos from around the world. And yeah, those places are great.

Steve: Awesome. All right, well thanks a lot for coming on the show Natalie. Really appreciate it.

Natalie: Thank you so much for having me and absolutely drilling me with those great questions.

Steve: Drilling, that’s a little harsh. All right, well take care.

Natalie: Thank you.

Steve: Natalie is one of my favorite entrepreneurs. Not only does she have a cool accent but she’s super fun, down to earth and very easy to get along with, and I really admire what she’s done with her businesses to facilitate her lifestyle. In other words she makes her business adapt to her and not the other way around. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode61 and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.

When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month, for more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

Here’s What Adding Payment Plans Did To My Info Product Sales – The Good, The Bad And The Ugly

$
0
0

When I first launched my Create A Profitable Online Store Course in 2011, the price was only $299.

But as I continued to add content to the class and as the value of the course continued to rise, I began raising prices as well.

Payment Plans

Today, the cost of my class stands at $799 and it’s likely to increase again in a couple more months.

Here’s the thing. Whenever you sell an expensive product, there are always going to be people who will be intimidated by the price tag even if deep down they know that the cost is worth the money.

That is why it’s important to make your products as obtainable as possible by breaking up the costs into smaller, bite sized chunks.

This not only makes your product more attractive but it can often mean the difference between a customer leaving or making a purchase.

Today, I want to talk about all of the pros and cons that I personally experienced when I began offering payment plans for my class. It hasn’t been all sunshine and roses and at times, taking on payment plans has been a major pain in the butt.

Here are a list of things you need to consider if you plan on accepting payment plans for your products. When I first started, there was (and still is) very little information out there on the topic.

So everything that I’m writing about today is based on my own experiences and data. Enjoy and take everything I say with a grain of salt!

The Good: You Will Attract New Customers Who May Not Have Made A Purchase Otherwise

revenue

The biggest plus from accepting payment plans is that your sales will most likely increase dramatically.

Today I offer 2 different payment plans for my class which has allowed me to attract approximately 27% more customers than if I only offered a single, lump sum payment. 27%!!!!!

Here’s how my plans are currently structured.

  • 4 Payments of $225
  • 10 Payments of $99

Can you guess which plan is more popular?

90% of customers who pay in installments opt for the 10 payments of $99 plan even though it results in paying 100 extra dollars over the other plan.

Here’s what’s even more interesting.

When I experimented with the dollar amount of the “cheap” plan and increased the payment from $99 to $125, the overall percentage of payment plan customers went down dramatically even though the total overall cost was less.

I also tried small experiments of $79 and $89 respectively but they seemed to behave on par with the $99 price point.

So in my limited testing, I noticed that any price that crosses a double digit boundary elicits a strong negative psychological response.

Apparently, going from $99 to $100+ makes a huge difference from a mental standpoint and the number of payments involved does not seem to play as large of a part in the outcome. The per payment price matters more.

So if you plan on implementing a payment plan for your products, you’ll get dramatically more signups if you keep your payment amount under 3 digits.

The Bad: You Will Get More Returns

returns

Whenever a customer buys my class with a single lump sum payment, that customer is usually here to stay. The percentage of people that pay in full for my course and decide to make a return is extremely low (single digits).

In fact, I love it when someone makes a lump sum payment because it means that they are committed and the quality of the student tends to be higher on average.

On the other hand, the return percentage of students signing up for my class under a payment plan is significantly higher.

Looking at my stats, I would say that a payment plan student is almost 3X more likely to request a return at the end of the 30 day trial period.

Now that’s not to say that all payment plan students are bad. I have many students on payment plans who are doing extremely well but generally speaking, the level of commitment tends to be proportional to the monetary investment.

Here’s another interesting observation. Those that do make a return of my course usually do so in under a week and 90%+ of these people don’t bother watching more than a single video lesson (I keep track of what everyone watches in the class)

This implies that my payment plans may be attracting impulse buyers that may not be 100% serious about starting a business.

Overall, there’s clearly a tradeoff between making sales with a payment plan and attracting real committed customers.

By charging too little, you may attract people who won’t make good customers. But by charging too much, you might be missing out on a star pupil.

It’s definitely a delicate balance.

For me personally, I ALWAYS want to attract committed students.

After all, I want everyone to be successful so I can brag about my students and generate more sales through word of mouth. It’s in my best interests to make sure EVERYONE does well.

The Ugly: Accepting Payment Plans Will Result In More Administrative Headaches

One thing that I did not anticipate was the increased administrative overhead involved in accepting payment plans. Not only do you have to worry about extra returns but you also have to worry about credit cards being declined as well.

Every single month, there are always a few “failed payments” that I have to deal with which involves the following

  • I have to temporarily deactivate the student’s account
  • I have to email the student for a new card
  • I have to reactivate the account once payment is made

Sometimes I feel like a glorified collection agent which is very annoying. Thankfully, I have managed to automate the entire collection/deactivation/reactivation process by writing some custom code in my backend website.

But be aware that you will have to deal with extra administrative headaches if you ever decide to take on payment plans.

Overall

If you are willing to accept the good with the bad, then payment plans are a great way for you to increase sales of your products. As I mentioned earlier, I’ve managed to acquire 27% more signups simply by accepting multiple payments.

If you are interested in implementing a payment plan for your product, then consider this…

If you are just starting out, then keep the number of payments low to reduce the level of administrative headache.

For example, I’d start out with just 3 payments at first and then gradually increase this number as you become more comfortable with the process.

The dollar amount matters.

If you can keep each payment in the double digits, then you will make significantly more sales than if you cross the 3 digit boundary.

But on the flip side, you also want to consider the types of customers you might attract with lower prices. Overall, I would not recommend setting your price too low otherwise you’ll end up dealing with more troublesome buyers.

Also, I would not set the number of payments beyond a 12 month period. Otherwise, the total number of in flight customers may become too much to manage over time.

Take things slow, gradually work your way up and look for your sweet spot.

Do you accept payment plans for your products? Please share your experiences in the comments.

photo credit: Making Money Revenue Returns

MWQHJ 062: How Nellie Akalp Started CorpNet.com To Help Entrepreneurs Launch Their Businesses

$
0
0

Nellie Akalp

Nellie Akalp was the founder of MyCorporation.com which she later sold to Intuit for 20 million dollars. And today, she runs CorpNet.com which specializes in helping small business owners create their businesses.

She’s an expert when it comes to the legal and logistical aspects of setting up a business including the formation of corporations, legal permits, LLCs, you name it.

In this podcast interview, Nellie teaches us how she got started and how she managed to create 2 multi million dollar businesses from scratch.

In addition, Nellie was kind enough to offer MyWifeQuitHerJob.com readers 10% off any service.

To redeem the discount, click on this link and use coupon code: MWQHJ.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nellie got the idea to start CorpNet.com
  • Why Nellie didn’t call it day after making 20 million on her first startup
  • How and why Nellie’s strategy has changed with CorpNet.com from when she started MyCorporation
  • Why Nellie has taken a much more personal stance with CorpNet.com
  • How to stand out in a sea of similar competing businesses
  • How to launch a million dollar business with 4 kids
  • How to juggle a large family with running a business
  • How Nellie validated her business before investing a lot of money
  • How Nellie utilizes social media and blogging to promote her business
  • Why Nellie reduced her PPC spend for CorpNet.com

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

MyWifeQuitHerJob’s transcripts are done by Outsource2Africa.com, an awesome transcription service that is half the price of other competing companies. Highly recommended!

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m excited to have Nellie Akalp on the show. Now, Nellie was the founder of MyCorportaion.com which is a business that she eventually sold for $20 million to Intuit back in 2005. Now after making 20 million bucks a lot of normal people would just call it a day, but Nellie got back on her entrepreneurial feet and started CorpNet.com which helps entrepreneurs start their own businesses and this business is now a multimillion dollar business as well. Now I’ve had a lot of entrepreneurs on the show but here is what stands out about Nellie in my mind at least.
For one thing she has four kids which are her life and spending more time with family was actually one of the big reasons she started to start her own business in the first place, plus her husband is her business partner. Now does this story sound familiar to you? And with that welcome to the show Nellie, so happy to have you today.

Nellie: Thank you for having me Steve. It’s a pleasure.

Steve: So I am curious myself you know, after making 20 million bucks what’s the story behind kind of starting copnet.com which I understand is a very similar business.

Nellie: I was too bored to retire early and I was too passionate and I decided to start it all over again, and really completion is what really drives me, a good challenge is what really drives me and frankly I love the do it yourself business startup industry, I’m good at it. I stated back in 1997 and I thought you know, this is a great challenge to start all over again in 2009 and come up with you know similar services, but you know now we are in a different landscape and do it all over again and challenge myself and see if I can land on top again, and here we are.

Steve: So did you take any breaks after the sale, or did you just kind of jump into it?

Nellie: No, we sold in 2005 and when we sold we decided to take three years off. I was also under a non-compete in that I couldn’t do anything for about three years. So I decided to take that time, focus on my then three growing children, my family and then we decided to have another one along the way, and then after my non-compete run out in 2009 I was crawling out of my skin, so I decided to start CorpNet.com.

Steve: Did you have kids when you started MyCorporation or…?

Nellie: We actually did not. MyCorporation.com was founded in 1997 and back then Phil and I were just actually married, we had just gotten married back in September of 1997 and we were both in law school. And we lived in two bedroom apartment and we founded MyCorp out of our two bedroom apartment, and really put everything we had in it and really there was no risk for us because we had nothing to lose, and then along the way we had our twins in 2001.

Steve: Oh, twins.

Nellie: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: Yes, my first were a set of twins.

Steve: Wow! Wow! So you know what’s really funny about this is I used to promote MyCorporation.com. Is CorpNet.com essentially the same business?

Nellie: It is, it’s essentially the same business just different people, different time frame, and you know different owners.

Steve: Okay, And then I’m just curious, what the differences that you’ve seen in starting CorpNet versus back in the day when you started My Corporation, what are some of the differences?

Nellie: So when we started MyCorporation.com it was in an era where it was at the birth of the internet and when we started CorpNet the internet was you know at its maturity and we starting during the age of the social media era, and when we started Corpnet.com we were actually at the height of a recession in 2009. So the landscape was much different for us, back in 1997 you could put up a one page website, you would get linked on the search engines. There was no Google. You know we were dealing with Laicos [ph] and EarthLink and…

Steve: Right.

Nellie: NetScape and AOL and Yahoo and you would just literally, you know put up a one page website and you would get indexed really quickly and the orders started rolling in. I mean you didn’t have to have a credit card type of mechanism on your website. People would just leave their credit card numbers on your answering machine. So it was a different landscape, you know we didn’t have a ton of competitors back then in the online incorporation industry, so it was a much less competitive landscape for us. And it was easy to you know, build the business up and really you know, start making money and the dough stated rolling in really quickly for us, whereas in 2005 when we launched CorpNet.com I was dealing with a whole different ball game.

I had to you know deal with hundreds of thousands of competitors that had now you know gotten hold of the idea of starting businesses online and offering different types of– going after different angles of providing do it yourself services such as the one we provide even you know, free services. And then you know I had to deal with my previous company that I’m now competing with in addition to LegalZoom.com, which everyone refers to as the 800 pound gorilla and the household brand, they have done an excellent job marketing themselves.

So it was a complete different landscape for me and you know I followed my heart, I followed my gut and I followed my mantra which is and has always been there is plenty of business to go around for everybody if you have a model, if you have a niche and if you niche yourself and market yourself properly. And I decided to come out and brand myself as a small business expert who’s done this several times, and has started and sold multiple companies and has also sold a company to a publicly traded company. And by doing that and coming out and launching CorpNet in a very saturated market, you know we were again on top and we did it the right way, and I consider myself, you know, one of the big players out there.

Steve: You know one thing I noticed about CorpNet.com, I went on the website and right from the center is a picture of you, and so it feels a lot more personal to me than some of the other legal zooms and Mycorporations out there was that your intention?

Nellie: Yes, it was. I really wanted people especially small business owners and entrepreneurs to connect with me at a very personal level, and it actually carries through to the way I engage on the social mediums with my friends and followers as well. I’m very personable with my clients, my followers, my fans, and I’m very consistent in doing that because I think we are in an era whereby if you are familiar with that whole zero moment of truth concept about– with Google, you know you can’t hide behind your company. You have to engage with people, and that’s what clients we are looking for, and that’s how we differentiate ourselves from our competitors.

Steve: So does that imply that if I were to call or get on the website I could actually have access to you if I signed up for CorpNet today?

Nellie: Oh, my goodness, so I don’t know if you are familiar with Andrew Warner, he runs the Mixergy podcast.

Steve: Yeah, I know Andrew, yeah-yeah,

Nellie: So if you’ve actually seen my podcast interview with him, he actually challenged me and while we were actually doing the podcast he called here and…

Steve: Is that right?

Nellie: Yeah.

Steve: And the answer to that question is yes, if you call and you specifically ask to talk to me and if I’m in the office you’ll get me, you’ll get through to me.

Steve: Oh, wow!

Nellie: Yes.

Steve: Okay, so I had some questions written down here about why you would a start a competing business, and how you could possibly succeed in such a saturated area, but it sounds like you are standing out with CorpNet by just your whole personality so to speak. Is that kind of accurate to describe your strategy here?

Nellie: I would say it’s my personality, I mean I don’t like talking about myself and tooting my own horn, and that’s where you know, but I feel that people connect with me because I am very genuine and I’m very sincere in my posture, and I truly love doing what I do, and it’s really been something that I’ve been passionate about since a very young age. You know entrepreneurship and having a business for yourself is not in my opinion for everyone, you know. You have to have the stomach and the– in my opinion you have to have the stomach and really the patience to want to do it yourself, and to be able to be so organized and motivated, to bring that motivation from within.

And so in my opinion it’s really not for everyone, but it is for those who can really motivate themselves, they can be organized and be able to make themselves excited and to be able to create, and to really–really not be at the mercy of wanting to get guidance or you know direction from anybody else, and are willing to do it themselves. And in addition to that it’s just you know, in my opinion it’s that drive that I have and what drives me is interest, curiosity, and that passion I have about learning and trying new things and really-really finding out what others are doing and really helping them blaze their trails, because that’s what makes me excited is when I see someone else being as successful as I am, in my opinion I have done what I’ve needed to do.

Steve: Yeah, you know there is no doubt that you’re very successful in what you’ve done and I’m just curious for myself, like I have two kids and you have four, and my two kids are already occupying almost all of my time, like I have to kind of find time in the nights and that sort of thing. It sounds like you are very actively involved in CorpNet, so how do you kind of juggle the four kids and the business?

Nellie: You know I take it one day at a time, because you know it’s a challenge and I’m not going to sit here and you know paint this rosy picture of, oh you know, we have the perfect family and the perfect kids. You know my kids are, kids are kids, and I have two kids that are teenagers, so-

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: They are pushing back right now and they are pushy you know we are in this era of social media with Instagram, Facebook, Twitter, texting and face timing and you know my daughter pushes me and challenges me on a daily basis. My son is a football player and he’s a complete athlete, so you know he’s got girls following him all over the place and you know they give mea hard time when it comes to just kind of settling down and doing their homework.
And you know at the end of the day I just take a deep breath, I meditate and you know, they know who the boss is and that there is time for playing and there is time where we all have to get serous because at the end of the day mom has her mommy time and moms got to work to provide for the family and I you know I treat my kids like little adults and I always talk with them, and I always try to communicate with them and keep the lines of communications open because you know, what they have and the privileges that they get to have– it’s all a privilege, but they wouldn’t have those if mommy and daddy weren’t able to work.

Steve: So would you generally try to keep your weekends free for the kids and the family?

Nellie: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: Weekends are specifically for family and friends and just pure fun. I keep my work at work, and I’m very-very– you know one of the things about me is I’m a very– I’m an A type personality, so I’m organized as you’ll ever get. At the end of the day there is zero emails in my inbox.

Steve: Wow!

Nellie: And my desk is clear with everything I’ve had to do for that day, and this has been something that you know I’ve done most of my time that I have been an entrepreneur is that you respond to things timely, and you get things done as they come across your desk. And that really helps with staying organized and staying afloat and you know, I try to do 80% in 20% of the time, and I follow that 80-20 rule and it works for me.

You know I come in here around nine or ten o’clock in the morning. Sometimes I break it up, I come in, in the morning really early after I drop off the kids, and then I’ll take a break, I’ll go to the gym and then I’ll finish the day up with working a little bit more. Some days I’ll just drop them off early because drop off is by eight and I’m in the office by eight, and I finish by three. Everyday I’m normally done by about three or 3:30 which is the time that I need to pick up my kids from school.

Steve: Nice, okay, it sounds very similar to the schedule my wife has. I mean that’s one of the reasons we started, so my wife could get that flexible schedule to be a personal taxi driver for our kids, you know.

Nellie: That’s exactly what- a personal taxi driver, and sometimes we get called even while I’m on a podcast or an appearance, “Hey mom, I forgot my book or text book or my gym clothes, I need you to drop it off,” and for me it’s an honor you know, because kids they group so fast you know. I look at Nadia and Nicholas who are 13 years old right now, and I kid you not, it’s like I miss their baby years, and I probably have just a few more years with them before they are off to driving themselves to school and off to college.

Steve: I know, I know.

Nellie: So in my opinion it’s a privilege to be a parent, and that’s my utmost priority in life and then it’s my business.

Steve: And that’s one of the reasons why I like you so much Nellie.

Nellie: Oh, thank you, well, the feeling is mutual.

Steve: So a lot of the readers, I mean not readers– listeners out there, they want to start their own business and I teach a class on how to do this, and one of the things I kind of tell them is to try and stay away from really saturated areas unless you have a really unique value proposition. So would you advice people out there to and you know starting corporations and helping people start businesses is kind of a very saturated niche, right? You mentioned LegalZoom and Mycorporation. So do you– what’s your thought process involved in going after a saturated niche, and would you advice this for other people out there thinking about starting their own businesses?

Nellie: I think it’s a case by case scenario and you really hit the nail on the head because my business CorpNet.com is in a market that’s as saturated as it gets. I mean what a small world that you used to promote MyCorporation.com.

Steve: Yeah.

Nellie: I mean that’s as saturated as we get, and then in my opinion the answer to your question would be to– if you’re really thinking about going into a saturated industry, I don’t want to say, you know not to do it, but if you are going to do it, you better have a plan and you better have a plan and be able to fall back up on a backup plan. So not only have a plan but a have a backup, and you better know your numbers very well and stay close to your numbers because at the end of the day it’s all about the numbers and your analytics, and really if it’s going to be a business that’s going to make you money, you know.

And in addition to that, I mean passion of course you know I talk about passion and how whatever it is that you do you got to be passionate about it, but if your passion lies in launching a product or service that’s in an extremely saturated market, then my suggestion is to test it out and see what sort of a commitment you are going to be getting from ultimately the potential clients that are going to be buying your products or services, because if they are going to ultimately write you the cheque, you might as well test
it out with those people who are going to be ultimately writing your cheque and supporting your business, so…

Steve: Okay, can we talk about CorpNet specifically? So what was your plan? How did you validate your business before you are starting and what was your back up plan? That’s the three loaded question there.

Nellie: So with CorpNet and truly, there is no BF about this, we started CorpNet because of my boredom, I was bored, and I was crawling out of my skin. My husband was not ready at all to jump back in, and I really-really wanted to start all over again. And I had tried everything from a clothing line in addition to dabbling in some you know fitness types of businesses, and I often found myself sitting at my friends businesses and trying to excite them about building their business.

So when my non compete run out I literally went to my husband and said I got to get back into this you know because this is really where my heart and passion lies. So we went online and we searched for domain names on the internet, and there was not many available. Inventory was really low. So we came up with the shortest name possible which was CorpNet seven letters, two syllables.
So we decide to go with that name, launched it, and really-really thought that we could launch a business following old models and old behaviors, and really follow it to the T as to how we started our first company, soon to realize that what worked then would not work today, and what worked then would not work now.

Steve: Let’s talk about that. So the year is 2009, what’s your strategy for getting customers in the door?

Nellie: Today well, I can’t give all of it out because I don’t know who’s listening, and most of my competitors you know follow me very closely, but again you know our strategy is we take a very-very strong social media strategy with CorpNet.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: And it’s all content based.

Steve: Okay, so let’s– can we get some examples? So when you mention social media that encompasses a lot of things, so what do you focus on? Is it Facebook, Twitter, blogging, what’s your– what have you been focusing on?

Nellie: All of the above.

Steve: All of the above, okay.

Nellie: All of the above. I mean I have a very-very-very strong, you know stand, a strong-strong presence across the board in every small business related website ranging from Mashable to TechCrunch to Huffington post, Entrepreneur INCs, Small business trend, all business, Forbes, Fresh books, you know, I write for the majority of the blogs out there. In addition I have my own blog, startup starting line, which really serves as a place for entrepreneurs to come and whatever they need, whether it’s motivation, inspiration, tips on how to start a business, tips on how to market their business.

Anything and everything as related to small business, they can come there and they can find really great tips. My blogs is one of the highly read blogs out there right now, and in addition to that you known, I run my own brand Nellie Akalp and under Nellie Akalp, I speak a lot. I’m an author and I’ve written several books that are in the process of being published, and I speak nationwide you know as a blogger, as a motivator and then you know I do my own you know, social posts on Facebook, on Twitter, Google plus, you know anything and everything you can thing about.

I try to do, I mean even from the stand point of running a small business and giving my ideas as to on my spare time for example what do I do? And so just last week I was on this real estate blog you know. So I try to stay very active and stay very consistent with my social media efforts, but I also I’m not picky you know, I think that arrogance can really-really bite you big time you know in a negative way.

I’m very humble and every opportunity that comes across I take it you know, and I don’t say no, I mean if I’m not here, if I’m not travelling or speaking or you know have another commitment, I will take on the opportunity and I will participate in that opportunity, because my motto is, you know, I was once that small and people gave me chances. So I’m going to give it back, I’m going to pay it forward, I’m going to pay it back to somebody else you know and right now you know I’ve made a very strong brand for myself and you know, I’m in a very-very highly frequently visited outlets, but I stay true to my core and I stay true to who I am as a person.

Steve: Yeah, that’s a really great attitude to have, and a lot of times you never know, you know someone who’s just starting out may become big someday as well and so-

Nellie: Yes, I always say don’t bite the hand that feeds you.

Steve: So you mentioned a lot of things, now if I were to start out with a business, which one of those outlets would you kind of focus on first, and which one’s would you kind of put off till later?

Nellie: You know as a small business owner as a startup you know, in my opinion for those people who don’t have a lot of you know money to start a business with, you really want to start it on a shoe string budget and go after you know types of marketing that really doesn’t cost you much. So in my opinion you know, start with Facebook, start with Twitter. If you are you know someone who is good on camera you know, why don’t you start by posting some videos of you yourself talking about your products and services and create a You Tube channel for yourself.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: I mean there is a ton of things that you can do that don’t cost anything, you know start a newsletter, you know if you have a base, if you have a customer base, so have your hands on you know network of email addresses that you can market your products and services to, you know start that way. Another option would be to offer your services, you know by speaking somewhere for free you know, network with people. I mean back in 2009 when I started, I would just go to trade shows and you know, start networking with people without purchasing a booth, or you know paying those horrendous types of dollars in marketing ourselves. We started very-very-very lean and made some mistakes along the way, and learned very quickly from them.

Steve: Okay, so how did you get your first CorpNet.com customer?

Nellie: My first CorpNet.com customer was through paid advertising.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: Brand advertising on Google.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about that a little bit.

Nellie: Which was a big mistake by the way.

Steve: It was really? So okay, let’s talk about that. So do you use paper click today?

Nellie: Very minimally.

Steve: Interesting.

Nellie: We were at one point probably spending about a 100-$150,000 a month Steve on paper click advertising. Again this is something that we learnt very quickly, in that again what worked then will not necessarily work now. And what we realized is that I have such a great following and such a huge following from a social media aspect that CorpNet has really created a brand for itself.
So my New Year goal was to cut my advertising budget to literally 1% of what it was last year. And not only we’ve increased revenues and units last year, but we’ve also increased our bottom line and increased our profitability and profit margin as well.

Steve: Interesting, so with paper click, we run paper clicks campaigns and they are profitable, so when they are profitable there is no reason not to max it out, so does that imply that your paper click campaign started showing diminishing returns?

Nellie: Again you are– you can’t compare paper click in my industry to paper click in your industry you know.

Steve: Sure, of course, right.

Nellie: It’s two different ball games and in our industry you are dealing with hundreds of thousands of people that are offering similar services to what we offer, and they drive prices high you know, by competing over key words.

Steve: Right.

Nellie: So we decided that it just wasn’t cost effective to us, it’s not that it doesn’t work, off course it works and it brings you the traffic, but at what cost? You know and that’s really the question you have to ask yourself, is at what cost are you willing to spend money on paper clicks? For us we decided that there was a ton of other ways that we can bring traffic to the site at a much less costly way than paper click advertising.

Steve: Okay. So to make up for the lack of paper click traffic, what did you guys focus your efforts on to make up for it?

Nellie: We focused our efforts on increasing our publicity out there, our public relations, our networking, again putting more focus on content and building out content and publishing it on the internet.

Steve: Okay, okay and then public…

Nellie: And content creation.

Steve: Content creation on your own properties or just spread around on all the other properties that you kind of listed earlier?

Nellie: A little bit of both.

Steve: Okay, I mean I can tell you now just you know before I didn’t know a whole lot about you prior to this interview, but once I started looking around and just looking at your competitors, I have come to realize that CorpNet.com, I feel a lot better about your business because you are so friend centered. It feels like a lot more personal than some of the other services which would incline me to use you as opposed to someone else, and I think that was your goal because you’ve done a pretty good job at that.

Nellie: Yes, that was the goal and you know in addition we really don’t hide ourselves, you know. We are very-very intuitive with our clients and you know we are constantly engaging with our clientele and asking for clients to share their experience about CorpNet with other people that are considering starting a business. So you know if you haven’t been on our review sites you may want to check out the raves that you know people talk about CorpNet.

Steve: You know, and I mentioned I have promoted a lot of these type of businesses in the past because I teach this stuff, and I had kind of stopped over the years because I have gotten bad reviews from people who I referred over, and so I kind of stopped all together.

Nellie: Yeah.

Steve: It sounds like that’s what the industry kind of needed, someone who is more personal who would actually be more actively involved in helping someone start up a business so-

Nellie: Yes, and you know Steve, really I want to touch on something that you just brought up, you know any company in my opinion is going to have a customer that may not be satisfied with their products and services. And at the end of the day it’s how you deal with that client to make them whole and make them feel happy, because I think clients, even unhappy clients at the end of the day will become happy as long as the service provider took the necessary steps to really validate their dissatisfaction with whatever it was that they were having or feeling, and what it turned out like? How did it end?

So you know CorpNet had– most of the time we have really happy clients, but there has been times where a client may have been dissatisfied with our products and services, but for me and what differentiates us from the rest is how we deal with that client, and how that client is dealt with. So you know if I get a not so happy email over the weekend, every email comes across my phone, and I see it, I will personally respond to that client and I will make sure every step is taken to make that client happy at the end of the day.

Steve: Yeah, and often times once you resolve that they became raving fans of your business, right?

Nellie: Every time, every time.

Steve: Yeah. Okay, I want to switch gears a little bit because this question has kind of been on my mind. Now, your husband has always been your business partner, right?

Nellie: And my best friend.

Steve: And your best friend.

Nellie: Yes.

Steve: Okay, so I’ve worked with my wife for the past eight years, and let’s just say that it hasn’t always been smooth. So how do you work…

Nellie: We’ve thrown tables at each other FYI. I mean we are best friends, we are business partners, but it doesn’t mean that we always agree.

Steve: Yeah, what are some of the methods that you use to kind of work effectively with your spouse, like especially when you kind of disagree on some sort of direction or strategy?

Nellie: Okay, so working with your spouse again is not for every small business owner. For Phil and I it works because we are both only children and our relationship started when we met in college, finding that we had similar interests. In fact we graduated you know, both under the same major and then decide to pursue law together. So we had very similar interests and the foundation of our relationship was we met as study buddies you know, as classmates.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: And what works for us and now as married individuals, married for over 18 years, been together for over 20 years, having been parents of four children is a lot of hard work, a lot of therapy. I told you, I’m very honest, a lot of therapy and you know what I’ve realized is that when I actually met my husband, I didn’t love him as I love him today you know and how close I am to him today. But really it’s about validating each other’s feelings, leaving egos aside, and really when you are a partner in a business working towards one goal is really to look at things as to what’s in the best interest for the business, because I’ll tell you, Phil and I are very different people. He is a very nice individual, you know very-very nice.

Steve: So does that imply…

Nellie: I, you know most people would refer to me as the bad cop, him as he good cop, but I’ll tell you this, if things get to a point where he needs to step it up, he will step it up you know. He just doesn’t come out that way when you first meet him, but at the same time he– I would not be here if it wasn’t for my husband you know, and I– he’s my best friend, he’s my biggest supporter and he’s my greatest supporter, my biggest critic.

He always pushes me out of my comfort, but it’s respect. We respect each other, you know, when you work with your spouse there has to be respect. You have to be working in linear type rules where you are not above each other, and frankly at the end of the day you got to look at what’s best for the business. You can’t always win you know, and that’s what comes first.

Steve: I never win, I don’t even know what it feels like so. So actually one thing that you said was very key, you have to work linearly which means people– each of you have to work on kind of separate projects and be the owner of that project, that’s kind of what has worked for us. But just the other day we had this argument about how we were going to run our Valentine’s Day promotions, so sometimes it still happens. That’s the only thing we fight about is the business, we don’t fight about anything else.

Nellie: Yes-yes linear roles in a business especially when you are running a business with your spouse in my opinion is my first tip if you want to have a successful business running it with your spouse, and in addition with that have a healthy marriage. My second tip is that you have to keep it separate. You got to keep your business separate from your personal life because ultimately it’s going to creep in if you let it creep in, and for us we mandate date night every week [Inaudible] [00:39:43] because we are together literary eight hours a day at the business, and we have meetings that are together with different team members.

So we are always in work mode when we are in the business. So we try to keep work at work and our home life very separate because otherwise you literally become business partners, and that intimacy, that feeling of love and passion kind of gets a little bit blurry along the way.

Steve: Okay, yeah I know, that’s great advice and something that I wish you had told me before I got in all those arguments but…

Nellie: I’m sorry it’s not too late Steve.

Steve: Okay, so switching gears again, so let’s say I want to start a business today, it’s 2015 what would be the very first step that you would have me take to kind of go out and promote and decide which niche was the correct one for me to pursue?

Nellie: My first suggestion to you is test the idea.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: Test the idea, talk to people. Talk to people who– listen everybody is going to come up to you and they are going to give their opinion and two cents. Some people are going to just tell you it’s a great idea because they want you to have you like them. Some people are going to tell you your idea sucks, at the end of the day none of those suggestions matter. You have to go people are going to ultimately write a cheque for your products and services. So test it out.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: If you- if it’s a go and if you are passionate about it, you are going to have to ask yourself, “Am I really cut out for this, am I cut out to have obstacles in the way that come up unexpectedly?” Am I going to have the stomach for ups and downs with the business? Do I have the financial backing to fall back on? And a lot of it goes to talking with your family. If you are having a household that you are have to support, talking possibly to your significant other, to your wife, to your children and really making sure that everybody is in because running a business, starting a business in my opinion is like giving birth to a child you know.
When you give birth to a child, you have feed them at every given minute, you know night, day, middle of the day, afternoon, the business is like that too. When you start a business you have to roll your hands up, and you cannot have your lifestyle dictate that business. That business in its infancy just like a child is in their infancy, it needs that love and care and that you know, day and night kind of TLC from you as the business owner. And if you have that in you then I would say go for it, and then otherwise– other than that would be the legal steps that you have to take to make sure that the business is properly getting off the ground.

Steve: Okay, and then you mentioned, you know, you focused on validating your niche, any particular methods that you recommend? Landing pages, legwork, anything that you could suggest or maybe an experience that you did when you started out with CorpNet?

Nellie: Again you know I would suggest for you to do a competitive analysis out there on what niche, what market it is that you are trying to enter depending on what your industry is and what products and services you are trying to market out there, and you know talk to people, get a mentor, if you have a friend who is a running a successful business. If you know people in the same industry, start talking to them you know.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: And just to a lot of soul searching fact finding and then come up with a business plan, and a backup plan as well.

Steve: Okay, hey Nellie you seem like a really driven person, but are you influenced by anyone through either a book or presentation, like who’s your idol?

Nellie: Wow! I think for me you know, the entrepreneurship again is something that has you know been in me since a very young age you know. I am an only child, I come from a set of parents that were divorced, so I always had to take care of myself and I always had to, kind of had that survivor mentality, but you know I always align myself with people that know more than me and I can you know take direction from both good and criticism as well.

My husband is my best friend; again he’s one of my idols. I think he is very inspiring to me and in my opinion he’s amazing at what he does, and he has a very-very innovative mind, and I consider him my idol, my best friend and someone that I would probably want to be partners with for the rest of my lie. In fact that’s my rule, I never partner with anybody else, but I love reading books and Tony Hseih, he is the– he’s actually the CEO of Zappos.com. His book really inspired me at the inception of CorpNet.com, and that was something that really pulled me through and really-really gave me a lot of tools and tips as to how I want to model CorpNet and how I want to run CorpNet.

Steve: Yes. It shines through, I mean customer service is everything and it just feels like CorpNet.com is a very– it feels like a family business as opposed to a large corporation so-

Nellie: It is, it is, it is and we like it that way, and we like to continue growing it that way.

Steve: And so Nellie we’ve been talking for quite a while now. I want to be respectful of your time. Should I just suggest that people just dial your phone number to get a hold of you, or are there other ways to get a hold of you as well?

Nellie: Absolutely, the best way to reach out to us is by obviously visiting our website at www.CorpNet.com. You can always reach out to us by calling us toll free at 188-4492-638 or email us to info@corpnet.com, you can visit me on Twitter, follow me on Twitter @Corpnetnellie or @Corpnet, and I will make sure that your business is set up legally and professionally in any state that you want to set up in.

Steve: That sounds great Nellie, thanks a lot for coming in the show, really had a great conversation.

Nellie: It’s a pleasure Steve, thank you for having me.

Steve: Okay, thanks.
Here is what I love about Nellie. She already made enough money to retire when she sold MyCorporation.com to Intuit, but instead of resting on her laurel, she got back on the horse, started another multimillion dollar company with CorpNet.com, and I just overall I just love her passion for helping others. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode62 and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.
Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this info, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month, for more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mfwifequitherjob.com.

Thanks for listening to the Wife Quite Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.MyWifeQuiteHerJob.com.

Buying A Cheap SSL Certificate Vs A Name Brand Like Verisign Or GeoTrust And Is EV Necessary?

$
0
0

I haven’t had to deal with SSL issues for over 5 years now. When I moved my websites over to dedicated hosting several years ago, I purchased a 5 year certificate from GoDaddy for $10/yr and haven’t had to think about it since.

SSL Certificates

But my SSL certificate expires this year and when I logged in to renew, I was appalled to discover that GoDaddy had jacked up their SSL prices to $70/yr!!

Worse yet, all of the awesome coupons found online apply to new customers only. What a rip off!

Anyway, there’s pretty much no reason why any regular ecommerce store should fork over that kind of money for an SSL certificate. But here’s the problem…

There are so many options to choose from and there’s a lot of trickery and misinformation in the industry. So I decided to write this article to demystify the entire process. Goodbye GoDaddy! $70/yr is a rip off!

The Difference Between Renewing And Buying A New Certificate

SSL Renew Vs Buy

Remember when I said that all of the GoDaddy coupons found online only apply to new certificates and not for renewals?

One of their strategies to extract more money from you is to offer you a very inexpensive initial price and then jack you later when it comes time to renew.

But the key question here is…do you really have to renew versus buying a new certificate?

Here’s the difference.

With an SSL certificate renewal, the amount of time left in your existing certificate is added onto the new certificate duration.

For example if you have 4 months left on your existing cert and you purchase a 2 year renewal, then you will receive a new cert that will last 2 years and 4 months.

However if you were to buy a brand new certificate, then you would only receive a 2 year duration and lose the leftover 4 months on your existing cert.

Here’s what’s deceiving. SSL providers will lead you to believe that renewing is the only option. And often times, renewing is much more expensive than buying a brand new certificate because coupons don’t usually apply to renewals.

At least that’s how GoDaddy works. You should check, but sometimes it’s cheaper to just buy a brand new certificate and simply eat the existing time left on your old certificate.

Does Brand Matter For Your SSL Certificate?

SSL Options

In addition to deciding whether to renew or buy a new one, there’s also the question of what brand to buy. You’ve got your Verisigns, your GeoTrusts, your GoDaddys….Is there any real difference?

The answer depends on your application.

If all you are doing is browser based ecommerce, then almost every cheap SSL certificate will do.

In other words, if your primary means of making transactions is through a web browser like Chrome, Safari, IE, Firefox etc…, you don’t need to pay for an expensive certificate.

Almost all of the cheap certs will work and are recognized across all of the popular web browsers. But you should check with your SSL vendor just to make sure.

The only time buying a “name-brand” certificate might matter is if you are doing transactions on a device that doesn’t use a popular 3rd party browser. For example, let’s say you want to make a secure transaction on a set-top box application…

Or if you want to make a secure transaction on a wearable device that uses its own proprietary software.

In these cases, you should consider a name brand SSL certificate like Verisign because it will work across more devices. But regardless, you should always check to make sure that whatever browser or app you are targeting is going to recognize your SSL certificate vendor.

Moral of the Story: 99.9% of the time, any old cheap SSL will work just fine for your ecommerce store!

What About Extended Validation Certificates?

EV Certificates

A premium EV (Extended Validation) SSL certificate is one where the issuing authority will do a much more thorough background check on your company to make sure it’s legit.

Here’s what they check.

  • They check your legal identity and verify that you are the website owner
  • They check that you are in fact the domain name owner and that you have exclusive control over the domain name
  • They confirm the identity and authority of anyone (if applicable) acting for the website owner, and that documents are signed by an authorized officer.

As a result, you won’t get an EV SSL certificate overnight. Often times, it will take several days or weeks.

Now why would you ever get one of these EV certificates?

For one thing, some browsers will detect an EV certificate and make the entire address bar green to further ensure that the connection is secure.

This in theory is supposed to increase your conversion rate… Personally, I’ve never heard of anyone getting higher conversion rates from an EV cert but I’d do some testing on your site just to make sure.

The only reason I would consider purchasing an EV certificate is if I were running a financial institution or one where absolute trust is crucial.

Often times, these more expensive certificates offer extended insurance in case there’s an SSL breach due to the certificate authority getting hacked (I don’t know if anyone has ever redeemed this insurance however:)).

Where Do I Get My SSL Certificates

As you can probably tell from the beginning of the post, I ditched GoDaddy right away. For a regular old ecommerce store, there’s no reason that you should be paying more than $20/yr for an SSL cert.

In fact, I would even go as far as to say that you shouldn’t be paying more than $10/yr.

I get all of my SSL certificates now at a company called NameCheap.com. They offer a wide variety of certs but usually I just go with the $10 variety.

In terms of differentiating SSL certificates from the cheap options, here are the main differences that I’ve noticed.

  • The cheapest of the cheap certificates won’t provide you with a trust seal to put on your site. While your connection is secure, you have to find your own graphic to display on your site
  • A mid grade cheap certificate will have a static trust seal that you can use on your site. This is essentially just a canned jpg file.
  • The best of the cheap certificates will offer a dynamic seal, which when clicked will take the user to a webpage that shows that the certificate is legit

Personally, I don’t think any of this really matters. As long as you are displaying trust seals during checkout, it doesn’t really matter whether it needs to be dynamic or not.

As long as the user sees a “secure logo” and the padlock on their browser, it’s good enough.

Click here to buy a perfectly good SSL certificate at a very low price

Viewing all 505 articles
Browse latest View live


Latest Images